Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 3164

INTRODUCTION

General Information

i How to Use This Manual


This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
Y o u can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. T h e s y m b o l s printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick reference
system.

Specifications
Maintenance

Each section includes:


1. A table of contents, or an exploded v i e w index showing:
Parts d i s a s s e m b l y s e q u e n c e .

^Engine Electrical

Bolt torques and thread sizes.


Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.

Engine Mechanical

3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.

Engine Cooling

Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, w e have provided safety
m e s s a g e s , and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. Y o u must use
your own good judgment.

Fuel and Emissions


" Transaxie

Y o u will find important safety information in a variety of forms


including:

*Steering

Safety Labels on the vehicle.


Safety M e s s a g e s preceded by a safety alert symbol fa and
one of three signal w o r d s , D A N G E R , W A R N I N G , or C A U T I O N .
T h e s e signal w o r d s m e a n :
.

Y o u W I L L be KILLED or S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.

^WARNING I

Y o u C A N be KILLED or S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.

i
A CAUTION I

Y o u C A N be H U R T if you don't follow


instructions.

ADANGER I

Instructions

Suspension! Including
TPMS)
' BrakesOnciuding VSA

how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.

Body
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. W e reserve
the right to make c h a n g e s at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
s y s t e m , or transmitted, in any form by any m e a n s , electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. T h i s includes text,
figures, and tables.
A s you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a | NOTICE | s y m b o l . The purpose of this m e s s a g e is to
help prevent d a m a g e to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
First Edition 04/2009
All Rights Reserved
Specifications apply to USA and Canada

*Heoiiny, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning
*Bociy blectrical
"Audio., Navigation,, and
T?-!err id tics

Honda Motor Co., Ltd.


Service Publication Office
t e s t r a i n t s

As sections with * include S R S components;


special precautions are required when servicing.
>;
marked sections are not included in this
l l l l l l l l manual, see Volume 2.

2009-10 Pilot Vol.1

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)


The Pilot SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof,
and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this
Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and tools, and
should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
frontal or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and side curtain airbags.
Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor,
especially w h e n the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, center console, dashboard, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the
roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

General Information
General Information
C h a s s i s and Paint Codes
'09 Model
'10 Model
Identification Number Locations
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Under-hood Emission Control Label
Lift and Support Points
Towing
Parts Marking
Precautions for Variable Torque Management 4WD
(VTM-4) S y s t e m

1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-11
1-11

General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes - '09 Model
Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

5 F N Y F 4 8 2 * 9 B 000001

J35Z4

rrrrrrri
a

b c def g h

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle


5FN: Honda Manufacturing of Alabama, L L C
Honda multipurpose passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
YF3: Pilot(2WD)/J35Z4
YF4: Pilot(4WD)/J35Z4
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
8: 5-door/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
2:LX
4: E X
5: E X - L
6: E X - L with Rear Entertainment System
8: TOURING
9: TOURING with Rear Entertainment System
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
9: '09
g. Factory Code
B: Lincoln Factory in Alabama
h. Serial Number

000001-: U S A models

Vehicle Identification Number


and Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification
and Paint Code Label.
Vehicle Identification Number
and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification
and Paint Code Label.

PAINT CODE

a
a. Engine Type
J35Z4: 3.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Variable Cylinder
Management Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number

Transmission Number
PN4A

- 6000001

a
a.

b.

Transmission Type
PN3A: 5-speed Automatic(4WD)
PN4A: 5-speed Automatic(2WD)
Serial Number

Paint Code

500001 - : Canada models

1-2

- 1000001

INTERIOR COLOR CODE

Code

Color

B-552P
NH-578
NH-689M
NH-705M
NH-707
NH-741M
R-529P
YR-573M

Bali Blue Pearl


Taffeta White
Billet Silver Metallic
Nimbus Gray Metallic
Formal Black II
Sterling Gray Metallic
Dark Cherry Pearl
Mocha Metallic

USA
models
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Canada
models
O

o
o
o
o

Chassis and Paint Codes - '10 Model


Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

5 F N Y F 4 H 2 * A B 000001

J35Z4

rrrrrrri
a

c de f g h

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle


5FN: Honda Manufacturing of Alabama, LLC
Honda multipurpose passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
YF3: Pilot(2WD)/J35Z4
YF4: Pilot(4WD)/J35Z4
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
H: 5-door/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
2: LX
4: EX
5: EX-L
6: EX-L with Rear Entertainment System
8: TOURING
9: TOURING with Rear Entertainment System
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
A: '10
g. Factory Code
B: Lincoln Factory in Alabama
h. Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : USA models
500001 : Canada models

-2000001

a. Engine Type
J35Z4: 3.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Variable Cylinder
Management Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number

Transmission Number
PN4A

- 7000001

a
a.

b.

b
Transmission Type
PN3A: 5-speed Automatic(4WD)
PN4A: 5-speed Automatic(2WD)
Serial Number

Paint Code
Code
B-552P
NH-578
NH-700M
NH-731P
NH-737M
R-529P
YR-573M

Color
Bali Blue Pearl
Taffeta White
Alabaster Silver
Metallic
Crystal Black Pearl
Polished Metal
Metallic
Dark Cherry Pearl
Mocha Metallic

USA
models

Canada
models

O
o
o
o
o
o
o

O
o
o
o
o
o
o

and Canadian Motor Vehicle


Safety Standard Certification
and Paint Code Label.

PAINT CODE

INTERIOR COLOR CODE

1-3

General Information
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)

Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)

Transmission Number

Engine Number

1-4

Engine Number

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations


Front Passenger's Compartment:

(cont'd)

1-5

General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)
Doorjamb Area:

09 Model
SR<3 WARNING
WARNlNij

l/M TESTING
INFORMATION
(

SERVICE INFORMATION
and ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION
SIDE AIRBAG CAUTION
Located on driver's and
passenger's doorjamb

AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION

RADIATOR CAP
DANGER

BATTERY
DANGER

10 Model
S E R V I C E INFORMATION
and ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION

AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION

1-6

RADIATOR C A P
DANGER

l/M TESTING
INFORMATION
(4WD)
BATTERY
DANGER

TIRE INFORMATION

Under-hood Emission Control Label


Test Group and Evaporative Family

Emission Group Identification

Test Group:

Example:

A HNX T 03.7

09 Model

W19

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

INFORMATION

a b

C O N F O R M S T O R E G U L A T I O N S : 2009MY
U.S.

EPA: TZ85LOT2

0 8 0 : CA OBO II

FUEL: GASOLINE

ARB: LEV II ULEV LDT2

OBO: CA OBO II

FUEL: GASOLINE

2WU-TWC, TWC. 2 A / F S E N S O R , 2 H 0 2 S . E GR, SFI

HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.

(EE)
RNO-aoo

10 Model

9HNXT03.7H29
9HNXR01671EA
3.51

c d

a. Model Year
9: '09
A: '10
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: Honda
c. Family Type
T: LDT
d. Displacement Group
e. Sequence Characters
H29: '09
W19: '10
Evaporative Family:

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

(5~K)

N-A10

CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS : 2010MY


US Itk Un LOTJ OtO: CA OIO ll
FUEL: GASOLINE
Ml LEV N ULEV LBTJ OID CA 080 II
FUEL. SASOUNE
2WU-TWC. TWC. 2A/F SENSOR. 2H02S. EGR. SFI

A HNX R 0167

1EA

INFORMATION

U5ADE0 im T1ST1NQ OF THIS VEHtCU MUST BE CONDUCTED ON A FOUR-WHEEL OHfVE SPECS

09 Model
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2009MY

a b

c d

a. Model Year
9: '09
A: '10
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: Honda
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters

10 Model
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2010MY

1-7

General Information
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components
such as the suspension or the fuel tank f r o m the rear of
the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed f r o m
the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change,
causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.

Vehicle Lift
1. Position the lift blocks (A), under the vehicle's front
support points (B) and rear support points (C).

Floor Jack
1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift
lever in P.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket
(A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking
bracket on the jack lift platform (C) and jack up the
vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it.
A

2. Raise the lift a f e w inches, and rock the vehicle gently


to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the vehicle
support points for solid contact w i t h the lift blocks.

Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points as for a vehicle lift. Always use safety
stands w h e n working on or under any vehicle that is
supported only by a jack.

1-8

4. Position the safety stands under the support points


and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.

D
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be t o w e d , call a professional
towing service. Never t o w the vehicle behind another
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.

Rear:

Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Tow Truck Equipment The operator loads the
vehicle on the back of a flat-bed t o w truck. This is the
best way of transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate the flat-bed t o w truck equipment, the
vehicle is equipped with a detachable front t o w i n g hook
(A), front tie d o w n hook slots (B), a rear towing hook (C),
and rear tie d o w n hook slots (D).
The towing hooks can be used with a winch to pull the
vehicle onto the flat-bed t o w truck, and the tie d o w n
hook slots can be used to secure the vehicle to the
flat-bed t o w truck.
Front:

(cont'd)

1-9

General Information
Towing (cont'd)
Front Towing Hook Installation
The detachable front towing hook is for t o w i n g very
short disttances, such as freeing the car. The hook
attaches to the anchor under the front bumper.

Wheel Lift Equipment The t o w truck uses t w o pivoting


arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lifts them
off the ground. The other t w o wheels remain on the
ground. Never tow the vehicle with wheel lift
equipment.

INOT1CE1
To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the t o w i n g hook
for straight flat ground t o w i n g only. Do not t o w on an
angle.
Do not use the detachable t o w hook as a tie d o w n for
the vehicle on the flat-bed t o w truck. Use the tie d o w n
hook slots provided.
1. Remove the cover (A) f r o m the splash shield.

Sling-type Equipment The t o w truck uses metal cables


w i t h hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of
the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that end of
the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and
body can be seriously damaged if this method of t o w i n g
is attempted. This method of towing the vehicle is
unacceptable.
The only recommended way of t o w i n g the vehicle is on
a flat-bed t o w truck.
Towing the 4WD Pilot with only t w o wheels on the
ground will damage part of the VTM-4 system.
The 2WD Pilot may also be towed with the front wheels
off the ground, or with all four wheels on the ground.
If the 2WD Pilot cannot be transported by a flat-bed t o w
truck, it should be towed with the front wheels off the
ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be t o w e d
w i t h the front wheels on the ground, or if the vehicle is
t o w e d w i t h all four wheels on the ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.

2. Remove the detachable t o w i n g hook f r o m the tool kit


in the cargo floor box.
3. Screw the detachable t o w i n g hook (B), and tighten it
securely by hand.

. Shift to D, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
It is best to t o w the vehicle no father than 50 miles (80
km), and keep the vehicle speed below 35mph (55 km/h).

I NOTICE I
Improper t o w i n g preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine,
the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed t o w
truck.
Trying to lift or t o w the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.

1-10

Parts Marking

Precautions for Variable Torque


Management 4WD (VTM-4) System

To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are


marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement
body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These
labels should not be removed. The original engine or
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the
replacement engine or transmission.

This vehicle is equipped with the Variable Torque


Management 4WD (VTM-4) system. The VTM-4
system distributes driving torque between the front and
rear wheels w h e n accelerating and when wheel spin
occurs.
The VTM-4 system does not have a manual switch to
disable the 4WD system. Whenever service work
requires spinning the front or rear wheels with the
engine, always lift and support the vehicle so all four
wheels are off the ground.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels


during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the
part.

1-11

spec

Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

2-2

Design Specifications

2-18

Body Specifications

2-21

Standards and Service Limits


Engine Electrical
Item
Ignition coil
Spark plug
Ignition timing
Drive belt
Alternator

Starter

Measurement
Rated voltage
Firing order
Type
Gap
At idle Check the red mark
Tension
Coil (rotor) resistance
Slip ring O.D.
Brush length
Brush spring tension
Output
Commutator mica depth
Commutator runout
Commutator O.D.
Brush length
Brush spring tension

Qualification

In N o r P
At 68 F (20 C)

Standard or New
12V
1-4-2-5-3-6
ILZKR7B-11
1.0-1.1 m m (0.039-0.043 in)
10 2 B T D C
Auto tensioner
2.5 kO
14.4 m m (0.57 in)
10.5 m m (0.41 in)
3.2 N (0.33 kgf, 0.73 Ibf)
1.8 kW
0.50-0.90 m m (0.020-0.035 in)
0.02 m m (0.001 in) max.
28.9-29.0 m m (1.138-1.142 in)
15.0-16.0 m m (0.59-0.63 in)
22.3-27.3 N (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5 . 0 0 6.13 Ibf)

Service Limit

14.0 m m (0.55 in)


1.5 m m (0.06 in)

0.20 mm (0.008 in)


0.05 m m (0.002 in)
28.0 mm (1.10 in)
9.0 m m (0.35 in)

Engine Assembly
Item
Compression

Measurement
Pressure (Check the engine with the
starter cranking)

Qualification
Minimum
Maximum
variation

Standard or New
930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm ,135 psi)
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm , 28 psi)
2

Service Limit

Cylinder Head
Item
Head
Camshaft

Valve

Measurement
Warpage
Height
End play
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance
Total runout
Cam lobe height

Clearance (cold)
Stem O.D.
Stem-to-guide clearance subtract the
O.D. of the valve stem

Valve seat

Width
Stem installed height

Valve spring

2-2

Free length

Standard or New

Qualification

Intake (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Intake (Front,
No.5,6
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (Front,
No.5, 6
CYLINDERS)
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust

120.95-121.05 m m (4.762-4.766 in)


0.05-0.20 m m (0.002-0.008 in)
0.050-0.089 m m (0.0020-0.0035 in)
0.03 m m (0.001 in) max.
35.162 m m (1.3843 in)

Service Limit
0.05 m m (0.002 in)

0.20 mm (0.008 in)


0.15 mm (0.006 in)
0.04 mm (0.002 in)

35.155 m m (1.3841 in)

36.537 m m (1.4385 in)

36.512 m m (1.4375 in)

0.20-0.24 m m (0.008-0.009 in)


0.28-0.32 mm (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in)
5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 in)
5.450-5.460 m m (0.2146-0.2150 in)
0.020-0.045 m m (0.0008-0.0018 in)
0.055-0.080 m m (0.0022-0.0031 in)
1.25-1.55 m m (0.049-0.061 in)
1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in)
46.75-47.55 mm (1 841-1.872 in)
46.68-47.48 m m (1 838-1.869 in)
51.48 mm (2.027 in)
51.05 m m (2.010 in)

5.455 mm (0.2148 in)


5.420 mm (0.2134 in)
0.08 mm (0.003 in)
0.11 mm (0.004 in)
2.00 mm (0.079 in)
2.00 mm (0.079 in)
47.80 mm (1.882 in)
47.73 m m (1.879 in)

specs
Cylinder Head (cont'd)
item
Valve guide

Measurement
I.D.
Installed height

Rocker arm

Arm-to-shaft clearance

Qualification
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
Exhaust
Intake (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Intake (No.5, 6
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (No.1,
No.2, No.3, and
No.4
CYLINDERS)
Exhaust (No.5, 6
CYLINDERS)

Standard or New
5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171 -0.2177 in)
5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171 -0.2177 in)
21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in)
20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0.850 in)
0.015-0.046 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in)

Service Limit
5.55 mm (0.219 in)
5.55 mm (0.219 in)

0.046 mm (0.0018 in)

0.018-0.056 mm (0.0007-0.0022 in)

0.056 mm (0.0022 in)

0.015-0.046 m m (0.0006-0.0018 in)

0.046 mm (0.0018 in)

0.018-0.047 mm (0.0007-0.0019 in)

0.047 mm (0.0019 in)

Qualification

Standard or New
0.07 mm (0.003 in) max.
89.000-89.015 mm (3.5039-3.5045
in)

Service Limit
0.10 mm (0.004 in)
89.065 mm (3.5065
in)
0.05 mm (0.002 in)
0.25 mm (0.010 in)
88.965 mm (3.5026
in)
0.08 mm (0.003 in)
1.27 mm (0.050 in)
1.25 mm (0.049 in)
2.85 mm (0.112 in)
0.15 mm (0.006 in)
0.13 mm (0.005 in)
0.60 mm (0.024 in)
0.70 mm (0.028 in)
0.80 mm (0.031 in)
21.954 mm (0.8643
in)
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)

Engine Block
Item
Block

Piston

Piston ring

Measurement
Warpage of deck
Bore diameter
Bore taper
Reboring limit
Skirt O.D. at 16.0 m m (0.63 in) from
bottom of skirt
Clearance in cylinder
Ring groove width

Ring-to-groove clearance
Ring end gap

Piston pin

O.D.
Pin-to-piston clearance

Connecting rod

Crankshaft

Pin-to-rod clearance
Small-end bore diameter
Large-end bore diameter
End play installed on crankshaft
Main journal diameter
Rod journal diameter

Crankshaft
bearing

Rod/main journal taper


Rod/main journal out-of-round
End play
Runout
Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance
Rod bearing clearance

Top
Second
Oil
Top
Second
Top
Second
Oil

88.975-88.985 mm (3.5029-3.5033
in)
0.015-0.040 mm (0.0006-0.0016 in)
1.240-1.250 mm (0.0488-0.0492 in)
1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in)
2.805-2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in)
0.055-0.080 mm (0.0022-0.0031 in)
0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in)
0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 in)
0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in)
0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in)
21.962-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648
in)
-0.0050-0.0010 mm (-0.000200.00004 in)
0.005-0.014 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in)
21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652
in)
58.0 mm (2.28 in)
0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in)
71.976-72.000 mm (2.8337-2.8346
in)
54.976-55.000 mm (2.1644-2.1654
in)
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max.
0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max.
0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in)
0.025 mm (0.0010 in) max.
0.019-0.045 mm (0.0007-0.0018 in)
0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in)

0.019 mm (0.0007 in)

0.45 mm (0.018 in)

0.010 mm (0.0004 in)


0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
0.45 mm (0.018 in)
0.03 mm (0.001 in)
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)

2-3

Standards and Service Limits


Engine Lubrication
Item
Engine oil

Oil pump

Measurement
Capacity

Inner-to-outer rotor clearance


Pump housing-to-outer rotor
clearance
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial
clearance
Relief valve, oil pressure with oil
temperature at 176 F (80 C)

Qualification
Engine overhaul
Oil change
including filter
Oil change
without filter

Standard or New
5.0 L (5.3 US qt)
4.3 L (4.5 US qt)

4.0 L (4.2 US qt)

0.04-0.14 m m (0.002-0.006 in)


0.10-0.19 mm (0.004-0.007 in)

0.20 mm (0.008 in)


0.20 mm (0.008 in)

0.02-0.07 mm (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 3 in)

0.12 mm (0.005 in)

Service Limit

At idle
At 3,000 rpm

69 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,10.0 psi)


490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm ,71 psi)

Qualification
Engine overhaul
Coolant change

Standard or New
Service Limit
9.4 L (2.48 US gal)
7.5 L (1.98 US gal)
Honda Long Life A ntif reeze/Coo I a nt Type 2
0.75 L (0.198 US gal)

Cooling System
Item
Radiator

Coolant
reservoir
Radiator cap
Thermostat

Measurement
Coolant capacities (including engine,
heater, hoses, and reservoir)
Coolant type
Coolant capacity

Opening pressure
Opening temperature

Begins to open
Fully open

Valve lift at fully open

9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa (0.95-1.25 k g f / c m , 1 4 18 psi)


169-176 F ( 7 6 - 8 0 C)
194F(90 C)
Above 10.0 mm (0.39 in)

Fuel and Emissions


Item
Fuel pressure
regulator
Fuel tank
Engine idle

Measurement
Pressure with fuel pressure gauge
connected
Capacity
Idle speed without load
Idle speed with high electric load
(A/C on, temperature set to max cool,
blower fan motor on high, rear
window defogger on, and headlights
on high beam)

Qualification

Standard or New
3 9 0 - 4 4 0 kPa (4.0-4.5 kgf/cm , 5 7 - 6 4
psi)
79.5 L (21.00 US gal)
700 50 rpm
700 50 rpm
2

A/Tin N or P
A/Tin N or P

Service Limit

Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential


Item
Automatic
transmission
fluid
ATF pressure

Measurement
Capacity : Use genuine Honda ATF-Z1

1st clutch pressure

At 2,000 rpm in N
or P
At 2,000 rpm in 1

1st-hold clutch pressure

At 2,000 rpm in 1

2nd clutch pressure

At 2,000 rpm in 2

3rd clutch pressure

At 2,000 rpm in
3rd gear in D
At 2,000 rpm in
4th gear in D
At 2,000 rpm in
5th gear in D

Line pressure

4th clutch pressure


5th clutch pressure
Torque
converter

2-4

Qualification
Fluid change
Overhaul

Stall speed
Check with vehicle on level ground

Service limit

Service Limit

Standard or New
3.4 L (3.6 US qt)
8.1 L (8.6 US qt)

950-1,010 kPa (9.7-10.3 kgf/cm ,140


- 1 4 6 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
6 8 0 - 7 6 0 kPa (6.9-7.7 k g f / c m , 1 0 0 110 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
940-1,020 kPa (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm ,140
- 1 4 8 psi)
1,850 rpm
1,700-2,000 rpm
2

900 kPa (9.2


131 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
630 kPa (6.4
91 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)
890 kPa (9.1
130 psi)

kgf/cm ,
2

kgf/cm ,
2

kgf/cm ,
2

kgf/cm ,
2

kgf/cm ,
2

kgf/cm ,
2

kgf/cm ,

specs
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Clutch

Measurement
Clearance between clutch end-plate
and top disc

Clutch return spring free length

Clutch disc thickness


Clutch plate thickness

1st clutch end plate thickness

1st-hold clutch plate B thickness


2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch end plate
thickness

Mainshaft

Qualification
1st

1st-hold

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th

68.3 mm (2.69 in)


48.3 mm (1.90 in)
52.0 mm (2.05 in)
37.4 mm (1.47 in)
47.9 mm (1.89 in)
1.94 mm (0.076 in)
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
1.8 mm (0.071 in)
1.8 mm (0.071 in)
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
1.6 mm (0.063 in)
3.1 mm (0.122 in)
3.2 mm (0.126 in)
3.3 mm (0.130 in)
3.4 mm (0.134 in)
3.5 mm (0.138 in)
3.6 mm (0.142 in)
3.7 mm (0.146 in)
3.8 mm (0.150 in)
3.9 mm (0.154 in)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
2.1 mm (0.083 in)
2.2 mm (0.087 in)
2.3 mm (0.091 in)
2.4 mm (0.094 in)
2.5 mm (0.098 in)
2.6 mm (0.102 in)
2.7 mm (0.106 in)
2.8 mm (0.110 in)
2.9 mm (0.114 in)
22.984-23.000 m m (0.9049-0.9055
in)
39.981-39.991 m m (1.5741-1.5744
in)
46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116
in)
0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in)
48.7-48.8 m m (1.917-1.921 in)
4.5-4.7 mm (0.18-0.19 in)

1st
1st-hold
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Markl
Mark 2
Mark 3
Mark 4
Mark 5
Mark 6
Mark 7
Mark 8
Mark 9
Markl
Mark 2
Mark 3
Mark 4
Mark 5
Mark 6
Mark 7
Mark 8
Mark 9

Diameter at startor shaft needle


bearing contact area
5th gear collar diameter at needle
bearing contact area
5th gear I.D.
End play of gears
5th gear collar length
5th gear collar flange thickness
Sealing ring thickness
Width of sealing ring groove

5th gear

Standard or New

1.90-1.96 mm (0.075-0.077 in)


2.025-2.060 m m (0.080-0.081 in)

Service Limit
1.151.35 mm
(0.045-0.053 in)
0.6-1.0 mm (0.0240.039 in)
1.051.25 mm
(0.041-0.049 in)
0.8-1.0 mm ( 0 . 0 3 1 0.039 in)
0.75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in)
0.75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in)
66.3 mm (2.61 in)
46.3 mm (1.82 in)
50.0 mm (1.97 in)
35.4 mm (1.39 in)
45.9 mm (1.81 in)

When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When discolored
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged

When worn or
damaged
1.85 mm (0.073 in)
2.08 mm (0.082 in)

2-5

Standards and Service Limits


Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Countershaft

Measurement
Diameter at bearing contact area

Diameter of 2nd gear at needle bearing


contact area
I.D. of gear

Qualification
Torque
converter
housing
5th gear

Standard or New
40.505-40.515 m m (1.5947-1.5951
in)

Service Limit
When worn or
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged

2nd gear
5th gear
Idler gear
Reverse gear
A

34.975-34.991 m m (1.3770-1.3776
in)
61.975-61.991 m m (2.4400-2.4406
in)
41.000-41.016 m m (1.6142-1.6148
in)
70.000-70.019 m m (2.7559-2.7566
in)
46.000-46.016 m m (1.8110-1.8116
in)
0.005-0.040 m m (0.0002-0.0016 in)
0.12-0.27 m m (0.0047-0.0106 in)
0.005-0.040 m m (0.0002-0.0016 in)
0.10-0.25 m m (0.0039-0.0098 in)
1.91 m m (0.0752 in)

1.93 m m (0.0760 in)

1.95 m m (0.0768 in)

1.97 m m (0.0776 in)

1.99 m m (0.0783 in)

2.01 m m (0.0791 in)

2.03 m m (0.0799 in)

2.05 m m (0.0807 in)

2.07 m m (0.0815 in)

2.09 m m (0.0823 in)

2.11 m m (0.0831 in)

2.13 m m (0.0839 in)

2.15 m m (0.0846 in)

2.17 m m (0.0854 in)

2.19 m m (0.0862 in)

5th gear
Idler gear
Reverse gear

End play of gears

50.8 m m washer thickness

2-6

or
or
or
or
or

When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged

or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

specs
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Countershaft
(cont'd)

Measurement
50.8 mm washer thickness

61 mm washer thickness

Qualification

Standard or New
2.21 mm (0.0870 in)

2.23 mm (0.0878 in)

2.25 mm (0.0886 in)

2.27 mm (0.0894 in)

2.29 mm (0.0902 in)

2.31 mm (0.0909 in)

2.33 mm (0.0917 in)

2.35 mm (0.0925 in)

2.37 mm (0.0933 in)

2.39 mm (0.0941 in)

2.41 mm (0.0949 in)

AA

2.43 mm (0.0957 in)

AB

2.45 mm (0.0965 in)

1.525 mm (0.0600 in)

1.505 mm (0.0593 in)

1.485 mm (0.0585 in)

1.465 mm (0.0577 in)

1.445 mm (0.0569 in)

1.425 mm (0.0561 in)

1.405 mm (0.0553 in)

Thrust washer thickness

3.00 mm (0.118 in)

Reverse selector hub O.D.

55.885-55.900 mm (2.200-2.201 in)

Reverse gear collar O.D.

39.979-40.000
in)
1.99-2.02 mm
7.49-7.52 mm
38.981-38.991
in)
43.986-43.999
in)
32.002-32.015
in)

Cotter thickness
Secondary shaft

4th gear
2nd gear

Diameter of 1st gear collar at needle


bearing contact area
Diameter at bearing contact area

2nd gear

I.D. of gear

Torque
converter
housing
Torque
converter
housing (shaft
end side)
1st gear

End play of gears

m m (1.5740-1.5748
(0.078-0.080 in)
(0.295-0.296 in)
mm (1.5347-1.5351
m m (1.7317-1.7322
mm (1.2599-1.2604

Service
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged

Limit
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged

28.592-28.608 mm (1.1257-1.1263
in)

When worn or
damaged

2nd gear

44.000-44.013 m m (1.7323-1.7328
in)
50.00-50.02 mm (1.9685-1.9693 in)

When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged

1st gear
2nd gear

0.100-0.145 mm (0.004-0.006 in)


0.060-0.488 mm (0.0024-0.0192 in)

2-7

Standards and Service Limits


Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)

Measurement
52 mm thrust washer thickness

65 mm thrust shim thickness

2-8

Standard or New
2.705 mm (0.107 in)

2.680 mm (0.106 in)

2.655 mm (0.105 in)

2.630 mm (0.104 in)

2.605 mm (0.103 in)

2.580 mm (0.102 in)

2.555 mm (0.101 in)

2.530 mm (0.100 in)

2.505 mm (0.099 in)

2.480 m m (0.098 in)

2.455 mm (0.097 in)

2.430 mm (0.096 in)

2.405 mm (0.095 in)

OA

0.80 mm (0.031 in)

0.84 mm (0.033 in)

0.88 m m (0.035 in)

0.92 mm (0.036 in)

0.96 mm (0.038 in)

1.00 mm (0.039 in)

1.04 mm (0.041 in)

1.08 mm (0.043 in)

1.12 mm (0.044 in)

1.16 mm (0.046 in)

1.20 mm (0.047 in)

1.24 mm (0.049 in)

1.28 m m (0.050 in)

1.32 m m (0.052 in)

Qualification

Service
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged

Limit
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

specs
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Secondary shaft
(cont'd)

Measurement
65 mm thrust shim thickness

1st gear collar length


Sealing ring thickness
Width of sealing ring groove
Clutch feed pipe bushing I.D.

ATF feed pipe O.D.

Standard or New
1.36 mm (0.054 in)

1.40 mm (0.055 in)

1.44 mm (0.057 in)

1.48 mm (0.058 in)

1.52 mm (0.060 in)

1.56 mm (0.061 in)

1.60 mm (0.063 in)

1.64 mm (0.065 in)

1.68 mm (0.066 in)

1.72 mm (0.068 in)

1.76 mm (0.069 in)

1.80 mm (0.071 in)

1.84 mm (0.072 in)

AA

1.88 mm (0.074 in)

AB

1.92 mm (0.076 in)

AC

1.96 mm (0.077 in)

AD

2.00 mm (0.079 in)

AE

2.04 mm (0.080 in)

AF

2.08 mm (0.082 in)

AG

2.12 mm (0.083 in)

AH

2.16 mm (0.085 in)

Al

2.20 mm (0.087 in)

AJ

2.24 mm (0.088 in)

AK

2.28 mm (0.090 in)

AL

2.32 m m (0.091 in)

AM

0.76 mm (0.030 in)

Qualification

1st
1st-hold
1st
1st-hold

63.3-63.4 m m (2.4921 -2.4961 in)


1.91-1.97 m m (0.075-0.078 in)
2.025-2.060 m m (0.080-0.081 in)
11.518-11.530 m m (0.4535-0.4539
in)
6.018-6.030 m m (0.2369-0.2374 in)
11.47-11.48 m m (0.4516-0.4520 in)
5.97-5.98 m m (0.2350-0.2354 in)

Service
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged

Limit
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

1.86 mm (0.073 in)


2.08 mm (0.082 in)
11.545 mm (0.4545
in)
6.045 mm (0.2380 in)
11.45 mm (0.4508 in)
5.95 m m (0.2343 in)

2-9

Standards and Service Limits


Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Intermediary
shaft

Measurement
I.D. of 3rd gear
End play of gears
26.5 mm washer thickness

53 mm splined washer thickness

Cotter thickness
Sealing ring thickness
Width of sealing ring groove

2-10

Qualification

Standard or New
36.00-36.016 m m (1.4173-1.4179 in)

3rd gear
A

0.005-0.045 m m (0.0002-0.0018 in)


1.05 mm (0.041 in)

1.13 m m (0.044 in)

1.21 m m (0.048 in)

1.29 m m (0.051 in)

1.37 m m (0.054 in)

1.45 m m (0.057 in)

1.53 m m (0.060 in)

1.61 m m (0.063 in)

1.69 m m (0.067 in)

1.77 m m (0.070 in)

1.85 m m (0.073 in)

1.93 m m (0.076 in)

2.01 m m (0.079 in)

2.09 m m (0.082 in)

0.97 m m (0.038 in)

3.995 m m (0.1573 in)

4.015 m m (0.1581 in)

4.035 m m (0.1589 in)

4.055 m m (0.1596 in)

4.075 mm (0.1604 in)

4.095 m m (0.1612 in)

4.115 m m (0.1620 in)

4.135 m m (0.1628 in)

4.155 m m (0.1636 in)

4.175 m m (0.1644 in)

4.195 m m (0.1652 in)

4.215 m m (0.1659 in)

4.235 m m (0.1667 in)

4.255 m m (0.1675 in)


2.99-3.02 m m (0.1177-0.1189 in)
1.89-1.95 m m (0.0744-0.0768 in)
2.025-2.060 m m (0.0797 -0.0811 in)

Service Limit
When worn or
damaged

When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged

or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

1.84 m m (0.0724 in)


2.08 mm (0.082 in)

specs
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
item
Reverse idler
gear

Measurement
Gear shaft O.D.

Qualification

I.D.
I.D. of transmission housing of gear
shaft contact area
Thrust washer thickness

ATF pump

ATF pump thrust clearance


Clearance between ATF pump gear
and body

Transmission
housing
Holder side
Drive gear
Driven gear

ATF pump driven gear I.D.


ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D.
Stator shaft

Reverse shift
fork
Park gear and
pawl
Regulator valve
body

Needle bearing contact area I.D.

Sealing ring contact area I.D.


Fork finger thickness

Shift fork shaft bore I.D.

Sealing ring contact I.D.

ATF guide collar

18.007-18.020 m m (0.7089-0.7094
in)
14.006-14.024 mm (0.5514-0.5521
in)
0.97-1.05 m m (0.038-0.041 in)
0.97-1.05 m m (0.038-0.041 in)
0.03-0.06 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in)
0.210-0.265 m m (0.0083-0.0104 in)
0.070-0.125 m m (0.0028-0.0049 in)
14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525
in)
13.980-13.990 m m (0.5504-0.5508
in)
27.000-27.021 mm (1.063-1.064 in)
31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in)
31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in)
5.90-6.00 m m (0.232-0.236 in)

Service Limit
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged

0.07 mm (0.003 in)

When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged
When worn or
damaged

31.05 mm (1.222 in)


5.4 m m (0.21 in)

When worn or damaged

Shift fork shaft/servo valve bore I.D.

Main valve body

Torque
converter side
ATF pump side

Standard or New
13.99-14.00 m m (0.5508-0.5512 in)

Intermediary shaft sealing ring contact


I.D.
Secondary shaft sealing ring contact 1.
D.

14.000-14.010
in)
37.000-37.039
in)
31.000-31.025
in)
35.000-35.025
in)
29.000-29.021
in)

m m (0.5512-0.5516

m m (1.4567-1.4582
mm (1.2205-1.2215

37.045 m m (1.4585
in)
31.05 m m (1.222 in)

m m (1.3780-1.3789

35.05 m m (1.3799 in)

mm (1.1417-1.1426

29.05 m m (1.1437 in)

2-11

Standards and Service Limits


Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Main valve body
spring

Measurement
Shift valve A spring

Shift valve B spring

Shift valve E spring

Relief valve spring

Torque converter check valve spring

Modulator valve spring

CPC valve A spring

Servo control valve spring

Lubrication control valve spring

Lock-up timing valve spring

Lock-up shift valve spring

2-12

Qualification
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil

Standard or New
0.9 mm (0.035 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
50.5 m m (1.988 in)
23.3
0.8 m m (0.031 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
49.1 mm (1.933 in)
21.7
0.7 m m (0.028 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
42.4 m m (1.669 in)
17.6
1.0 m m (0.039 in)
9.6 m m (0.378 in)
28.1 m m (1.106 in)
7.7
1.1 m m (0.043 in)
8.6 m m (0.339 in)
35.0 mm (1.378 in)
12.6
1.6 m m (0.063 in)
10.4 mm (0.409 in)
33.5 mm (1.319 in)
9.8
0.7 m m (0.028 in)
6.1 mm (0.240 in)
17.8 m m (0.701 in)
7.9
0.9 m m (0.035 in)
9.6 m m (0.378 in)
30.2 m m (1.189 in)
8.4
0.9 m m (0.035 in)
8.7 m m (0.343 in)
25.0 mm (0.984 in)
7.2
0.6 m m (0.024 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
30.9 mm (1.217 in)
11.1
1.0 m m (0.039 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
35.5 mm (1.398 in)
18.2

Service Limit

specs
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Secondary valve
body spring

Measurement
CPC valve B spring

CPC valve C spring

Shift valve C spring

Shift valve D spring

Reverse CPC valve spring

Reverse control valve spring

Regulator valve
body spring

3rd accumulator spring

Cooler check valve spring

Regulator valve spring A

Regulator valve spring B

Stator reaction spring

Lock-up control valve spring (Type A)

Lock-up control valve spring (Type B)

Qualification
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil

Standard or New
0.7 m m (0.028 in)
6.1 m m (0.240 in)
17.8 m m (0.701 in)
7.9
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
6.1 m m (0.240 in)
17.8 m m (0.701 in)
7.9
0.8 mm (0.031 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
49.1 mm (1.933 in)
21.7
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
42.4 mm (1.669 in)
17.6
0.8 m m (0.031 in)
6.1 m m (0.240 in)
24.4 m m (0.961 in)
14.6
0.8 m m (0.031 in)
6.6 m m (0.260 in)
49.1 m m (1.933 in)
21.7
3.1 mm (0.122 in)
19.6 m m (0.772 in)
41.4 mm (1.630 in)
5.5
0.9 mm (0.035 in)
6.7 mm (0.264 in)
31.5 mm (1.240 in)
14.2
1.85 mm (0.073 in)
14.7 mm (0.579 in)
86.9 m m (3.421 in)
16.2
1.4 mm (0.055 in)
8.8 m m (0.346 in)
44.0 m m (1.732 in)
12.0
5.5 m m (0.217 in)
37.4 mm (1.472 in)
30.3 m m (1.193 in)
2.1
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
42.9 mm (1.689 in)
14.2
0.8 mm (0.031 in)
6.6 mm (0.260 in)
44.3 mm (1.744 in)
25.5

Service Limit

2-13

Standards and Service Limits


Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Accumulator
body spring

Measurement
1st accumulator spring A

1st accumulator spring B

1st-hold accumulator spring

2nd accumulator spring

4th accumulator spring

5th accumulator spring A

5th accumulator spring B

A/T differential
carrier

Qualification
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil
Wire diameter
O.D.
Free length
No. of coil

Pinion shaft contact area I.D.


Driveshaft contact area I.D.
Clearance between carrier and pinion
shaft
Clearance between carrier and
driveshaft
Clearance between carrier and
intermediate shaft
Carrier bearing starting torque
(preload)

For new bearing


For used bearing

A/T differential
pinion gear

Backlash
I.D.
Clearance between pinion gear and
pinion shaft

2-14

2WD
4WD

Service Limit

Standard or New
2.3 mm (0.091 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
60.8 mm (2.394 in)
9.5
2.5 mm (0.098 in)
12.8 mm (0.504 in)
46.0 mm (1.811 in)
9.5
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
13.1 mm (0.516 in)
42.9 mm (1.689 in)
9.8
3.1 mm (0.122 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
53.4 mm (2.102 in)
7.5
3.3 mm (0.130 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
39.1 mm (1.539 in)
5.8
2.4 mm (0.094 in)
19.6 mm (0.772 in)
65.5 mm (2.579 in)
12.0
2.6 mm (0.102 in)
13.2 mm (0.520 in)
50.5 mm (1.988 in)
10.1
18.000-18.025 mm (0.7087-0.7096
in)
30.025-30.055 m m (1.182-1.183 in)
0.013-0.054 m m (0.0005-0.0021 in)

0.1 mm (0.004 in)

0.045-0.096 m m (0.002-0.004 in)

0.13 mm (0.005 in)

0.080-0.126 m m (0.003-0.005 in)

3.9-5.1 N m ( 4 0 - 5 2 k g f c m , 3 5 - 4 5
Ibf-in)
3.6-4.8 N m ( 3 7 - 4 9 k g f c m , 3 2 - 4 3
Ibf-in)
1.4-2.0 mm (0.055-0.079 in)
0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 in)
18.042-18.066 mm (0.7103-0.7113
in)
0.055-0.095 m m (0.0022-0.0037 in)

Adjust

Adjust

0.12 m m (0.005 in)

specs
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Transfer output
shaft

Measurement
Diameter at bearing contact area

End play
28.5 m m thrust washer thickness

Qualification
Transmission
housing
Torque
converter
housing side

Standard or New
21.977-21.990 m m (0.8652- 0.8657
in)
40.002-40.018 m m (1.5749- 1.5755
in)

0 - 0 . 3 9 m m (0.0-0.015 in)
1.82 m m (0.0717 in)

1.84 m m (0.0724 in)

1.86 m m (0.0732 in)

1.88 m m (0.0740 in)

1.90 m m (0.0748 in)

1.92 m m (0.0756 in)

1.94 m m (0.0764 in)

1.96 m m (0.0772 in)

1.98 mm (0.0780 in)

2.00 m m (0.0787 in)

2.02 m m (0.0795 in)

2.04 m m (0.0803 in)

2.06 m m (0.0811 in)

2.08 mm (0.0819 in)

2.10 m m (0.0827 in)

2.12 mm (0.0835 in)

2.14 mm (0.0843 in)

2.16 m m (0.0850 in)

2.18 m m (0.0858 in)

2.20 mm (0.0866 in)

2.22 m m (0.0874 in)

2.24 m m (0.0882 in)

2.26 m m (0.0890 in)

2.28 mm (0.0898 in)

2.30 m m (0.0906 in)

2.32 m m (0.0913 in)

AA

2.34 m m (0.0921 in)

Service Limit
21.92 m m (0.8630 in)
39.95 m m (1.5728 in)

When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged
When worn
damaged

or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

2-15

Standards and Service Limits


Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
Item
Transfer
assembly

Measurement
Diameter of transfer hypoid drive
gear/shaft assembly at tapered roller
bearing contact area
Diameter of transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) at tapered roller bearing
contact area

Transfer
assembly fluid

Transfer gear backlash


Tapered roller bearing total starting
torque (preload)
Capacity : Hypoid gear oil SAE 90
viscosity, API classified GL 4 or GL 5
only

Qualification
Transfer cover
side
Transfer gear
side
Transfer gear
side
Companion
flange side

Fluid change
Overhaul

Standard or New
50.002-50.018 m m (1.9686-1.9692
in)
24.987-25.000 m m (0.9837-0.9843
in)
40.002-40.018 m m (1.5749-1.5755
in)
31.975-31.988 m m (1.2589-1.2594
in)
0.06-0.17 m m (0.002-0.007 in)
3.20-4.16 N m (32.6-42.4 k g f c m ,
28.3-36.8 Ibf-in)
0.43 L (0.45 US qt)
0.45 L (0.48 US qt)

Service Limit
49.95 m m (1.9665 in)
24.93 mm (0.9815 in)
39.95 m m (1.5728 in)
31.92 mm (1.2567 in)
Adjust
Adjust

Rear Differential
Item
Rear differential
fluid

Measurement
Capacity

Qualification
Fluid change
Overhaul

Recommended fluid

Standard or New
2.64 L (2.79 US qt)
2.85 L (3.01 US qt)
Honda VTM-4 Differential fluid

Standard or New
0 - 1 0 mm (0.00.4 in)

29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 ibf)

Service Limit

Steering
Item
Steering wheel

Gearbox
Pump
Power steering
fluid

Measurement
Rotational play measured at outside
edge with engine running
Initial turning load measured at
outside edge with engine running
Angle of rack guide screw loosened
from locked position
Output pressure with shut-off valve
closed
Capacity

Qualification

Service Limit

15 5
2

Fluid change
System overhaul

Recommended fluid

8,924-9,414 kPa ( 9 1 - 9 6 kgf/cm ,


1,294-1,365 psi)
0.36 L (0.38 US qt)
1.0 L (1.1 US qt)
Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid

Suspension
Item
Wheel alignment

Measurement
Camber
Caster
Total toe-in
Front wheel turning angle

Wheel

Aluminum wheel runout


Steel wheel runout

Wheel bearing

2-16

End play

Qualification
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
Inward
Outward
(reference)
Axial
Radial
Axial
Radial
Front
Rear

Standard or New
- 0 3 0 ' 45'
- 0 3 0 ' 45'
4 11 ' 3 5 '
0 2 m m (0.0 0.1 in)
2 2 m m (0.1 0.1 in)
38 1 2 ' 2
31 4 4 '
0 - 0 . 3 m m (0.00.01 in)
0 - 0 . 3 m m (0.0-0.01 in)
0 - 1 . 0 m m (0.0-0.04 in)
0 - 1 . 0 m m (0.0-0.04 in)
0 - 0 . 0 5 mm (0.0-0.002 in)
0 - 0 . 0 5 m m (0.0-0.002 in)

Service Limit

2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5

mm
mm
mm
mm

(0.08
(0.06
(0.08
(0.06

in)
in)
in)
in)

specs
Brakes
Item
Parking brake

Brake disc

Measurement
Distance traveled when pedal pressed
with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf) of force
Drum I.D.
Shoe lining thickness
Pedal height (carpet moved aside)
Free play
Thickness

Brake pad

Runout
Parallelism
Thickness

Brake pedal

Qualification

Standard or New

Service Limit

8 to 10

Front
Rear

Front
Rear

210.0-210.1 m m (8.27-8.27 in)


3.9 mm (0.15 in)
171 m m (6.7 in)
1 - 5 mm (0.0-0.2 in)
27.9-28.1 m m (1.10-1.11 in)
10.9-11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in)

10.6-11.2 mm (0.42-0.44 in)


9.6-10.2 mm (0.38-0.40 in)

211.0 m m (8.31 in)


1.0 m m (0.04 in)

26.0 m m (1.02 in)


9.0 m m (0.35 in)
0.04 m m (0.002 in)
0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
1.6 m m (0.06 in)
1.6 mm (0.06 in)

Air Conditioning
Item
Refrigerant
Refrigerant oil

Compressor

Measurement
Type
Capacity of system
Type
Capacity of components

Field coil resistance


Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance

Qualification

Condenser
(Including
receiver/dryer)
Evaporator
(Front)
Evaporator
(Rear)
Each line and
hose
Receiver/Dryer
Compressor
At 68 F (20 C)

Standard or New
HFC-134a (R-134a)
600-650 g (21.2-22.9 oz)
DENSO ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH)
5 0 m L ( 1 2/3fl-oz)

Service Limit

4 0 m L ( 1 1/3 fl-oz)
30 mL (1 fl-oz)
10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
125 mL (4 2/9 fl-oz)
3.94.3 Q
0.35-0.60 mm (0.014-0.024 in)

2A1

Design Specifications
Item
DIMENSIONS

Measurement
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Wheelbase
Track

WEIGHT

Seating capacity
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR)

ENGINE

Type

Qualification

LX (USA model)
Except LX (USA model)
Front
Rear
4WD
2WD

Cylinder arrangement
Bore and stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Valve train
Lubrication system
Fuel required
STARTER

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION

Final reduction

2-18

Type
Normal output
Nominal voltage
Hour rating
Direction of rotation
Type

Primary reduction
Gear ratio

Specification
4,850 m m (190.9 in)
1,995 m m (78.5 in)
1,802 m m (71.0 in)
1,846 mm (72.7 in)
2,775 m m (109.2 in)
1,720 m m (67.7 in)
1,715 m m (67.5 in)
Eight (8)
2,765 kg (6,096 lbs)
2,700 kg (5,952 lbs)
Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC VCM V6 gasoline
engine
60 V6-cylinder, transverse
89.0 x 93.0 m m (3.50 x 3.66 in)
3,471 c m (211.7 cu in)
10.5
Belt drive, SOHC i-VTEC VCM 4 valves per cylinder
Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Regular UNLEADED gasoline with 87 Pump Octane
Number or higher
Gear reduction
1.6 kW
12V
30 seconds
Counterclockwise as viewed from drive end
Electronically-controlled automatic, five-speed forward,
one reverse, three-element torque converter with lock up
clutch
Direct 1:1
2.697
1.606
1.071
0.765
0.612
1.888
Single helical gear
4.312

1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Reverse
Type
Gear ratio

specs
Item
STEERING

SUSPENSION

Measurement
Type
Overall ratio
Turns, lock-to-lock
Steering wheel diameter
Type
Shock absorber

TIRES

Size

WHEEL
ALIGNMENT

Camber
Caster
Total Toe-in
Front wheel turning angle

BRAKES

Type of service brake


Type of parking brake
Pad friction surface area
(swept area)

AIR
CONDITIONING

Parking brake shoe


friction surface area
Compressor

Condenser
Evaporator
Blower

Qualification

Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front and rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
Inward
Outward (reference)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear

Type
Capacity
Maximum speed
Lubricant capacity
Lubricant type
Type
Type
Type
Motor type

Maximum capacity (Front)


Maximum capacity (Rear)

Refrigerant

Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc


Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Foot type, mechanical actuating, rear wheels
63.5 c m (9.84 sq in) x 2
32.0 c m (4.92 sq in) x 2
60.2 c m (9.33 sq i n ) x 2
2

Speed control (Auto A/C)


Speed control (Manual A/C)

Temperature control
Compressor clutch

Specification
Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pinion
19.0
3.69
386 mm (15.2 in)
McPherson Strut
Multilink with trailing arm
Twin tube gas
Twin tube gas
P245/65R17 105T
T165/80D17 104M
-030'
-030'
4 11 '
0 mm (0 in)
2 mm (0.08 in)
38 12'
31 o 44 -

Type
Electrical power consumption at
68 F (20 C)
Type
Quantity (Dual)

Swash plate
210 mL/rev (12.8 cu in/rev)
7,600 rpm
215 mL (13.1 cu in)
DENSO ND-OIL8
Corugate fin
Corugate fin
Sirocco fan
Front:228W/12V
Rear:215W/12V
Infinitely variable
Front: 7-speed
Rear: 3-speed
490 c m (17.300 cu ft)/h
310 c m (11.300 cu ft)/h
Air-mix type
Dry, single, plate, Poly-V belt drive
35 W maximum at 12 V
3

HFC-134a (R-134a)
6 0 0 - 6 5 0 g (21.2-22.9 oz)

2-19

Design Specifications
Item
ELECTRICAL
RATINGS

Measurement
Battery
Fuses

Light bulbs

Washer reservoir

2-20

Qualification
Under-hood fuse/relay box
Under-dash fuse/relay box
Auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box
Auxiliary under-dash fuse holder
Rear fuse/relay box
Headlight high beam
Headlight low beam
Daytime running lights
Front turn signal lights/parking
lights
Front side turn signal lights
(TOURING model)
Front side marker lights
Front fog lights
Rear turn signal lights/taillights
Brake lights/taillights
Rear side marker lights
High mount brake light
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Cargo area light
Console box light
Front map light
Rear map light
Ambient light
Vanity mirror lights
Glove box light
Door courtesy lights
Gauge lights
Indicator lights
Capacity (USA models)
Capacity (Canada models)

Specification
12 V - 7 2 Ah/20HR (12 V - 6 0 Ah/5HR)
120 A, 80 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A
7.5 A
20 A, 7.5 A
12 V - 6 0 W
12V-55W
12V-60W
12V-28/8W
LED
12V-5W
12 V - 5 5 W
12V-21/5W
12V-21/5W
12 V - 5 W
1 2 V - 5 W X5
12V-18W
12V-5W
12V-8W
12 V - 1 . 4 W
12V-8W
12V-5W
LED
12V-1.1 W
14V-1.4W
12 V - 2 C P
LED
LED
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
6.5 L (6.9 US qt)

specs
Body Specifications

* 1 : L X ( U S A model)
*2: Except LX (USA model)

2-21

Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids

3-2

Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display)
General Information (Multi-information Display)
Maintenance Main Items
Maintenance Sub Items

3-4
3-8
3-12
3-13

Lubricants and Fluids

For details of the lubrication points and the type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and the various work
procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
Item

Lubrication Points

Lubricant

Engine

Honda Motor Oil:


American Honda P/N 08798-9023 (5W-20),
Honda Canada P/N CA66806 (5W-20)
Look for the API certification seal on the oil container. Make sure it says
"For Gasoline Engines/' S A E viscosity: See chart.

Automatic transmission

Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):


American Honda P/N 08200-9001,
Honda Canada P/N CA66689
Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift
quality.

Transfer assembly (4WD)

Hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5


Use a S A E 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4 or GL5 only.

3-2

Viscosity
S A E 90: above 0F (-18C)
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid:
American Honda P/N 08200-9003,
Honda Canada P/N 08200-9003C

Rear differential (4WD)

E
F

Brake system (including V S A lines)


Caliper piston seals

Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008


Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system.

G
H
1
J
K

Brake booster clevis pin


Battery terminals
Fuel fill door
Hood hinges and hood latch
Tailgate hinges

Multipurpose grease

Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and caliper pin


boots

Honda Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M

Power steering system

Honda Power Steering Fluid:


American Honda P/N 08206-9002,
Honda Canada P/N 08206-9002C
Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear
and poor steering in cold weather.

Air conditioning compressor

Compressor oil: DENSO ND-OIL8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01 AH) for refrigerant


HFC-134a (R-134a)

Cooling system

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2: P/N OL999-9001

3-3

Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display)
Maintenance Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the information display (LX, EX, and EX-L models). Based on engine
and automatic transmission operating conditions, the Pilot's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine
oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the remaining engine oil life along w i t h the code(s) for
other scheduled maintenance items needing service.

MAINTENANCE
MINDER INDICATOR

3-4

Service Information
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a
percentage on the information display. To see the
current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), then push and release the SELECT/RESET knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life displays.

3. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the remaining


engine oil life is 5 % to 1 %, the message "SERVICE"
(A) is displayed along with engine oil life and the
same maintenance item code(s).

OUTSIDE

SERVICE
A

IE3

OUTSIDE

iu
OILLIFE%

IUU

OILLIFE%
O H

2. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the remaining


engine oil life is 15 % to 6 %, the remaining engine oil
life (A) and other scheduled maintenance item(s)
needing service are displayed.
The maintenance minder indicator (B) also comes on
w h e n the engine oil life is 15 % or less.
To cancel the display and the indicator, press the
SELECT/RESET knob.
Complete list of maintenance main items (C) (see
page 3-12).
Complete list of maintenance sub items (D) (see
page 3-13).

4. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and remaining


engine oil life is 0 %, the engine oil life indicator (A)
blinks.
Pressing the SELECT/RESET knob cancels the display,
but the maintenance minder indicator stays on.

OUTSIDE

SERVICE
A

IE3

OILLIFE%

n
u

iD D U C C
I t^JU

II

OILUFE%

=< IS

(cont'd)

Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display) (cont'd)
5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the engine
oil life indicator shows a negative mileage, for
example " - 1 0 " on the display. If the negative milage is
between 0 and -9, the indicator is displayed for only a
few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON
(II). The negative mileage remains displayed after the
vehicle is driven more than 10 miles (for USA models)
or 10 km (for Canada models) after 0 % oil life is
reached, and the display cannot be canceled. This
means the indicated maintenance item(s) should
have been done more than 10 miles (or 10 km) ago.

OUTSIDE
-irTfc

SERVICE
A

IE3

NOTE:
The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
If a required service is done and the display is not
reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
doing the service, the system will not show the proper
maintenance t i m i n g . This can lead to serious
mechanical problems because there will be no
accurate record of when the required maintenance is
needed.
The engine oil life and the maintenance item(s) can be
independently reset with the HQS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Push the SELECT/RESET knob repeatedly until the
engine oil life indicator is displayed.

in
IU

Resetting the Maintenance Information


Display

mi

3. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET knob for about 10


seconds. The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item code(s) will be blink, then release
the knob.
NOTE: If you are resetting the display w h e n the
engine oil life is more than 15 %, make sure any
maintenance item(s) requiring service are done
before resetting the display.
4. Press the SELECT/RESET knob for another 5 seconds.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the
engine oil life will reset to " 1 0 0 " .

Zi Zu~if~i
C
ZlUU
OILLIFE%

inn
I U U

3-6

iu

Resetting Individual Maintenance Items


1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it doesn't
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-226).
4. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the
HDS.
5. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES with the HDS.
6. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the ADJUSTMENT with
the HDS.
7. Select RESET in the SERVICE REMINDER with the
HDS.
8. Select the individual maintenance item you wish to
reset.

Maintenance Minder
General Information (Multi-information Display)
Multi-information Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the multi-information display (TOURING model). Based on engine
and automatic transmission operating conditions, the Pilot's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine
oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the remaining engine oil life along with the code(s) for
other scheduled maintenance items needing service.

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

SEL/RESET BUTTON

3-8

Service Information
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a
percentage in the multi-information display.
To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch
to ON (II), then push and release the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed.

. When the ignition switch is ON (II), and the remaining


engine oil life is 5 % to 1 %, the maintenance system
message "SERVICE DUE NOW" is displayed along with
the same maintenance item code(s). If the maintenance
system message display is canceled, a "SERVICE"
message appears.

INSTANT FUEL MPG


0
20
imiiiii"
OIL LIFE

SERVICE
DUE NOW
A123

90%

2. When the ignition switch is ON (II), and the remaining


engine oil life is 15 % to 6 %, the remaining engine oil life
and other scheduled maintenance item(s) needing
service are displayed. The maintenance system
message "SERVICE DUE SOON" (A) also comes on. To
cancel the message, press the INFO button. The display
continues to show the remaining engine oil life (B) and
the message indicator (C) until it is reset.
Complete list of maintenance main items (D) (see page
3-12).
Complete list of maintenance sub items (E) (see page
3-13).

SERVICE
DUE S 0 0 N
A123456

^A*

4. When the ignition switch is ON (II), and the remaining


engine oil life is 0 %, the maintenance system message
"SERVICE PAST DUE" is displayed along with the same
maintenance item code(s).

SERVICE
PAST DUE
A123

INSTANT FUEL MPG


0
20
40

imiiiii
SERVICE

A123456
D

OIL LIFE

15%

(cont'd)

3-9

Maintenance Minder
General Information (Multi-information Display) (cont'd)
5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the
"SERVICE PAST DUE" message shows a negative
mileage, for example " - 1 0 , " on the display. If the
negative mileage is between 0 and -9, the message is
displayed for only a few seconds w h e n the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II). The negative mileage (A)
remains displayed after the vehicle is driven more
than 10 miles (for USA models) or 10 km (for Canada
models) after 0 % oil life is reached, and the display
cannot be canceled. This means the indicated
maintenance item(s) should have been done more
than 10 miles (or 10 km) ago.

Resetting the Maintenance Information


Display
NOTE:
The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
If a required service is done and the display is not
reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
doing the service, the system will not show the proper
maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
mechanical problems because there will be no
accurate record of when the required maintenance is
needed.
The engine oil life and the maintenance items can be
reset independently only with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

10miles >
SERVICE
PAST DUE
A123

2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the INFO


button to cancel the display.
3. Push and release the SEL/RESET button repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator is displayed.
4. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for about 10
seconds, the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode display
appears.
NOTE:
If you are resetting the display when the engine oil
life is more than 15 %, make sure any maintenance
item(s) requiring service are done before resetting
the display.
To cancel the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode, press the
INFO button repeatedly until the "CANCEL"
indicator is displayed, then press the SEL/RESET
button.

OIL LIFE RESET


CANCEL
SERVICE

A123

3-10

OIL LIFE

5%

5. Press INFO button to select "RESET", then press the


SEL/RESET button.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the
engine oil life will reset to " 1 0 0 " .

Resetting individual Maintenance Items


1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

INSTANT FUEL MPG


0

20

40

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle


and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it doesn't
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-226).
4. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the
HDS.

OIL LIFE

100%

5. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGE with the HDS.


6. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the ADJUSTMENT with
the HDS.
7. Select RESET in the SERVICE REMINDER with the
HDS.
8. Select the individual maintenance item you wish to
reset.

3-11

Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items
If the message "SERVICE" or "SERVICE DUE NOW" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every
year.
NOTE:
Replace the brake fluid every 3 years, independent of the maintenance messages in the information/multi-information display.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
Maintenance Main Items
Symbol
A
Replace engine oil (see page 8-10)
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
B
Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-11)
Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3)
Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7)
Check the number of clicks 8 to 10 when the parking brake pedal is pressed with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf) of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-6)
Check steering linkage.
Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3)
Check bolts for tightness.
Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4)
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA lines (see page 19-41)
Check the master cylinder and VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids.
Engine coolant (see page 10-6)
Automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-207)
Transfer fluid (see page 14-211)
Rear differential fluid (see page 15-42)
Power steering fluid (see page 17-27)
Brake fluid (see page 19-9)
Windshield washer fluid
Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-8)
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and mufflers for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines* (see page 11-344), and connections* (see page 11-346)
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void the customer's
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval, to ensure long-term
reliability.

3-12

Maintenance Sub Items


Number
1
2

5
6

Maintenance Sub Items


Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-373)
If the vehicle is driven primarily in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-81)
If the vehicle is driven primarily in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in the air, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and air conditioning system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-30)
Look for cracks and damage, then check the position of the auto-tensioner; no adjustment is needed.
Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-209) and transfer fluid (see page 14-211)
Automatic transmission fluid capacity: 3.4L (3.6 US qt)
Transfer fluid capacity: 0.43 L (0.45 US qt), use hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5.
Replace spark plugs (see page 4-22)
Use ILZKR7B-1KNGK)
Replace timing belt (see page 6-22) and Inspect water pump (see page 10-5)
If the vehicle is regularly driven in very high temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C), or in very low temperatures
(under -20 F, -29 C), replace every 60,000 miles (USA)/100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-10)
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in)
Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6)
Capacity (including the reservoir): 7.5 L (1.98 US gal), use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid (see page 15-42)
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress
to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the maintenance minder. If the
vehicle is regularly driven in these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Capacity: 2.64 L (2.79 US qt), use Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid.

3-13

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)


The Pilot SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof,
and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this
Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and tools, and
should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
frontal or side collision, all SRS service w o r k should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and side curtain airbags.
Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor,
especially when the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, center console, dashboard, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the
roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools

4-2

Starting System
Component Location I n d e x . . . . 4-3
Symptom Troubleshooting
Index
....4-5
Circuit Diagram
4-6
Starter S y s t e m Circuit
Troubleshooting
4-7
Starter Solenoid Test
...4-9
Starter Performance Test
4-10
Starter Removal and
Installation
4-11
Starter Overhaul
4-12

Ignition System
Component Location I n d e x . . . . 4 - 1 8
Circuit Diagram
4-19
Ignition Timing Inspection
4-20
Ignition Coil
Removal/Installation
4-21
Spark Plug Inspection
4-22

Charging System
Component Location I n d e x . . . .
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Index
Circuit Diagram
Charging S y s t e m Indicator
Circuit Troubleshooting
Alternator and Regulator
Circuit Troubleshooting
Alternator Control Circuit
Troubleshooting

4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-28
4-29

Drive Belt Inspection


4-30
Drive Belt Replacement
4-31
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Inspection
.4-31
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Replacement
4-32
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Air
Bleeding
4-33
Alternator Removal and
Installation
....4-33
Alternator Overhaul
4-36

Cruise Control
Component Location Index....4-41
Symptom Troubleshooting
Index
4-42
Circuit Diagram
4-43
Cruise Control Input Test
4-44
* Cruise Control Combination
Switch T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t . . . 4-46

Active Control Engine


Mount (ACM) System
Component Location I n d e x . . . . 4 - 4 7
General Troubleshooting
Information
4-48
DTCTroubleshooting I n d e x . . . 4-50
System Description
4-51
Circuit Diagram
4-52
DTC Troubleshooting
4-53
Symptom Troubleshooting ....4-76
Engine Mount Control Unit
Replacement
4-77

Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref.No.

4-2

Tool Number
07746-0010300
07749-0010000
07SAZ-001000A

Description
Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 m m
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L
Backprobe Set

Qty
1
1
2

Starting System
Component Location Index

UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX

^
.
Touring mode!

Except Touring models

(cont'd)

4-3

Starting System
Component Location Index (cont'd)

BATTERY
Test, page 22-93

STARTER
Starting System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-7
Solenoid Test, page 4-9
Performance T e s t page 4-10
Removal and Installation, page 4-11
Overhaul, page 4-12

4-4

Symptom Troubleshooting Index


Symptom
Engine does not start
(does not crank)

Engine cranks, but does


not start

Engine is hard to start

Engine cranks slowly

Multi-information
display warning CHECK
STARTER SYSTEM (with
multi-information
display)
Starter system indicator
stay on (without
multi-information
display)

Diagnostic procedure
1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low state of charge (see page
22-93).
3. Check the PGM-FI main relays (see page 22-96).
4. Check the starter (see page 4-7).
5. Check the starter cut relay 1 and the starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-96).
6. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-263).
7. Check the ignition switch or wire (see page 22-103).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Check for IMMOBI status and function (see page
22-451).
3. Check the fuel pressure, (see page 11-343)
4. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-344).
5. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11 -356).
6. Check the throttle body (see page 11 -371).
7. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-7).
8. Check for a damaged or broken timing belt.
9. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) reset in the
PGM-FI INSPECTION menu to cancel the ALL
INJECTORS STOP with the Honda Diagnostic System
(HDS).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-343).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-344).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-356).
1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low state of charge (see page
22-93).
3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-12).
4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).

Also check for


Poor ground at G101

Weak or fouled spark


plugs

Weak or fouled spark


plugs

Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).

4-5

Starting System
Circuit Diagram

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX


No. 1 (120 A)

No. 2 (50 A)

HI

G20
BLU

WHT

h
/
1

AUXILIARY
UNDER-DASH
FUSE HOLDER

/ T \
BAT

IGNITION
SWITCH
J HOT in
START (I

TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(Closed: P or N)

4-6

Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting


Special Tools Required
Alternator, Regulator, Battery & Starter Tester OTC3131
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
Air temperature must be between 5 9 - 1 0 0 F ( 1 5 - 3 8
C) during this procedure.
After the inspection, you must reset the powertrain
control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM will
continue to stop the fuel injectors f r o m functioning.
The battery must be in good condition and fully
charged.
1. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page
20-210).
2. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown.
NOTE: The probe is not used for battery testing.

7. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI


INSPECTION menu with the HDS.
8. Set the parking brake, then w i t h the shift lever in N or
P, turn the ignition switch to START (III) to crank the
engine.
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
Y E S - T h e starting system is OK. Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Check the electrical connections at the battery, the
negative battery cable to the body, the engine ground
cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion.
Then try cranking the engine again.
Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES-Repairing the loose connection corrected the
problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 15.
NO-Based on the following s y m p t o m s , take the
appropriate a c t i o n : B

OTC3131

If the starter does not crank the engine at all, go to


step 11.
If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, g o t o step 13.
If the starter does not disengage f r o m the torque
converter ring gear w h e n you release the key,
replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it,
and check for the following:
- Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
- Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch

3. Do the BATTERY TEST.


Does the display indicates GOOD or GOOD, LOW
CHARGE?
Y E S - T h e battery is OK. Charge the battery if
necessary, then go to step 4.
NO-lf the display indicate BAD BATTERY, replace the
battery, then retest. If the display indicate CHARGE &
RETEST, charge the battery, then retest.
4. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the PCM. If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -226).

(cont'd)

4-7

Starting System
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Make sure the shift lever is in N or P, then disconnect
the connector (A) f r o m the starter S terminal. Connect
a jumper wire f r o m the battery positive terminal to the
S terminal.

12. Check the following items in the order listed until you
find the problem in the circuit:H
NOTE: After the problem in the circuit is found and
repaired, go to step 15.
A blown STS (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary underdash
fuse holder located below the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
A blown STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Check for an open or short in the WHT wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
Check for an open or short in the GRN wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and the
PCM.
Check for an open or short in the BRN wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and the
starter cut relay 2.

Does the starter crank the engine?


Y E S - G o to step 12.
NO-Remove the starter (see page 4-11), and repair
(see page 4-12) or replace it as necessary.H

Check for an open or short in the WHT wire, BLK/


WHT wire, and connectors between the starter cut
relay 2 and the starter.
Check for an open or short in the YEL wire, LT BLU
wire, and connectors between the ignition switch
and the PCM.
Check for an open or short in the LT GRN wire and
connectors between the PCM, the starter cut relay
1, and the starter cut relay 2.
Check for an open or short in the BLU/ WHT wire
and connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and
the starter cut relay 2.
Check for an open or short in the BLU wire, BLU/
WHT wire, and connectors between the starter cut
relay 1 and the transmission range switch.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the transmission range switch and body ground
(G101).
Check for a faulty ignition switch (see page 22-103).
Check for a faulty transmission range switch (see
page 14-263).
Check for a faulty starter cut relay 1 and the starter
cut relay 2 (see page 22-96).

4-8

ENGINE

Starter Solenoid Test


13. Do the STARTING TEST with the alternator, regulator,
battery & starter tester.
NOTE: The probe is used for starter testing.

1. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page


20-210).
2. Do the battery removel procedure (see page 22-95).
3. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page 5-3).
4. Remove the harness clamp (A), then disconnect the
positive starter cable (B), the motor wire (C), and the
S terminal connector (D) f r o m the starter.

OTC3131

Does the display indicate cranking voltage greater than


or equal to 8.0 V and is the cur rent draw less than or
equal to 375 A ?
Y E S - G o to step 14.
NO-Replace the starter (see page 4-11), or remove
and disassemble it (see page 4-12), and check for
these p r o b l e m s : ^
Drag in the starter armature
Shorted armature w i n d i n g
Excessive drag in the engine
Open circuit in the starter armature commutator
segments
Excessively w o r n starter brushes
Open circuit in the starter brushes
Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
Faulty overrunning clutch
14. Remove the starter (see page 4-11), and inspect its
drive gear and the torque converter ring gear for
damage. Replace any damaged parts.

8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
11 N m
(1.1 k g f m , 8.1 Ibf ft)

5. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the


S terminal and the armature housing ( g r o u n d ) . There
should be continuity.
If there is continuity, go to step 6.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
6. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the
S terminal and the M terminal. There should be
continuity.
If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
7. Install the wire and the connector in the reverse order
of removal.
8. Install the battery base (see step 56 on page 5-19).
9. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).
10. Install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).

15. Select PCM reset in the PGM-FI INSPECTION menu to


cancel ALL INJECTORS STOP with the HDS.

4-9

Starting System
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the motor wire f r o m the M terminal.
2. Make the connections for this test using the thickest
(gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge as
used on the vehicle).

5. Disconnect the battery f r o m the starter body as


shown. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is
working properly.

NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the


battery connected for more than 10 seconds.

6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.


7. Reconnect the motor wire to the M terminal.
3. Connect the battery as s h o w n . Make sure you
disconnect the starter motor wire f r o m the
M terminal. If the starter pinion moves out, it is
working properly.

8. Connect the starter to the battery as s h o w n , and


confirm that the motor runs.

4. Disconnect the battery f r o m the M terminal. If the


pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the solenoid
is working properly.

BATTERY

BODY
(GROUND)

9. If the electric current meets the specification when the


battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working
properly.
Specification
Electric Current:

4-10

90 A or less

Starter Removal and Installation


Removal

Installation

1. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page


20-210).

1. Install the starter using a new gasket, then install the


lower radiator hose bracket (A) and the dipstick (B).

2. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-95).


3. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page 5-3).

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2kgfm,8.7lbfft)

4. Remove the harness clamp (A), then disconnect the


positive starter cable (B) and the S terminal connector
(C) f r o m the starter.
A

(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibf ft)

2. Connect the positive starter cable (C) and the


S terminal connector (D) to the starter, then install the
harness clamp (E). Make sure the crimped side of the
ring terminal faces away f r o m the starter w h e n you
connect it.
5. Remove the lower radiator hose bracket (D) and the
dipstick (E).

3. Install the battery base (see step 56 on page 5-19).


4. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).

6. Remove the t w o bolts holding the starter, then


remove the starter.

5. Install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).


6. Start the engine to make sure the starter works
properly.

4-11

Starting System
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
2Nm
(0.2 k g f m
11bf ft)

6Nm
(0.6 kgf m
4 Ibf ft)

ARMATURE HOUSING

END C O V E R

8 x 1.25 mm
9Nm
(0.9 k g f m ,
7 Ibf-ft)

STARTER SOLENOID

Apply m o l y b d e n u m
disulfide.

SOLENOID LEVER

IDLER GEAR
greaseKI

Apply m o l y b d e n u m disulfide.

4-12

Brush Holder Removal

Armature Inspection and Test

1. Remove the starter (see page 4-11).

5. Disassemble the starter as s h o w n at the beginning of


this procedure in the Exploded View.

2. Disconnect the motor wire f r o m the M terminal (see


page 4-9), and remove the end cover.
3. Pry back each brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then
position the brush on the brush holder about halfway
out of its holder. Release the spring to hold it in place.

6. Inspect the armature for wear or damage f r o m contact


with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or
damage, replace the armature.

4. Remove the brush holder assembly (A).

7. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is


dirty or burnt, resurface it w i t h an emery cloth or a
lathe to the specifications in step 8, or recondition
with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).

(cont'd)

4-13

Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
8. Check the commutator diameter with an electronic
digital caliper or dial type caliper. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.

10. Use a digital caliper or dial caliper to check the mica


depth (A). If the mica depth is below the service limit,
replace the armature.

Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 2 8 . 9 - 2 9 . 0 mm (1.138-1.142 in)
Service Limit:
28.0 mm (1.10 in)

Commutator Mica Depth


Standard (New): 0.50-0.90 mm (0.020-0.035 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)

\\U//
11. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between the
segments of the commutator. If there is an open
circuit between any segments, replace the armature.

9. Measure the commutator (A) runout.


If the commutator runout is within the service limit,
check the commutator for carbon dust or brass
chips between the segments.
If the commutator runout is not within the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in) max.
Service Limit:
0.05 mm (0.002 in)

4-14

12. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold


a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade
is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is
turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the
armature.

Overrunning Clutch Inspection


14. Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft.
Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.

13. Use an o h m m e t e r t o check for continuity between the


c o m m u t a t o r (A) and the armature coil core (B), and
between the commutator and the armature shaft (C).
If there is continuity, replace the armature.

15. Hold the overrunning clutch (A), and turn the drive
gear (B) in the direction shown to make sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the drive gear locks in the
opposite direction. If it does not lock, replace the
overrunning clutch assembly.

16. If the starter drive gear is w o r n or damaged, replace


the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not
available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring gear.
Replace it if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.

(cont'd)

4-15

Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Starter Brush Inspection
17. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
Standard (New): 15.0-16.0 mm (0.59-0.63 in)
Service Limit:
9.0 mm (0.35 in)

Brush Spring Inspection


19. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact w i t h the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure the
spring tension at the m o m e n t the spring lifts off the
brush. If it is not within the standard, replace the
brush holder assembly.
Spring Tension
Standard (New): 2 2 . 3 - 2 7 . 3 N (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5.00
- 6 . 1 3 Ibf)

Starter Brush Holder Test


18. Check for continuity between the ( + ) brushes (A) and
the ( ) brushes (B). If there is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.

Planetary Gear Inspection


20. Check the planetary gears (A) and internal ring gear
(B). Replace them if they are w o r n or damaged.

4-16

Starter Reassembly
2 1 . Pry back each brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then
position the brush on the brush holder about halfway
out of its holder. Release the spring to hold it in place.

ENGINE

23. Install the brush holder assembly. Next pry back each
brush spring again, and push each brush d o w n until it
seats against the commutator, then release the spring
against the end of the brush.

NOTE: To seat the new brushes. Slip a strip of #500 or


#600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the
commutator and each brush, and smoothly turn the
armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be
sanded to the same contour as the commutator.

24. Install the end cover to retain the brush holder.

22. Install the armature housing (A) and the armature (B)
by aligning the slotted point (C) to the projection (D).

25. Install the starter (see page 4-11).

4-17

Ignition System
Component Location Index
IGNITION COIL RELAY
Test, page 22-96

4-18

ENGINE

Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX

4-19

Ignition System
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see
page 11-226).
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
diagnose and repair the cause before continuing w i t h
this test.

9. A i m the light toward the pointer (A) on the t i m i n g belt


cover and the mark (B) on the crankshaft pulley. Check
the ignition t i m i n g under a no load condition
(headlights, blower fan, rear w i n d o w defogger, and
air conditioner are turned off).
NOTE: The other pointer (C) is not used.
Ignition Timing:
10 2 BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in N or P

5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h no load (in N or P) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.

6. Check the idle speed (see page 11-325).


7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
8. Connect the timing light to theNo.1 ignition coil
harness.

10. If the ignition t i m i n g differs f r o m the specification,


check the cam t i m i n g . If the cam timing is OK, update
the PCM if it does not have the latest software (see
page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ignition system works
properly, and the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250).
11. Disconnect the HDS and the t i m i n g light.

4-20

ENGINE

Ignition Coil Removal/Installation


1. Remove the engine cover.

2. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors (A), then


remove the ignition coils (B).
FRONT

0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibf ft)

REAR
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)

3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of


removal.

4-21

Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the spark plugs, then inspect the electrodes
and the ceramic insulator.
Burned or w o r n electrodes may be caused by these
conditions:
- Advanced ignition t i m i n g

3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the


center electrode (A) is rounded, or if the spark plug
gap (B) is out of specification. Use only the spark
plugs listed.
NOTE: Do not adjust the gap of iridium tip plugs.

- Loose spark plug

Spark Plug
NGK:

- Plug heat range too hot


- Insufficient cooling
Fouled plugs may be caused by these conditions:

ILZKR7B-11

Electrode Gap
Standard (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in)

- Retarded ignition t i m i n g
- Oil in combustion chamber
- Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
Worn or deformed
electrodes

Damaged
gasket

Improper gap
Oil-fouling
Carbon deposits
Cracked center
electrode insulator

Cracked
insulator

2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,


clean the electrode w i t h a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this will damage the electrode.
When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.

4-22

4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize c o m p o u n d to the


plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder
head, finger-tight. Torque t h e m to 18 N m (1.8 k g f m ,
13 Ibf-ft).

Charging System
Component Location Index

DRIVE BELT
Inspection, page 4-30
Replacement page 4-31

4-23

Charging System
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
Charging system indicator
does not come on with the
ignition switch in ON (II)
Charging system indicator
stays on

Battery discharged

Battery overcharged

4-24

Diagnostic procedure
Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 4-26).

1. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-30).


2. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-31).
3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
4. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page
4-26).
1. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit (see page 4-28).
2. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-30).
3. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current draw w i t h the
ignition switch in LOCK (0), and the key removed. The multiplex
control unit may take up to 10 minutes to turn off (sleep mode) for
some models.
4. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
5. Test the battery (see page 22-93).
6. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-31).
1. Test the battery (see page 22-93).
2. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit (see page 4-28).

Also check
for

ENGINE

Circuit Diagram

UNDER-OASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX


No. 1 (120 A)

IGNITION SWITCH
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

D1

G20

IG1 HOT in ON (II)


and START (III)

) No. 10
(7.5 A)

) No. 3
(10 A)

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE


YEL

I
I
I
I
I
I
I

t
i
i

WHT
I
I
I
I
'

RED
I
I
I
I
A48

-Q

A49

XL
G202

VOLTAGE REGULATOR

4-25

Charging System
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Check for stored DTCs in the PGM-FI before
troubleshooting the charging system indicator.

13.

Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C42 and body ground.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

PCM

C O N N E C T O R C (49P)

Does the charging system indicator come on?


n

Y E S - G o to step 2.

N O - G o t o step 14.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm
for 1 minute.

2 3 |4|e h
8 9 10
11 1 2
1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21 I
22 24
25
26 27 28 1
30 32 33 34
37 38 39
4 0 41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 1 / | 4 6 1 4 7 4 8 4 9
1|

Does the charging system indicator go off?

>< ><

JLALTL
X5)(WHT/BLU)

YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go to


the alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting
(see page 4 - 2 8 ) .

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

NO-Go to step 3.

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between


alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM
connector terminal C42.H

3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function


procedure (see page 22-334).
Does the charging system indicator flash?

NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest


software (see page 11-249), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) .

Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-359).B
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.

Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function


procedure (see page 22-334).

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Does the charging system indicator flash?

Does the charging system indicator go off?

Y E S - G o to step 15.

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), or repair


the alternator (see page 4 - 3 6 ) .

NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page


22-359).

NO-Go to step 7.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10.

Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle


and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see
page 11-226).

11. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
f r o m damage.
12.

14.

Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

4-26

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


16.

Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.

17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 to


body ground w i t h a jumper wire.

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)


Terminal side of female terminals
r

u
f1

25. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C42 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3.

ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

L (WHT/BLU)

ENGINE

4J

r
_| 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 ^
16 17 18 19
11 12
26
22
25
24

30
32 33 34 3 5 ^ 37
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7

JUMPER
WIRE

>< ><

9|10|
20 21 i
27 28
38 39 1
48|49|

ALTL (WHT/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals

18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


Does the charging system indicator come on?

19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


20. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3).
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
22. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the PCM. If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-226).
23. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).

2)
4J

ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), or repair


the alternator (see page 4 - 3 6 ) .
NO-Disconnect the jumper wire, then go to step 19.

u
(1

(WHT/BLU)

Is there continuity?
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-249), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-226), then recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away w i t h a
known-good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-250).!
NO-Repair open in the wire between alternator 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal

C42.B

NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM


from damage.
24. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

4-27

Charging System
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required
Alternator, Regulator, Battery & Starter Tester OTC3131
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857

4. Do the CHARGING SYSTEM TEST.


Does the dispaly indicate voltage within 13.5-15.1 V and
amperage 87.5 A or more ?
YES-Go to step 5.

1. Make sure the battery connections are good, and that


the battery is sufficiently charged and in good
condition (see page 22-93).
2. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown.

IMO-lf the voltage is less than 13.5 V, go to alternator


control circuit troubleshooting. If the voltage is over
15.1 V and amperage is less than 87.5 A, replace the
alternator (see page 4-33) or repair the alternator (see
page 4-36).B
5. Check the diode condition on the display.
Dose the display indicate

GOOD?

YES-The diode is OK. Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e d


OTC3131

NO-lf the display indicate BAD, replace the alternator


(see page 4-33) or repair the alternator (see page
4-36), then retest.H
NOTE: If the display indicates N/A, the diode pattern
could not be diagnosed. Repeat the test agein. If N/A
appears repeatedly, replace the alternator.

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm


w i t h no load (in N or P), until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.

4-28

Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting


1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C43 and body ground.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see
page 11-226).
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with
this test.

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

/ /

7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector


terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal of the battery.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

e
BATTERY

C (WHT/GRN)

u
f1

4j

Wire side of female terminals

>> ><

9 10
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|

/f^ALTC
(WHT/GRN)

5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.


6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high
beam.

3 | 4 | e I B | 7 | 8
16 17 18 19
11 12
24
26
25
22
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37
30
40 41 42 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
1| 2

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM
connector terminal C43.H
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-249), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).H
11. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
f r o m damage.

Is there less than 1 V?

12. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

YES-Go to step 11.


NO-Go to step 8.
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
f r o m damage.
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

(cont'd)

4-29

Charging System
Alternator Control Circuit
Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Drive Belt Inspection

13. Check for loose terminals and connections, then


check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
C43 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2.

1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is


cracked or damaged, replace it.

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)


Terminal side of female terminals

1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110 j
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21 i
22
24
25
26 27 28
30
3 2 3 3 34
37 38 39 1
40141 4 2 1 4 3 1 4 4 1 / | 46147 4 8 | 4 9 |

>< ><

ALTC (WHT/GRN)
C (WHT/GRN)
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), or repair
the alternator (see page 4 - 3 6 ) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between alternator 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector terminal

C43.B

4-30

2. Remove the power steering (P/S) fluid reservor.


3. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator pointer (A) on
the A/C compressor bracket is not beyond the edge of
the indicator (B) on the auto-tensioner. If the pointer is
beyond the indicator, replace the drive belt (see page
4-31).

Drive Belt Replacement

Drive Belt Auto-tensioner


Inspection

1. Set a socket wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner,


and slowly turn the wrench in the direction of the
rotation arrow, then remove the drive belt.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure the


A/C switch is OFF. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0).

NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you


must turn the wrench slowly for at least 3 seconds.

2. Remove the power steering (P/S) fluid reservor.


3. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator
pointer (A). Start the engine, then check the position
again w i t h the engine idling. If the position of the
indicator moves or fluctuates a lot, do the
auto-tensioner air bleeding (see page 4-33), and
recheck. If the position is still fluctuates, replace the
auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).

2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.

4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).

(cont'd)

4-31

Charging System
Drive Beit Auto-tensioner
Inspection (cont'd)

Drive Belt Auto-tensioner


Replacement

5. Set a socket wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner,


and slowly turn the wrench in the direction of the
rotation arrow.

1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).

NOTE:
This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you must
turn the wrench slowly for at least 3 seconds.

2. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-225).


3. Remove the auto-tensioner.
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N m (7.5 kgf m, 54 Ibfft)

Check the belt for cracks or damage (see page 4-30).


Check for oil leakage f r o m the damper rubber
bellows.
If the tensioner does not move smoothly, or you
hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner
(see page 4-32).

4. Remove the any oil and clean the bolt (A) and the
washer (B). Using new engine oil, lubricate the areas
shown.

: Clean and add new engine oil


A

5. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of


removal.
6. Do the auto-tensioner air bleeding (see page 4-33).

4-32

Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Air


Bleeding

Alternator Removal and Installation

1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).

Removal

2. Attach a socket wrench to the drive belt


auto-tensioner f r o m above the engine. Slowly, (at
least 3 seconds) compress the auto-tensioner, in the
direction s h o w n , the full length of its stroke, then
slowly (at least 3 seconds) move the auto-tensioner
the opposite direction the full length of its stroke.
Repeat this operation three times.

1. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page


20-210).
2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see
page 22-94).
3. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21).
4. Remove the coolant reservoir (A) and the power
steering (P/S) fluid reservoir (B), then remove the
holder bracket (C).
A

3. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).

5. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).


6. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and the
positive alternator cable (B) f r o m the alternator.

7. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (C)


f r o m the A/C compressor.
8. Remove the bolt (D) securing the harness holder.

(cont'd)

4-33

Charging System
Alternator Removal and Installation (cont'd)
9. Remove the mounting bolt (A) and the alternator
bracket mounting bolt (B), then remove the alternator.

Installation
1. Install the alternator, then tighten the mounting bolt
(A) and the alternator bracket mounting bolt (B).

10x1.25 mm
45 N m
(4.6 kgf m, 33 Ibf ft)

2. Install the bolt (A) securing the harness holder.

3. Connect the A/C compressor clutch connector (B) to


the A/C compressor.
4. Connect the alternator connector (C) and the positive
alternator cable (D) to the alternator. Make sure the
crimped it side of the ring terminal faces away f r o m
the alternator w h e n you connect it.
5. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).

4-34

6. Install the holder bracket (A), then install the coolant


reservoir (B) and the power steering (P/S) fluid
reservoir (C).
6 x 1.0 mm

7. Install the engine cover (see page 4-21).


8. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see
page 22-94).
9. Install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).

Charging System
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
FRONT BEARING RETAINER

END COVER

4-36

Special Tools Required


. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bearing Driver A t t a c h m e n t 42 x 47 m m 07746-0010300

5. Remove the end cover (A) and the terminal insulator


(B).

NOTE: Refer to the exploded view as needed during this


procedure.
Alternator Disassembly

1. Test the alternator and regulator (see page 4-28)


before you remove t h e m .
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-33).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the
pulley locknut w i t h a 10 m m wrench (A) and a 22 m m
wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact wrench.
A

6. Remove the brush holder assembly (A).

(cont'd)

4-37

Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Remove the four through bolts, then remove the rear
housing assembly (A) and the washer (B).

10. Remove the front bearing retainer.

11. Drive out the front bearing w i t h a brass drift and a


hammer.
8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to
step 13. Remove the rotor f r o m the drive-end
housing.

9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the


bearing journal surface in the drive-end housing for
seizure marks.
If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor assembly.
If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.

4-38

12. Install a new front bearing in the drive-end housing


with a hammer, the driver handle, 15 x 135L, and the
bearing driver attachment, 42 x 47 m m .

ENGINE

Rotor Slip Ring Test


14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
If there is continuity, go to step 15.
If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly.

07749-0010000

07746-0010300

Alternator Brush Inspection


13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) w i t h a vernier
caliper (B).
If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush holder assembly.
If the brush length is OK, go to step 14.
Alternator Brush Length
Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in)
Service Limit:
1.5 mm (0.06 in)

15. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the
rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
assembly, and go to step 16.
If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
Alternator Reassembly
16. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the
drive-end housing, then tighten its locknut to 110 N-m
(11.2 k g f - m , 8 1 . 0 l b f f t ) .
17. Remove any grease or any oil f r o m the slip rings.
18. Put the rear housing assembly and the drive-end
housing/rotor assembly together, tighten the four
through bolts.
19. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit (B)
(about 1.6 m m (0.06 in) diameter) to hold them there.

(cont'd)

4-39

Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
20. Install the brush holder assembly, and pull out the pin
or drill bit.

2 1 . Install the end cover.


22. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by
hand to make sure the rotor turns smoothly and
w i t h o u t noise.
23. Install the alternator (see page 4-34) and the drive belt
(see page 4-31).

4-40

Cruise Control
Component Location Index

4-41

Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
Cruise control cannot be set

Cruise control can be set, but the


cruise main indicator does not
come on

Cruise control can be set, but the


cruise control indicator does not
come on

Vehicle does not accelerate


accordingly w h e n the
resume/accel button is pressed

Set speed does not cancel when


the brake pedal is pressed

Set speed does not cancel when


the cruise control main button is
pressed

Set speed does not cancel when


the cancel button is pressed

Set speed does not resume w h e n


the resume/accel button is
pressed (with the cruise control
main switch turned o n , and set
speed temporarily canceled by
pressing the brake pedal)

With the ignition switch in ON (II),


and the lighting switch turned o n ,
the cruise control combination
switch illumination does not
come on

4-42

Diagnostic procedure
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Check the No. 11 (20 A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
4. Do the cruise control combination switch test
(see page 4-46).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-334).
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
Test the cruise contol main switch signal input.
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-334).
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
Test the cruise control indicator signal input.
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
Test the resume/accel switch signal input.
3. Do the cruise control combination switch test
(see page 4-46).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
3. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-239).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
3. Do the cruise control combination switch test
(see page 4-46).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
Test the cancel switch signal input.
3. Do the cruise control combination switch test
(see page 4-46).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Check the brake pedal position switch
adjustment (see page 19-6).
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-44).
Test the resume/accel switch signal input.
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
4. Do the cruise control combination switch test
(see page 4-46).
Check the cruise control combination switch (see
page 4-46).

Also check for


Poor ground G401

Faulty gauge control


module

Faulty gauge control


module

Open circuit, loose or


disconnected terminals:
WHT, GRY

Short to power on the


BRN wire
Faulty brake pedal
position switch
Short to ground power
on the ORN wire

Open circuit, loose or


disconnected terminals:
PUR, RED or WHT, GRY
wire
Open circuit, loose or
disconnected
terminals: WHT, GRY
Faulty brake pedal
position switch

ENGINE

Circuit Diagram

No. 14(7.5 A) FUSE


(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)

MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

CPU

CANH
CANL

DRIVER

DIMMING CIRCUIT

@-AAAi

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

(KJHAA

CRUISE INDICATOR
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

|C2

|C3

|B18

|B17

RED/
BLK

OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR

TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH

|B26

RED/
BLU

GRN

4S&
THROTTLE BODY

4-43

Cruise Control
Cruise Control Input Test
NOTE: Always make sure that you have the latest Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) software.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does not
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -226).
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs (see page 11 -3).
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs, flex
the circuit wires, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be tested
Brake pedal
position switch
signal

Test condition
Brake pedal pressed,
then released

Transmission
range switch
signal

Shift lever in D and D3

Cruise control
main switch
signal

Cruise control main


button pressed and
released

Set switch
signal

Set/decel button
pressed and released

4-44

Parameter: Desired result


CRUISE BRAKE SW
should indicate OFF
w h e n the brake pedal is
pressed and ON w h e n
the brake pedal is
released.

Possible cause if result is not obtained


Faulty brake pedal position switch
Blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
A n open in the wire between the PCM and
the brake pedal position switch
A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the brake pedal position switch
SHIFT/CLUTCH SW
Faulty transmission range switch
should indicate ON in P, A n open in the wire between the PCM and
R, N, 2, and 1 and OFF in
the transmission range switch
D and D3.
A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
Poor ground G101
Faulty cruise control combination switch
CRUISE MASTER
( M A I N ) S W should
A n open in the wire between the gauge
indicate ON w h e n the
control module and the cruise control
cruise control main
combination switch
button is pressed and
A wire shorted to ground between the
OFF when the cruise
gauge control module and the cruise
control main button is
control combination switch
released.
A n open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and the
ground
CRUISE SET SW should Faulty cruise control combination switch
A n open in the wire between the gauge
indicate ON w h e n the
set/decel button is
control module and the cruise control
pressed and OFF w h e n
combination switch
the set/decel button is
A wire shorted to ground between the
released.
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch

Signal to be tested
Resume switch
signal

Test condition
Resume/accel button
pressed and released

Cancel switch
signal

Cancel button pressed


and released

Cruise control
indicator signal

Start the engine, press


the cruise control
main button switch to
turn it o n , and drive
the vehicle above
25 mph (40 km/h) with
the cruise control set
and cancel the cruise
control

Parameter: Desired result


CRUISE RESUME SW
should indicate ON
when the resume/accel
button is pressed and
OFF when the
resume/accel button is
released.
CRUISE CANCEL SW
should indicate ON
w h e n the cancel button
is pressed and OFF
w h e n the cancel button
is released.
CRUISE INDICATOR
should indicate ON
w h e n the cruise control
is set and OFF w h e n the
cruise control is
canceled.

Possible cause if result is not obtained


Faulty cruise control combination switch
A n open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the cruise control
combination switch
A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
Faulty cruise control combination switch
An open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the cruise control
combination switch
A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
Faulty gauge control module
Faulty cruise control combination switch
A n open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the cruise control
combination switch
A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch

4-45

Cruise Control
Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement
There are SRS components located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-19), and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-21), in the SRS
before doing repair or service.
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-170).
2. Disconnect the cable reel sub harness 20P connector.

Wire side of
female terminals

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each


switch position according to the table.
If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
cruise control combination switch failure occurred
on the cruise control input test (see page 4-44),
check and repair the wire harness on the switch
circuit.
If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the cruise control combination switch.

\y

Terminal
Position

\^

10

11 12
r\

r\

Cruise control
main (ON)
Cruise control
main (OFF)
Set/decel
(PRESSED)

r\

Resume/accel
(PRESSED)
r\

Cancel
(PRESSED)
Light (ON)

4-46

r\
\J

\J

o
o

r\
vj
1%
-M-

r\
\J

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


Component Location Index

4-47

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


General Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures
The term intermittent failure means a system may have
had a failure, but it checks OK now. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at all connectors related
to the circuit that you are troubleshooting.

How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic


System)
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

Opens and Shorts


Open and short are c o m m o n electrical terms. A n open is
a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another
wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something w o n ' t work at all. With complex electronics
(such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something
works, but not the way it's supposed to.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the PCM. If it does not communicate the DLC
circuit.
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot
data, and download any data f o u n d . Then refer to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions w h e n
the first malfunction was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
snapshot, and current data, about the active control
engine m o u n t (ACM) system.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
that came with the HDS.

4-48

HDS Clear Command


The PCM stores DTCs about the ACM system even if
there is no electrical power such as w h e n the battery
negative terminal or No. 19 Fl MAIN (15 A) fuse are
disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts should
be cleared by using the CLEAR COMMAND of the HDS, if
parts are replaced.
The HDS has t w o kinds of clear commands to meet this
purpose. They are DTC clear, and ACM reset. DTC clear
c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, and readiness codes. This must be
done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during
troubleshooting.

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the Engine


Mount Control Unit
Special Tools Required
Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003*
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch codes (B), and connect the codes to a digital
multimeter (C).

The PCM reset c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC codes,


freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all
specific data about the ACM system.

DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect
the HDS f r o m the DLC.

ACM Reset
1. Reset the A C M w i t h the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.

2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured


tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into
the connector f r o m the wire side until it touches the
end of the wire terminal.
3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or
the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector,
and probe the terminals (B) f r o m the terminal side. Do
not force the probe into the connector.

NOTICE
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures
can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections.

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect


the HDS f r o m the DLC.
A

4-49

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC
P0A14

Detection Item
Front Engine Mount Actuator Circuit Malfunction

P0A15

Front Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit Low Current

P0AB6

Rear Engine Mount Actuator Circuit Malfunction

P0AB7

Rear Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit Low Current

P15AB

Engine Mount Control Unit Power Source Circuit Low Voltage

P15AE

Cylinder Pause Signal 1 Malfunction

P15B0

CKP Sensor Signal Malfunction

P15BD

Cylinder Pause Signal 2 Malfunction

P15BE

CMP Sensor Signal Malfunction

P15BF

CMP Sensor Signal Intermittent Interruption

P15C0

CKP Sensor Signal Intermittent Interruption

P16C4

Engine Mount Actuator Control Power Circuit Stuck OFF

P16C5

Engine Mount Actuator Control Power Circuit Stuck ON

P16C6

Engine Mount Actuator High Voltage During Function Test

U0029

F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)

U0100

F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Mount Control Uint-Powertrain Control


Module (PCM))

4-50

Note
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-53)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-55)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-53)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-55)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-58)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-59)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-61)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-64)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-67)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-67)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-61)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-70)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-73)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-74)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-75)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 4-75)

System Description
Overview
The active control engine mount (ACM) system reduces the amount of engine vibration (that creates engine noise)
which is transmitted to the passenger's compartment.
The ACM system consists of the engine mount actuators, the engine mount control unit, and the powertrain control
module (PCM).
The PCM sends the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor information and camshaft position (CMP) sensor information to the
engine mount control unit. The engine mount control unit uses this information to predict the amount of vibration
created by the engine.
The ACM system then uses the engine mount actuators to generate a canceling vibration that operates like the active
noise control (ANC) and reduces the amount of noise and vibration in the passenger's compartment.

The ACM creates a canceling


noise and vibration.

The engine vibrates.

-A

Some of the engine noise and vibration


is canceled and does not transfer to
the passenger's compartment.

4-51

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH

UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX

IGNITION SWITCH

F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
t$A I IfcHY

No. 1(120 A)

No. 2 (50 A)

G20

crxx>

-O~\JD

2f

D1
WHT

3AT

0-4

+0

IG1 HOT in ON (II)


and START (III)
ACTIVE CONTROL

) No. 10

ENGINE MOUNT
(ACM) CONTROL

(7.5 A)
5

BOX

CKP

CMP

RED

WHT

CANL

CANH

IGSOL

SOLRLY

IG1
REAR ENGINE

FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT

MOUNT

ACTUATOR

ACTUATOR

SOLFP

SOLRP

SOLFM

SOLRM

SCPC

SCPA

LG

PG

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT

LTBLU

PUR-

DLrv

4-52

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY

RELAY

ENGINE

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0A14: Front Engine Mount Actuator
Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0AB6: Rear Engine Mount Actuator
Circuit Malfunction

9. Measure the voltage between body ground and the


appropriate engine mount control unit 16P connector
terminal (see table).
DTC

ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
TERMINAL

P0AB6

Rear side
No. 1
Rear side
No.2
Front side
No. 1
Front side
No.2

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
rear engine m o u n t actuator.
When testing the engine mount actuator, be sure to
use a VOM capable of reading 0.01 ohms change of
resistance.
Be sure to zero the meter before checking the engine
mount actuator.
If the vehicle has been driven, allow the engine mount
actuator to cool d o w n for about 2 hours before testing.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

P0AB6
P0A14
P0A14

WIRE
COLOR

No. 8

WHT

No. 16

RED

No.2

BLU

GRN

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR


SOLRP
(WHT)*

SOLFP (BLU)

1
10

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT
TERMINAL
No. 9

ETlSOLRM

8
3 4 5 6 7
15 16
11 12/_U

(GRN)*

S O L F M (RED)

3. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.


4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0A14 and/ or P0AB6*

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 5.

Wire side of female terminals

Is there battery
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator.B
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the front engine mount actuator (rear
engine mount actuator)* 2P connector.

voltage?

YES-Repair short to power in the wire between the


engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

7. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P


connector.
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

4-53

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Check for continuity to body ground between engine
mount control unit 16P connector terminals No. 2 (No.
8)* and No. 16 (No. 9)*.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

OSOLRM
(GRN)*

4
10

11 12

14 15

16

S O L F M (RED)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
engine m o u n t control unit 16P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 16 (No. 8 and No. 9 ) * , then go to step 14.
N O - G o t o s t e p 12.
12. At the engine mount actuator side, measure the
resistance between front engine mount actuator (rear
engine mount actuator)* 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NOTE: Zero-out the meter before testing to adjust the
meter to the test leads.
ENGINE MOUNT ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there about 0.48-0.54 O at 68 F (20 C)?


YES-Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator. If it is OK, replace the engine mount control
unit (see page 4-77), then go to step 14.
NO-Replace the front engine mount (see page 5-22),
or rear engine mount (see page 5-24), then go to step
14.

4-54

14. Reconnect all connectors.


15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
16. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

SOLRP
(WHT)*

SOLFP (BLU)

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

17. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.


18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC POM4 and/ or P0AB6*

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P0A15: Front Engine Mount Actuator


Control Circuit Low Current
DTC P0AB7: Rear Engine Mount Actuator
Control Circuit Low Current

ENGINE

7. At the engine m o u n t actuator side, measure the


resistance between front engine m o u n t actuator (rear
engine m o u n t actuator)* 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NOTE: Zero-out the meter before testing to adjust the
meter to the test leads.

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).

ENGINE MOUNT ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR

Information marked w i t h an asterisk O applies to the


rear engine m o u n t actuator.
When testing the engine mount actuator, be sure to
use a V O M capable of reading 0.01 ohms change of
resistance.
Be sure to zero the meter before checking the engine
m o u n t actuator.
If the vehicle has been driven, allow the engine m o u n t
actuator to cool d o w n for about 2 hours before testing.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC POA15 and/ or P0AB7"

indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine m o u n t control unit and the engine mount
actuator, the engine m o u n t control unit and body
ground (G202J.B

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there about 0.48-0.54 Q at 68 F (20 C)?


YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the front engine m o u n t (see page 5-22),
or rear engine m o u n t (see page 5-24), and then go to
step 13.
8. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
9. Check for continuity between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
PG (BLK)

It

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


10

6. Disconnect the front engine m o u n t actuator (rear


engine m o u n t actuator)* 2P connector.

11 12

14 15

16

T
Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine m o u n t
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground (G202), then go to step 13.

(cont'd)

4-55

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between the appropriate engine
mount control unit 16P connector terminal and body
ground (see table).
ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
TERMINAL

DTC

Rear side
No.1
Rear side
No.2
Front side
No. 1
Front side
No.2

P0AB7
P0AB7
P0A15
P0A15

ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT
TERMINAL
No. 9

WIRE
COLOR

No. 8

WHT

No. 16

RED

No.2

BLU

GRN

11. Connect appropriate front engine mount actuator


(rear engine mount actuator)* 2P connector terminal
to body ground with a j u m p e r wire (see table).
DTC
P0AB7
P0AB7
P0A15
P0A15

ENGINE MOUNT
ACTUATOR TERMINAL
Rear side No. 1
Rear side No. 2
Front side No. 1
Front side No. 2

ENGINE MOUNT ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR

J U M P E R WIRE

JUMPER WIRE

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR


SOLRP
(WHT)*

SOLFP (BLU)

5
10

11 12

6
14 15

FISOLRM
(GRN)*

8
16

S O L F M (RED)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between the
engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 11.

4-56

WIRE
COLOR
GRN
WHT
PNK
BLU

Terminal side of female terminals

ENGINE

12. Check for continuity between the appropriate engine


mount control unit 16P connector terminal and body
ground (see table).
ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
TERMINAL

DTC

P0AB7

Rear side
No. 1
Rear side
No. 2
Front side
No. 1
Front side
No. 2

P0AB7
P0A15
P0A15

ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT
TERMINAL
No. 9

WIRE
COLOR

No. 8

WHT

No. 16

RED

No. 2

BLU

13. Reconnect all connectors.


14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
16. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0A15 and/ or P0AB7*

indicated?

GRN
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR


SOLRP

SOLFP (BLU)

(WHT)*
1

5
10

11 12

6 7
14 15

ETlSOLRM
(GRN)*

8
16

SOLFM (RED)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the engine mount
actuator. If it is OK, replace the engine mount control
unit (see page 4-77), then go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the engine
mount control unit and the engine mount actuator,
then go to step 13.

4-57

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P15AB: Engine Mount Control Unit Power
Source Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

11. Measure the voltage between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
IG1 (YEL)

1
10

2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC P16C5

8
11 12

14 15

16

indicated?

YES-Do the troubleshooting for the DTC P16C5.


Wire side of female terminals

NO-Go to step 3.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15AB

indicated?

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and body ground (G202).H
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Go to step 12.


NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 10 IG
METER (7.5 A) fuse and engine mount control unit 16P
connector terminal No. 5, then go to step 14.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
13. Check for continuity between engine mount control
unit16P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

7. Inspect the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse in the


under-dash fuse/relay box.
1

Is the fuse OK?

NO-Repair short to ground in the wire between the


No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse and engine mount
control unit 16P connector terminal (No. 5 or No. 11).
Also replace the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse, then go
to step 14.
8. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit 16P connector.
and terminals OK?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 14.
9. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4-58

10

YES-Go to step 8.

Are the connections

LG (BLK)

8
4 5 6 7
11 1 2 / 14 15 16

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page
4-77), then go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground (G202), then go to step 14.

14. Reconnect all connectors.


15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
16. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
17. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15AB

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and body ground
(G202), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m still does not go
away, replace the engine mount control unit (see
page 4-77).
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P15AE: Cylinder Pause Signal 1


Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 3 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION TEST w i t h the HDS.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P15AE

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the PCM.H
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 3 CYLIINDER
ACTIVATION TEST w i t h the HDS.

(cont'd)

4-59

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Measure the voltage between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground
during 3 cylinder pause mode.

14. Connect engine mount control unit 16P connector


terminal No. 6 to body ground with a jumper wire.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

SCPA (PUR)

SCPA (PUR)
8

10

11 12

10

11 12

14 15

16

16

14 15

JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of female terminals


Wire side o1f female terminals

Is there battery

15. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


A14 and body ground.

voltage?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If it is OK,
replace the engine mount control unit (see page 4-77),
then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)


C S S A M A (PUR)

.|1|2
11
1

22

9 110
4 | 6 | 6 | 7 | 8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28

/ >< ><
/

29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
|40|41 / l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 l /

11. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

48 49

12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P)


13. Check for continuity between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
SCPA (PUR)

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If it is OK,
go to step 2 1 .

10

11 12

14 15

16

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal No.
6 and PCM connector terminal A14, then go to step 16.
N O - G o t o s t e p 14.

4-60

NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount


control unit 16P connector terminal No. 6 and PCM
connector terminal A14, then go to step 16.

16. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P15B0: CKP Sensor Signal Malfunction

17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

DTC P15C0: CKP Sensor Signal Intermittent


Interruption

18. Clear the DTC with the HDS.


19. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 3 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION TEST with the HDS.
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P1 SAE indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
21. Reconnect all connectors.
22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see step 2 on page 11-3).
23. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 3 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION TEST with the HDS.
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15AE

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated (see page 11-249), substitute a
known-good PCM (see step 2 on page 11-3), and
retest. If the PCM was substituted and the s y m p t o m
indicated goes away, replace the original PCM (see
page 11-250J.B
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
If PGM-FI system's DTC P0335 and/or P0339 is stored
at the same time as DTC P15B0 and/or P15C0,
troubleshoot P0335 and/or P0339 first, then recheck
for P15B0 and/or P15C0.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15B0 and/ or P15C0

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the PCM.H
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit 16P connector and PCM
connector A (49P).
Are the connections

and terminals OK?

Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 26.
7. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector (see page
11-247).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

4-61

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Measure the voltage between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 15 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

2
10

I
1
8 c
3 4 5 6 7
16
11 12 / / 14 15

13. Measure the voltage between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 15 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

n
2

3 4

10

CKP (GRN)

Wire side of female terminals

n
5

11 12

6 7
14 15

9
16

CKP (GRN)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V?

Is there about 0 V?

Y E S - G o t o step 10.

YES-Replace the engine m o u n t control unit (see page


4-77), then go to step 26.

NO-Go to step 20.


10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground with a j u m p e r wire.
CKP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

NO-Go to step 14.


14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
15. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the CKP sensor 3P
connector.
16. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

CKP (BUL)
J U M P E R WIRE

Wire side of female terminals

12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

4-62

F1
J

19. Measure the voltage between PCM connector


terminal A34 and body g r o u n d .
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

ENGINE

23. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.


24. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
25. Check for continuity between engine m o u n t control
unit16P connector terminal No. 15 and body ground.

j]8 9 | 1 0 |
J 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |
11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
22
24
25
26 27 28 i
i
29 30 31 32|33 34 35 36 37 38 39
[40 41
48149

/ >^ ><
/
4

CKPOUT (GRN)

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V?

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

2
10

I
3 4 5
11 12

I
8 c
7
16
14 15

CKP (GRN)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Y E S - G o to step 3 1 .
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 15 and PCM
connector terminal A34, then go to step 26.
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between


engine m o u n t control unit 16P connector terminal No.
15 and PCM connector terminal A34, then go to step
26.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .

21. Disconnect the engine m o u n t control unit 16P


connector.
22. Check for continuity between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 15 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

26. Reconnect all connectors.


27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
28. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
29. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.
30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

n
1

3 4

10

Is DTC P15B0 and/ or P15C0

n
5 6

11 12

7
14 15

9
16

CKP (GRN)

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 23.
NO-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page
4-77), then go to step 26.

(cont'd)

4-63

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
3 1 . Reconnect all connectors.
32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
33. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15B0 and/ or P15C0

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated (see page 11-249), substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and retest. If the
PCM was substituted and the s y m p t o m indicated
goes away, replace the original PCM (see page
11-250).
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

DTC P15BD: Cylinder Pause Signal 2


Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 4 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION TEST with the HDS.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15BD

indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the PCM.H
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 4 CYLIINDER
ACTIVATION TEST with the HDS.

4-64

9. Measure the voltage between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground
during 2 cylinder pause mode.

ENGINE

13. Check for continuity between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR


S C P C (LT BLU)
S C P C (LT BLU)

1
1

10

11 12

14 15

10

11 12

16

14 15

16

Wire side of female terminals


Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM. If it is OK,
replace the engine m o u n t control unit (see page 4-77),
then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 10.

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between


engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal No.
4 and PCM connector terminal A15, then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Connect engine mount control unit 16P connector
terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.

10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.


S C P C (LT BLU)

12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P)


1

10

11 12

14 15

16

JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of female terminals

(cont'd)

4-65

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
A15 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
I

1 C S S A M C (LT BLU)

E-il

J l | 2
11

.i .i YQ.
5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
3|4|

/ >< ><

1 22

24

25

I
*=

41

/ l / l 441/|

4 6 L / 48149

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If it is OK,
g o t o step21.
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM
connector terminal A15, then go to step 16.
16. Reconnect all connectors.
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
18. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
19. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 4 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION TEST with the HDS.
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15BD

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

4-66

22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
23. Select the VTEC TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu, and do the VPS TEST of the 4 CYLINDER
ACTIVATION TEST with the HDS.

26 27 28

29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39

4 0

21. Reconnect all connectors.

24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P15BD

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated (see page 11-249), substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and retest. If the
PCM was substituted and the s y m p t o m indicated
goes away, replace the original PCM (see page
11-250).B
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P15BE: CMP Sensor Signal Malfunction


DTC P15BF: CMP Sensor Signal Intermittent
Interruption
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
If PGM-FI system's DTC P0365 and/or P0369 is stored
at the same t i m e as DTC P15BE and/or P15BF,
troubleshoot P0365 and/or P0369 first, then recheck
for P15BE and/or P15BF.

ENGINE

9. Measure the voltage between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
CMP (RED)

ft
6
10

11112|/114|15

16

Wire side of female terminals

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


Is there about 5 V?

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.


3. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15BE and/ or P15BF

Indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 10.
NO-Go to step 20.
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Connect CMP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground with a jumper wire.

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the PCM.B

CMP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit 16P connector and PCM
connector A (49P).
Are the connections

CMP (RED)
JUMPER WIRE

and terminals OK?

Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 26.

Wire side of female terminals

12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

7. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector (see page


11-246).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

4-67

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Measure the voltage between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground.

19. Measure the voltage between PCM connector


terminal A35 and body ground.

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

CMP (RED)
ft

10

11 12

J1I2
14 15

11

16
1

22

3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7

f8

/
/ >< ><

1101

13 14 15 16

19 20 21

24

26 27 28

25

29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
40 41

AA\^\/

A
CMPOUT(RED)

46

48 49

Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 0 V?
Terminal side of female terminals

YES-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page


4-77), then go to step 26.

Is there about 5 V?

NO-Go to step 14.

YES-Gotostep31.

14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


15. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the CMP sensor 3P
connector.
16. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount


control unit 16P connector terminal No. 7 and PCM
connector terminal A35, then go to step 26.
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2 1 . Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
22. Check for continuity between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
CMP (RED)

4
10

5 6 7
14 15

11 12

16

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page
4-77), then go to step 26.

4-68

ENGINE

23. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

31. Reconnect all connectors.

24. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

25. Check for continuity between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground,

33. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

Is DTC P15BE and/ or P15BF


CMP (RED)

Jt
3 4
10

11 12

14 15

16

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), and retest. If the PCM was substituted and
the s y m p t o m indicated goes away, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250)Ji
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between


engine m o u n t control unit 16P connector terminal No.
7 and PCM connector terminal A35, then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .
26. Reconnect all connectors.
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
28. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
29. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.
30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15BE and/ or P15BF

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine m o u n t control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

4-69

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P16C4: Engine Mount Actuator Control
Power Circuit Stuck OFF
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16C4

indicated?

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay.H
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Inspect the No. 12 A C M (10 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
N O - G o to step 6.
6. Remove the active control engine m o u n t (ACM)
control relay (A) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box.

7. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P


connector.

4-70

8. Check for continuity between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

1
10
I

5 6
11

1 2

//

8 9
7
14 15 16

IGSOL(YEL)

S4>
Wire side of female terminals

Is the continuity?
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal No.
10 and the active control engine mount (ACM) control
relay. Also replace the No. 12 A C M (10 A) fuse, then
go to step 20.
IMO-Repair short to ground in the wire between the
active control engine mount (ACM) control relay and
the No. 12 ACM (10 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 12
A C M (10 A) fuse and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 20.
9. Remove the active control engine m o u n t (ACM)
control relay (A) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box.

10. Check the active control engine mount (ACM) control


relay (see page 22-96).
Is the active control engine mount (ACM) control relay
OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the active control engine mount (ACM)
control relay, then go to step 20.
11. Measure the voltage between active control engine
mount (ACM) control relay 5P socket terminal No. 1
and body ground.
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T

ENGINE

12. Disconnect the engine m o u n t control unit 16P


connector.
13. Check for continuity between active control engine
mount (ACM) control relay 5P socket terminal No. 2
and engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal
No. 10.
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T

IG S O L (YEL)

5
Terminal side of
female terminals

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT


16P CONNECTOR

2
10

+ B

i
i
8 9
3 4 5 6 7
16
11 1 2 / 1 4 15

IG S O L (YEL)
Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
Terminal side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Go to step 12.


NO-Repair open in the wire between the active
control engine mount (ACM) control relay and the
No. 12 ACM (10 A) fuse, Also replace the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then go to step 20.

YES-Go to step 14.


NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 10 and the
active control engine mount (ACM) control relay, then
go to step 20.
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Measure the voltage between active control engine
mount (ACM) control relay 5P socket terminal No. 5
and body ground.
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Go to step 18.


NO-Go to step 16.

(cont'd)

4-71

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

20. Reconnect all connectors.

17. Inspect the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse in the


under-dash fuse/relay box.

2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is the fuse OK?

23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

YES-Repair open in the wire between the active


control engine mount (ACM) control relay and the No.
10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 20.
NO-Repair short to ground in the wire between the
active control engine m o u n t (ACM) control relay and
the No. 10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse. Also replace the No.
10 IG METER (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 20.
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
19. Check for continuity between engine mount control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 11 and active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay 5P socket terminal
No. 3.
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T

S O L R L Y (BRN)
Terminal side of
female terminals
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT
16P CONNECTOR

2
10

I
I
8 9
3 4 5 6 7
16
14 15
11 12

S O L R L Y (BRN)
Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the engine mount control unit (see page
4-77), then go to step 20.
NO-Repair open in the wire between engine m o u n t
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 11 and the
active control engine mount (ACM) control relay, then
go to step 20.

4-72

22. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

Is DTC P16C4

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

ENGINE

DTC P16C5: Engine Mount Actuator Control


Power Circuit Stuck ON

8. Measure the voltage between engine mount control


unit16P connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.

NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


10

2. Check the ACM UNIT SUPPLY VOLTAGE and ACM


RELAY CONTROL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

11 12

14 15

16

IGSOL (YEL)

Does the ACM UNIT SUPPLY VOLTAGE indicate battery


voltage when the ACM RELAY CONTROL indicate OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine m o u n t control unit and the active control
engine m o u n t (ACM) control r e l a y . !
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Remove the active control engine mount (ACM)
control relay (A) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box.

Wire side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Repair short to power in the wire between


engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal No.
10 and the active control engine mount (ACM) control
relay, then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Check for continuity between engine m o u n t control
unit 16P connector terminal No. 11 and body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

2
10

8 c)
3 4 5 6 7
16
11 12
14 15

S O L R L Y (BRN)

Wire side of female terminals

5. Check the active control engine mount (ACM) control


relay (see page 22-96).

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 6.

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between


engine m o u n t control unit 16P connector terminal No.
11 and the active control engine mount (ACM) control
relay, then go to step 11.

NO-Replace the active control engine mount (ACM)


control relay, then go to step 11.

NO-Replace the engine m o u n t control unit (see page


4-77), then go to step 11.

Is the active control engine mount (ACM) control relay


OK?

6. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P


connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

4-73

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
14. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P16C5

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the active control
engine m o u n t (ACM) control relay, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P16C6: Engine Mount Actuator High


Voltage During Function Test
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs

indicated?

YES-Go to indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .


NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit, the engine mount
actuator, and body ground (G202).B

4-74

DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)


DTC U0100: F-CAN Malfunction (Engine
Mount Control Unit-PCM)

ENGINE

8. Measure the resistance between engine mount


control unit 16P connector terminal No. 12* and
No. 14.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshots, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 4-48).
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
CANL line.

8 c)
5 6 7
11 1 2 ^ 1 415 16

3 4

10

CANL (RED)*

CANH (WHT)

1. Check the MIL on the gauge (see page 11 -3).


Is the MIL on?

Wire side of female terminals

Y E S - G o to the PGM-FI system's general


troubleshooting information (see page 1 1 - 3 ) .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

YES-Repair short in the wire between engine mount


control unit 16P connector terminal No. 12* and
No. 14, then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC U0029 and/ or U0100

Is there continuity?

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the PCM.B

9. Check for continuity between engine mount control


unit 16P connector terminal No. 14 (No. 12)* and body
ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconnect these connectors:
Engine mount control unit 16P.
Gauge control module 32P.
VSA modulator-control unit 36P.
Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
5P.

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

SRSunitA(39P).

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between


engine mount control unit 16P connector terminal
No. 14 (No. 12)* and body ground, then go to step 11.

VTM-4 control unit A (22P) (with VTM-4).

NO-Go to step 10.

TPMS control unit 20P.


PCM connector A (49P).

(cont'd)

4-75

Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System


DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals A48 (A49)* and engine mount control unit
16P connector terminals No. 14 (No. 12)* individually.

Symptom Troubleshooting
Harsh engine vibrations felt in the passenger's
compartment
1. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 seconds.
2. Check for PGM-FI system DTCs w i t h the HDS.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs are

3T4]

6 | 7
8 9 10
11
13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
37 38
29 30 31 3233 34

I K

40141 y \ / \ 44 \ / \ 46 j ^ j 48149
CANH (WHT)

CANL (RED)

Terminal side of female terminals

10

11 12

14 15

CANL (RED)

YES-Go to the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^


NO-Go to step 3.
3. Select the ACM in the PGM-FI system, and check for
ACM system's DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs are

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL


UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
[hn 8
1 2
3 4 5 6 7

indicated?

indicated?

YES-Go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .


9
16

NO-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

CANH (WHT)

5. Open the engine hood.


Wire side of female terminals

6. Select the ACM TEST in the A C M INSPECTION menu


with the HDS.
7. Do the Fr. ACM SOL OFF w i t h the HDS.

Is there continuity?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the PCM. If it is OK,
replace the engine mount control unit (see page 4-77),
then go to step 11.

Does the engine vibration change when you turn the Fr.
ACM SOL OFF?
YES-Turn the Fr. A C M SOL to O N , then go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 8.

NO-Repair open in the wire between engine mount


control unit 16P connector terminal No. 14 (No. 12)*
and the PCM connector terminal A48 (A49)*, then go
to step 11.

8. Exit the ACM TEST, and select the Fr. ACM SOL.V
ACTIVATION in the ACM INSPECTION menu with the
HDS.
9. Check the front engine mount w i t h your hand.

11. Reconnect all connectors.


12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Does the mount vibrate?

13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

YES-Check the mount for damage. If needed, replace


the front engine mount (see page 5-22). If the mount is
OK, go to step 1 and recheck.

14. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC U0029 and/ or U0100

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the engine mount control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
IMO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

4-76

NO-Replace the front engine mount (see page


5-22).

Engine Mount Control Unit


Replacement
10. Do the Rr. ACM SOL OFF with the HDS.
Does the engine vibration change when you turn the Rr.
ACM SOL OFF?

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


2. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (see
page 20-125), and the right kick panel (see page
20-79).

Y E S - T h e ACM system is OK at this time. Check for


other engine mount and other engine problems
caused vibration.

3. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P


connector (A).

NO-Go to step 11.

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)

11. Exit the ACM TEST, and select the Rr. ACM SOL.V
ACTIVATION in the A C M INSPECTION menu with the
HDS.
12. Check the rear engine mount with your hand.
Does the mount vibrate?
Y E S - C h e c k the mount for damage. If needed, replace
the rear engine mount (see page 5-24). If the mount is
OK, go to step 1 and recheck.

NO-Replace the rear engine m o u n t (see page 5 - 2 4 ) .

4. Remove the engine mount control unit (B).


5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

4-77

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine maintenance is required)


The Pilot SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof,
and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this
Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and tools, and
should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
frontal or side collision, ail SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and side curtain airbags.
Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor,
especially w h e n the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering c o l u m n , center console, dashboard, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the
roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly

5-1

Cylinder Head

6-1

Engine Block

7-1

Engine Lubrication

8-1

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

9-1

Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Special Tools
* Engine Removal
* Engine Installation
Engine Mount Replacement
Front Engine Mount Removal and Installation
Rear Engine Mount Removal and Installation

5-2
5-3
5-11
5-21
5-22
5-24

Engine Assembly
Special Tools
Ref.No.

Description
Subframe Alignment Pin

Tool Number
070AG-SJAA10S

5-2

Qty
1

Engine Removal
Special Tools Required
. 2008 V6 Attachment A r m SIL02C000033*
Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256
Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C000019
Front Subframe Adapter VSB02C000016

7. Disconnect the breather pipe (A), then remove the


intake air duct (B).

These special tools are available through the Honda


Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
There are SRS components located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-19), and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-21), in the SRS
before doing repair or service.
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damaging the w i r i n g and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere w i t h other parts.
1. Remove the hood support rod, then use it as shown to
prop the hood in the wide-open position.

8. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-372).


9. Remove the harness clamps (A), and the auxiliary
under-hood fuse/relay box (B), then remove the
battery base (C).

2. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-340).


3. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-28).

4. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).


5. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-95).
6. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21).

(cont'd)

5-3

Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect the
positive starter cable (B).

13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then


disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-348).

11. Disconnect the starter subharness connector.

14. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A), and


the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (B).

12. Remove the shift cable (see page 14-254). Do not bend
the shift cable excessively.

15. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-7).


16. Remove the steering joint cover (see step 8 on page
17-10).
17. Remove the steering joint f r o m the steering gearbox
pinion shaft (see step 11 on page 17-10).

5-4

18. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect the


positive alternator cable (B) f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box.

20. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect the


t w o PCM connectors (B) and the engine wire harness
connector (C).

23. Remove the P/S hose bracket (C) f r o m the rear


cylinder head cover.

(cont'd)

Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
24. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap.

33. Separate the tie-rod end bail joints f r o m the knuckles


(see step 3 on page 18-16).

25. Raise the vehicle on the lift.

34. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all


precision-finished surfaces w i t h new engine oil. Tie
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.

26. Remove the front wheels.


27. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-225).
28. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
29. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (see
page 14-209).

35.4WD model: Remove the transfer assembly (see page


14-213).
36. Disconnect the P/S hose (A) and the ATF cooler hoses
(B), then plug the lines and the hoses.

30. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).


3 1 . Remove the front subframe stiffener.

37. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch


connector.

32. Remove exhaust pipe A.

38. Lower the vehicle on the lift.


39. Remove the radiator (see page 10-13).

5-6

40. Disconnect the heater hoses (A).

42. Remove the harness clamp bracket (A) f r o m the rear


cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to 2008 V6
attach the attachment arm (SIL02C000033).

4 1 . Remove the connector bracket (A) f r o m the front


cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to attach the
engine hanger balance bar front arm.
43. Remove the cowl top side cover (A) f r o m both sides.
A

AAR-T1256

44. With the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) on its


side, insert the hanger beam (B) through the opening,
then rotate it over the damper (C).

(cont'd)

5-7

Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
45. Lift and support the engine w i t h the engine support
hanger (AAR-T1256) and the engine hanger balance
bar (VSB02C000019). Attach the front arm (A) to the
front cylinder head w i t h a spacers (B) and the bolt (10
x 1.25 m m ) (C). Attach the 2008 V6 attachment arm
(SIL02C000033) (D) to the rear cylinder head w i t h a
bolt (8 x 1.25 m m ) (E), then attach the rear arm (F) to
the 2008 V6 attachment a r m .

48. Raise the vehicle on the lift.


49. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (A),
then remove the A/C compressor (B) w i t h o u t
disconnecting the A/C hoses. Do not bend the A/C
hoses excessively.

50. Remove the lower transmission m o u n t bolts (A) and


the ground cable (B).
A _

46. Tighten the w i n g nut (G) by hand to lift and support


the engine/transmission.
47. Disconnect the front engine m o u n t actuator
connector (A) and the harness clamps (B). Remove
the front engine mount stop (C), then remove the front
engine m o u n t bolt (D).

5-8

51. Remove the rear engine mount bolts (A) and


disconnect the rear engine m o u n t actuator connector
(B).

54. Remove the six 12 x 1.25 m m bolts (A), (B) securing


the subframe stiffeners (C), the four subframe
mounting bolts (D), and the stiffeners, then lower the
front subframe (E).

52. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) to


the subframe by hanging the belt (A) over the front of
the subframe (B), then secure the belt with its stop (C).

55. Lower the vehicle on the lift.


56. Attach a chain hoist (A) to the engine hook (B) and the
transmission hook (C), then lift the engine/
transmission until it is securely supported by the
chain hoist, and remove the engine support hanger
and the engine hanger balance bar.

53. Raise the jack and line up the slots on the front
subframe adapter arms with the bolt holes on the jack
base, then securely attach t h e m with four bolts.
B

(cont'd)

5-9

Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
57. Remove the mounting bolts for the upper half of the
side engine mount bracket.

58. Check that the engine/transmission is completely free


of the vacuum hoses, the fuel hoses, the coolant
hoses, and electrical w i r i n g .
59. Slowly lower the engine/transmission about 150 m m
(6 in). Check once again that all the hoses and the
electrical w i r i n g are disconnected and free f r o m the
engine/transmission, then lower it all the w a y and
support it.
60. Disconnect the chain hoist f r o m the
engine/transmission.
61. Raise the vehicle, and remove the
engine/transmission f r o m under the vehicle.

5-10

Engine installation
S p e c i a l T o o l s Required

. 2008 V6 Attachment Arm SIL02C000033*


Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C000019*
Front Subframe Adapter VSB02C000016*
Subframe Alignment Pin 070AG-SJAA10S
O : These special tools are available through Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
There are SRS components located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-19), and precautions and
procedures (see page 24-21), in the SRS before doing repair or service.
1. Install the engine mount brackets and the accessory brackets, then tighten their bolts to the specified torque.

P / S PUMP BRACKET

8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

12 x 1.25 m m
88 N m
(9.0 k g f m , 65 Ibfft)

Replace.

8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)

Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)

Replace.
A / C COMPRESSOR
BRACKET

10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)

(cont'd)

5-11

Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
2. Position the engine/transmission under the vehicle.
Be sure that they are properly aligned. Carefully lower
the vehicle until the engine/transmission are properly
positioned in the engine compartment. Make sure the
vehicle is not resting on any part of the
engine/transmission. Support the
engine/transmission w i t h a chain hoist (A) and
carefully raise the engine/transmission into place.

3. Remove the cowl top side lid (A) f r o m both sides.


AAR-T1256

NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in


the sequence given in the following steps. Failure to
f o l l o w this sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce engine mount life.

4. With the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) on its


side, insert the hanger beam (B) through the opening,
then rotate it over the damper (C).

5-12

5, Lift and support the engine with the engine support


hanger (AAR-T1256) and the engine hanger balance
bar (VSB02C000019). Attach the front arm (A) to the
front cylinder head with several spacers (B) and the
bolt (10 x 1.25 m m ) (C). Attach the 2008 V6 attachment
arm (SIL02C000033) (D) to the rear cylinder head w i t h
a bolt (8 x 1.25 m m ) (E), then attach the rear arm (F) to
the 2008 V6 attachment arm.

9. Using the subframe adapter (VSB20C000016) and a


jack, raise the front subframe up t o the body.
10. Loosely tighten the left rear subframe mounting bolt
(A); insert the 15.7 m m side of the subframe
alignment pin (070AG-SJAA1 OS) through the
positioning hole (B) on the rear stiffened through the
positioning hole (C) on the subframe, and into the
positioning hole (D) on the body, then tighten the left
rear subframe mounting bolt.

117 N m (11.9 k g f m ,
86 Ibfft)
Replace.

76 Ibfft)
Replace.

11. Loosely tighten the right rear subframe mounting bolt


with the same procedure as the left rear using the
subframe alignment p i n .
6. Tighten the w i n g nut (G) by hand to lift and support
the engine/transmission.

12. Loosely tighten the right and left front subframe


mounting bolts (A) and stiffener mounting bolts (B).

7. Install the new m o u n t i n g bolts into the upper half of


the side engine m o u n t bracket. Tighten the bolts to
the specified torque.
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)

B
12x1.25 m m

A
14x1.5 mm
Replace.

8. Remove the chain h o i s t then raise the vehicle on the


lift.
(cont'd)

5-13

Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
13. Tighten the rear-driver's side subframe mounting bolt
(A) to the specified torque.

B
14x1.5 mm
103 N m
(10.5 k g f m , 76 Ibfft)
Replace.

A
(11.9 k g f m , 86 Ibfft)
1 4 x 1 . 5 mm Replace.
103 N m
(10.5 k g f m , 76 Ibfft)
Replace.

14. Tighten the rear-passenger's side subframe mounting


bolt (B) to the specified torque.
15. Tighten the front subframe mounting bolts (C) to the
specified torque.
NOTE: Check all of the front subframe mounting bolts,
and retighten if necessary.
16. Tighten the front and rear stiffener mounting bolts (D)
to the specified torque.
NOTE: Before tightening the stiffener mounting bolts,
check that the positioning holes and slot are aligned
using the subframe alignment pin.
17. Remove the jack and the subframe adapter.
18. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
19. Remove the engine support hanger, the engine
hanger balance bar, and the 2008 V6 attachment a r m ,
then install the cowl top side lids on both sides.
20. Raise the vehicle on the lift.

5-14

2 1 . Tighten the rear engine m o u n t bolts (A), and connect


the rear engine mount actuator connector (B).

42 N m
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)

22. Tighten the lower transmission mount bolts (A) and


the ground cable (B).

23. Install the A/C compressor (A), then connect the A/C
compressor clutch connector (B).

26. Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper half of the
side engine mount bracket, then retighten t h e m to the
specified torque.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)

24. Lower the vehicle on the lift.


25. Tighten the front engine mount bolt (A), then install
the front engine mount stop (B). Connect the front
engine m o u n t actuator connector (C) and the harness
clamps (D).

27. Install the radiator (see page 10-13).


28. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
29. Connect the power steering pressure switch
connector.

(cont'd)

5-15

Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
30. Install the power steering (P/S) hose (A) and the ATF
cooler hoses (B).

35. Install the front subframe stiffener using new bolts.

NOTE: Check the installation location of the ATF


cooler hose clamps (see page 14-245).

Replace.

36. Install the splash shield (see page 20-225).


37. Install the front wheels.
3 1 . 4WD model: Install the transfer assembly (see page
14-215).
32. Wipe the driveshaft clean. Install a new set ring on the
end of each driveshaft, then install the driveshafts
(see page 16-18). Make sure each ring clicks into place
in the differential and the intermediate shaft.

38. Lower the vehicle on the lift.


39. Install the connector bracket (A) to the front cylinder
head.

33. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints to the knuckles (see
step 3 on page 18-16).
34. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets (B) and new
self-locking nuts (C). Tighten the nuts to the specified
torque.

44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)

10 x 1.25 mm
54 N m (5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.

5-16

10 x 1.25 mm
33 N m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)
Replace.

40. Install the harness clamp bracket (A) to the rear


cylinder head.

42. Install the P/S p u m p outlet hose (A) using a new


O-ring (B), and install the P/S p u m p inlet hose (C).

22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
41. Connect the heater hoses (A).

43. Install the P/S hose bracket (D) to the rear cylinder
head cover.
44. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
45. Connect the powertrain control module (PCM)
connectors (A) and the engine wire harness connector
(B), then install the harness clamps (C).

(cont'd)

5-17

Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
46. Install the PCM cover (A).

5 1 . Connect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the


evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (B).

48. Install the steering joint to the steering gearbox pinion


shaft (see step 4 on page 17-12).

53. Install the shift cable (see page 14-254).

49. Install the steering joint cover (see step 6 on page


17-13).
50. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-9).

5-18

54. Connect the starter subharness connector.

56. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness
clamps (B) and the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay
box (C).

8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

55. Connect the positive starter cable (A), then install the
harness clamps (B).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9 N m (0.9 k g f m , 7.0 Ibfft)

57. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-372).


58. Install the intake air duct (A), then connect the
breather pipe (B).
NOTE: When tightening the screw of the hose band
(C), align the edge of the hose band (D) w i t h the mark
(E) painted on the hose band. If y o u tighten the screw
over the mark, replace the hose band.

59. Install the engine cover (see page 4-21).


60. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).
6 1 . Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).
(cont'd)

5-19

Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
62. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to
ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel p u m p
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel
leaks at any point in the fuel line.
63. Refill the engine w i t h recommended engine oil (see
page 8-10).
64. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF (see page 14-209).
65. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the
A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission
range switch.
66. Refill the reservoir w i t h power steering fluid (see page
17-28).
67. Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see step 11 on
page 10-7).
68. Do the power steering system bleeding procedure
(see step 6 on page 17-28).
69. Do the cooling system bleeding procedure (see step
13 on page 10-8).
70. Check for fluid leaks.
7 1 . Do the PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
72. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
73. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
74. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-325).
75. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20).
76. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).

5-20

Engine Mount Replacement


6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N m
(7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)
Replace.

12 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)

10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m ,
40 Ibfft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m ,
28 Ibfft)
Replace.

12x1.25 mm
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.

10 x 1.25 m m
42 N m
(4.3 k g f m , 31 Ibfft)

10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
Replace.

10 x 1.25 mm
38 N m
(3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibfft)
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.

FRONT ENGINE MOUNT

LOWER TRANSMISSION
MOUNT

5-21

Engine Assembly
Front Engine Mount Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the radiator (see page 10-13).
2. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block
under the engine/transmission.
3. Disconnect the front engine m o u n t actuator
connector (A).

4. Remove the front engine m o u n t stop (B), then remove


the front engine mount bolt (C).

5-22

5. Remove the front engine m o u n t (A).

Installation

3. Tighten the front engine m o u n t bolt (A), then install


the front engine m o u n t stop (B).

1. Install the front engine m o u n t (A).

2. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.

4. Connect the front engine m o u n t actuator connector


(C).
5. Install the radiator (see page 10-13).

5-23

Engine Assembly
Rear Engine Mount Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic
converter (rear WU-TWC) (see page 11-379).
2. Remove the heat shield.

5. Remove the rear engine mount stop (B), then remove


the rear engine mount bolt (C).

5-24

6. Remove the rear engine m o u n t (A).

Replace.

2. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.


3. Tighten the rear engine m o u n t bolt (A), then install the
rear engine m o u n t stop (B).

4. Connect the rear engine m o u n t actuator connector


(C).

5-25

Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Component Location Index
Engine Compression Inspection
Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arm Test
Valve Clearance Adjustment
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Timing Belt Inspection
Timing Belt Removal
Timing Belt Installation
Timing Belt Replacement
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
Cylinder Head Removal
Camshaft Replacement
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
Camshaft Inspection
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Valve Inspection
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection
Valve Guide Replacement
Valve Seat Reconditioning
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal,
and Pulley Installation
Cylinder Head Installation
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car
Sealing Bolt Installation
Front Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Replacement
Rear Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Replacement

6-2
6-3
6-7
6-8
6-10
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-18
6-22
6-27
6-28
6-28
6-30
6-34
6-37
6-39
6-39
6-41
6-43
6-44
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-49
6-51
6-53
6-54
6-57
6-61
6-61
6-62
6-62

Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref.No.

Tool Number
070AJ-001A101
07742-0010100
07757-PJ1010A
07AAJ-PNAA101
07AAJ-R70A200
07GAF-SD40330
07HAH-PJ7A100
07JAA-001020A
07JAB-001020B
07MAB-PY3010A
07PAD-0010000

Description
VCM Air Adapter
Valve Guide Driver, 5.35 x 9.7 m m
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment
Air Pressure Regulator
VTEC Air Stop Tool B
Ball Joint Remover/Installer
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m
Socket, 19 m m
Handle, 6-25-660L
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset
Stem Seal Driver

Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Component Location Index

RUBBER S E A L S

FRONT UPPER COVER


SIDE ENGINE MOUNT
BRACKET

REAR UPPER COVER

PULLEY BOLT
Replacement page 6-14

CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Removal, page 6-14
Installation, page 6-14

REAR CAMSHAFT
PULLEY

TIMING BELT A D J U S T E R
Replacement page 6-27
TIMING BELT
DRIVE PULLEY
Replacement page 6-28
AUTO-TENSIONER

IDLER PULLEY BOLT

TIMING BELT
Inspection, page 6-15
Removal, page 6-16
Installation, page 6-18
Replacement page 6-22

FRONT CAMSHAFT
PULLEY

TIMING BELT STOPPER

TIMING BELT
GUIDE PLATE
Installation, step 10 on page 6-20

(cont'd)

6-3

Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)

HEAD COVER G A S K E T
REAR CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Removal, page 6-29
Installation, page 6-32

CYLINDER HEAD B O L T S

FRONT CYLINDER
HEAD COVER
Removal, page 6-28
Installation, page 6-30

COOLANT
SEPARATOR
HEAD COVER
GASKET
DOWEL PINS

FRONT CYLINDER HEAD


Removal, page 6-34
Inspection, page 6-39
Installation, page 6-57

O-RING
CYLINDER HEAD G A S K E T

OIL CONTROL
ORIFICE

COOLANT SEPARATOR
DOWEL PINS

FRONT

VALVE COTTERS

INTAKE V A L V E SPRING

SPRING RETAINER

ROCKER ARM A S S E M B L Y
Variable Cylinder Management
Rocker A r m T e s t , page 6-8
Rocker A r m Assembly Removal, page 6-39
Rocker A r m and Shaft Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 6-41
Rocker A r m and Shaft Inspection, page 6-43
O-RING

CAMSHAFT
T H R U S T COVER
V A L V E SPRING S E A T

INJECTOR B A S E
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING

EXHAUST VALVE SEAL


Removal, page 6-47
Installation, page 6-53

E X H A U S T V A L V E GUIDE
Replacement, page 6-49

GASKET
Replace.

CAMSHAFT
Replacement, page 6-37
Inspection, page 6-44

SEALING BOLT
Installation, page 6-61
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-34
Inspection, page 6-39
Installation, page 6-57

CAMSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation, page 6-54
Installation - In Car, page 6-61

EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-47
Inspection, page 6-48
Installation, page 6-53

INTAKE V A L V E
Removal, page 6-47
Inspection, page 6-48
Installation, page 6-53

(cont'd)

6-5

Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
REAR

ROCKER ARM A S S E M B L Y
Variable Cylinder Management
Rocker Arm T e s t , page 6-8
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal, page 6-40
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 6-42
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection, page 6-43

EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING

EXHAUST VALVE.
XgS
SEAL
\ ^
Removal, page 6-47
Installation, page 6-53

VALVE COTTERS

SPRING RETAINER

^ri|P

INTAKE V A L V E SPRING

E X H A U S T V A L V E GUIDE
Replacement, page 6-49

CAMSHAFT
Replacement, page 6-37
Inspection, page 6-44
V A L V E SPRING S E A T
CYLINDER HEAD ^
Removal, page 6-34
Inspection, page 6-39
Installation, page 6-57
CAMSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation, page 6-55
Installation - In Car, page 6-61

WASHER

SEALING B O L T S
installation, page 6-61

INTAKE V A L V E
Removal, page 6-47
Inspection, page 6-48
Installation, page 6-53

6-6

INJECTOR B A S E

EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-47
Inspection, page 6-48
Installation, page 6-53

Engine Compression Inspection


NOTE: After the inspection, you must reset the
powertrain control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM
will continue to stop the fuel injectors f r o m operating.
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating temperature
(cooling fan comes on).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) .

13. If the compression is not within specifications, check


the following items, then remeasure the
compression.
Incorrect valve clearance
Confirmation of cam t i m i n g
Damaged or w o r n cam lobes
Damaged or w o r n valves and seats

3. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the


data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).

Damaged cylinder head gaskets

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Damaged or w o r n piston and cylinder bore

5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle


and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-226).
6. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI
INSPECTION menu w i t h the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).

Damaged or w o r n piston rings

14. Remove the compression gauge f r o m the spark plug


hole.
15. Install the six spark plugs.
16. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
17. Select PCM reset (see page 11-3) in the PGM-FI
INSPECTION menu to cancel ALL INJECTORS STOP
with the HDS.

9. Remove the six spark plugs.


10. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole.

11. Step on the accelerator pedal to open the throttle


fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor, and
measure the compression.
Compression Pressure:
2

930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm ,135 psi)


12. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders.
Maximum Variation:
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,28 psi)
2

6-7

Cylinder Head
Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required
VCM Air Adapter 070AJ-001A101
. VTEC Air Stop Tool B 07AAJ-R70A200
Air Pressure Regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101
1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn
the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Remove the six spark plugs.
3. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-28).
4. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Make sure that
the intake primary rocker arm (A) and the intake
secondary rocker arm (B) are mechanically connected
by the pistons and that the intake primary rocker arm
and the intake secondary rocker arm should move
together.

5. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Make sure that


the exhaust primary rocker arm (A) and the exhaust
secondary rocker arm (B) are mechanically connected
by the pistons and that the exhaust primary rocker
arm and the exhaust secondary rocker arm should
move together.
If the exhaust primary rocker arm moves
independently, remove the exhaust primary rocker
arm and the exhaust secondary rocker arm as an
assembly, and check that the pistons in the rocker
arms move smoothly. If any exhaust rocker arm
needs replacing, replace the primary and the
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then retest.
If the exhaust primary rocker arm and the exhaust
secondary rocker arm move together, go to step 6.

If the intake secondary rocker arm moves


independently, remove the intake primary rocker
arm and the intake secondary rocker arm as an
assembly, and check that the pistons in the rocker
arms move smoothly. If any intake rocker arm
needs replacing, replace the primary and the
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then retest.
If the intake primary rocker arm and the intake
secondary rocker arm move together, go to step 5.

6. If necessary steps 4 and 5 for No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and


No. 4 cylinders. When the rocker arms pass the test,
go to step 7.
7. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 689 kPa (7.0 kgf/cm
, 100 psi).
8. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-10).

6-8

9. Remove the sealing b o l t then install the VCM air


adapter (A) to the inspection hole and install the VTEC
air stop tool B (B), then connect the air pressure
regulator (C) as s h o w n .

11. With the specified air pressure applied, rotate the


crankshaft pulley clockwise. The intake secondary
rocker arm (A) should move independently of the
intake primary rocker arm (B).
If the intake secondary rocker arm does not move
independently, remove the intake primary rocker
arm and the intake secondary rocker arm as an
assembly, and check that the pistons in the rocker
arms move smoothly. If any intake rocker arm
needs replacing, replace the primary and the
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then retest.

FRONT

If the intake secondary rocker arm moves


independently, go to step 12.

10. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the


specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
5 5 0 - 6 9 0 kPa ( 5 . 6 - 7 . 0 k g f / c m , 8 0 - 1 0 0 psi)
2

(cont'd)

6-9

Cylinder Head
Variable Cylinder Management
Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)
12. With the specified air pressure applied, rotate the
crankshaft pulley clockwise. The exhaust primary
rocker arm (A) should move independently of the
exhaust secondary rocker arm (B).
If the exhaust primary rocker arm does not move
independently, remove the exhaust primary rocker
arm and the exhaust secondary rocker arm as an
assembly, and check that the pistons in the rocker
arms move smoothly. If any exhaust rocker arm
needs replacing, replace the primary and the
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then retest.
If the exhaust primary rocker arm moves
independently, go to step 13.

13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No.
4 cylinders. When the rocker arms pass the test, go to
step 14.
14. Remove the air pressure regulator, the VCM air
adapter, and the VTEC air stop tool B.
15. Tighten the sealing bolt to 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft).
16. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-30).
17. Install the six spark plugs.

6-10

Valve Clearance Adjustment


NOTE: Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to
the data link connector (DLC), and monitor the engine
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1. Adjust the valve
clearance only w h e n the engine coolant temperature is
less than 100 F (38 C).
1. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-28).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align
the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 1
piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

3. Select the correct feeler gauge for the valve clearance


you are going to check.
Valve Clearance
Intake:
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 mm (0.008-0.009 in)
Exhaust: 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 mm (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in)

4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting


screw and the end of the valve stem on the No. 1
cylinder and slide it back and f o r t h ; you should feel a
slight amount of drag.
INTAKE

REAR
EXHAUST
No. 1

No. 2

No. 1

No. 2

No. 3

No. 3

INTAKE

FRONT
INTAKE

No. 4

No. 5

No. 4

No. 5

No. 6

No. 6

EXHAUST

(cont'd)

6-11

Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
5. If you feel too much or t o o little drag, loosen the
locknut, and turn the adjusting screw until the drag on
the feeler gauge is correct.

7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A)


on the front upper cover w i t h the No. 4 piston TDC
mark (B) o n the front camshaft pulley.

INTAKE

8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance o n


No. 4 cylinder.
9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A)
on the front upper cover w i t h the No. 2 piston TDC
mark (B) o n the front camshaft pulley.

6. While holding the adjusting screw w i t h the screw


driver, tighten the locknut, then recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
Specified Torque
No. 1, No. 2,No. 3 , and No. 4 cylinders:
20 N m (2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
No. 5 and No. 6 cylinders:
14 N m (1.4 k g f m , 10 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.

6-12

10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance o n


the No. 2 cylinder.

11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A)


on the front upper cover w i t h the No. 5 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A)


on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on


No. 5 cylinder.

16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on


the No. 6 cylinder.

13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer (A)


on the front upper cover w i t h the No. 3 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

17. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-30).

14. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on


No. 3 cylinder.

6-13

Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required
. Handle, 6-25-660L 07JAB-001020B
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A
Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A or equivalent

Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
2. Remove the right front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-225).
4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
5. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and the
holder attachment (B).

A
07JAB-001020B

07JAA-001020A
(or commercially available)

6. Remove the bolt w i t h a heavy duty 19 m m socket (C)


and a breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley.

6-14

Installation
1. Remove any oil and clean the pulleys (A), the
crankshaft (B), the bolt (C), and the washer (D).
Lubricate w i t h new engine oil as s h o w n .
X: Remove any oil
O: Clean
# : Lubricate with new engine oil

Timing Belt Inspection


2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt. Do
not use an impact wrench.

1. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).


2. Remove the front upper cover.

-1. Hold the pulley w i t h the holder handle (A) and the
holder attachment (B). Tighten the bolt to 64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m , 47 Ibfft) w i t h a torque wrench and a
19 m m socket (C).
-2. Mark the bolt head (D) and the crankshaft pulley (E)
as s h o w n , then tighten the bolt an additional 60
(The mark on the bolt head lines up with the mark
on the crankshaft pulley).
0

A
07JAB-001020B

07JAA-001020A
(or commercially available)

3. Inspect the t i m i n g belt for cracks and oil or coolant


contamination. Replace the belt if it is cracked, or is
contaminated w i t h oil or coolant. Wipe off any oil or
solvent that gets on the belt.
NOTE: If there is any leakage, repair t h e m before
replacing the belt.

3. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).


4. Install the splash shield (see page 20-225).
5. Install the right front wheel.

6-15

Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal
1. Turn the crankshaft so the white mark (A) lines up
with the pointer (B).
NOTE: The other pointer (C) is not used.

3. Raise the vehicle on the lift, then remove the right


front wheel.
4. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-225).
5. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
6. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block
under the oil pan.
7. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the upper
half of the side engine m o u n t bracket (B).

2. Check that the No. 1 piston top dead center (TDC)


mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the pointer
(B) on the front upper cover are aligned.
NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
pulley mark.

8. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-14).


9. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (B).

6-16

10. Remove the lower cover.

12. Thread the battery clamp bolt as s h o w n to hold the


timing belt adjuster in its current position. Tighten it
by hand, do not use a wrench.

11. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts f r o m the


battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
13. Remove the t i m i n g belt guide plate (A).

(cont'd)

6-17

Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
14. Remove the lower half of the side engine m o u n t
bracket.

Timing Belt Installation


NOTE: The following procedure is for installing a used
t i m i n g belt. If you are installing a new belt, refer to the
t i m i n g belt replacement procedure (see page 6-22).
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, the t i m i n g belt guide
plate, and the upper and lower covers.
2. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to top dead center
(TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the
timing belt drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil
pump.

15. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and the idler pulley
(B), then remove the t i m i n g belt. Discard the idler
pulley bolt.

6-18

3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC


marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers
(B) on the back covers.
FRONT

6. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counterclockwise sequence


starting w i t h the drive pulley. Take care not to
damage the t i m i n g belt during installation.
-1.
-2.
-3.
-4.
-5.
-6.

Drive pulley (A)


Idler pulley (B)
Front camshaft pulley (C)
Water p u m p pulley (D)
Rear camshaft pulley (E)
Adjusting pulley (F)
D

7. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.

4. Loosely install the idler pulley w i t h a new idler pulley


bolt so the pulley can move but does not come off.
5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the t i m i n g belt
cannot be installed, do the t i m i n g belt replacement
procedure (see page 6-22).

(cont'd)

6-19

Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
8. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.

10. Install the t i m i n g belt guide plate as s how n .

9. Install the lower half of the side engine mount bracket.

11. Install the lower cover.

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
Replace.

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

6-20

12. Install the front upper cover (A) and the rear upper
cover (B).

16. Check the camshaft pulley marks.


NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
pulley mark.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step
17.
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove
the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16) and repeat steps 2
through 16.
FRONT

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

13. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-14).


14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about six turns clockwise
so the t i m i n g belt positions itself on the pulleys.
15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines
up w i t h the pointer (B).
NOTE: The other pointer (C) is not used.
REAR

(cont'd)

6-21

Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
17. Install the upper half of the side engine mount bracket
(A), and tighten the new mounting bolts (B), then
tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (C).

Timing Belt Replacement


NOTE: The following procedure is for the installation of a
new timing belt. If you are installing a used belt, refer to
the timing belt installation procedure (see page 6-18).
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-16).
2. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, t i m i n g belt guide plate,
and the upper and lower covers.
3. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to top dead center
(TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the
timing belt drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil
pump.

(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)

18. Install the ground cable (D).


19. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
20. Install the splash shield (see page 20-225).
2 1 . Install the right front wheel.
22. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).

6-22

4. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC


marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers
(B) on the back covers.

5. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.


6. Remove the auto-tensioner.

FRONT

7. Align the holes on the rod and the housing of the


auto-tensioner.

8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the


auto-tensioner. Insert a 2.0 m m (0.08 in) pin through
the housing and the rod.
NOTE: The compression pressure should not exceed
9,800 N (1,000 kgf, 2,200 Ibf).

(cont'd)

6-23

Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the auto-tensioner.
NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place.

12. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counterclockwise sequence


starting with the drive pulley.
-1.
-2.
-3.
-4.
-5.
-6.

Drive pulley (A)


Idler pulley (B)
Front camshaft pulley (C)
Water p u m p pulley (D)
Rear camshaft pulley (E)
Adjusting pulley (F)
D

10. Thread in the battery clamp bolt as shown to hold the


timing belt adjuster. Tighten it by hand; do not use a
wrench.

13. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.

11. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler pulley
bolt so the pulley can move but does not come off.

6-24

14. Remove the pin f r o m the auto-tensioner.

17. Install the t i m i n g belt guide plate as s h o w n .

15. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.

18. Install the lower cover.

16. Install the lower half of the side engine mount bracket.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

(cont'd)

6-25

Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
19. Install the front upper cover (A) and the rear upper
cover (B).

23. Check the camshaft pulley marks.


NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
pulley mark.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step
24.
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove
the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16) and repeat steps 3
through 22.
FRONT

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

20. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-14).


2 1 . Rotate the crankshaft pulley about six turns clockwise
so the t i m i n g belt positions itself on the pulleys.
22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines
up w i t h the pointer (B).
NOTE: The other pointer (C) is not used.
REAR

6-26

Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement


24. Install the upper half of the side engine mount bracket
(A), and tighten the new mounting bolts (B), then
tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (C).

1. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).


2. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.
3. Remove the auto-tensioner (see step 6 on page 6-23).
4. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the t i m i n g belt
adjuster (B) and the collar (C).

(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

25. Install the ground cable (D).


26. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
27. Install the splash shield (see page 20-225).

5. Install the t i m i n g belt adjuster in the reverse order of


removal.
6. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-18).

28. Install the right front wheel.


29. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).

6-27

Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Drive Pulley
Replacement

Cylinder Head Cover Removal

1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-16).

Front

2. Remove the timing belt stopper (A), then remove the


t i m i n g belt drive pulley (B) and the key (C).

1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).


2. Remove the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) f r o m
the front cylinder head.
3. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor 1 connector (A), the exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve connector (B), the front secondary heated
oxygen (sensor 2) (secondary H02S) connector (C),
the front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector (D),
the rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 2)
connector (E), the front rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (F) the harness clamp (G) securing the
harness holder, and remove the dipstick (H).

3. Inspect the t i m i n g belt drive pulley and the key for


damage. If it is cracked or damaged, replace the
t i m i n g belt drive pulley and the key.
4. Install the new timing belt drive pulley and the key,
then install the timing belt stopper.
5. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-18).
6. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).

6-28

Rear
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
2. Remove the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) f r o m
the rear cylinder head.
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
4. Remove the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S
hose bracket (see step 6 on page 6-34) w i t h its hoses
connected.

9. Disconnect the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch


connector (A), the rocker arm oil control solenoid B
(BANK 1) connector (B), the rocker arm oil control
solenoid A (BANK 1) connector (C), the rear air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1 connector (D), the rear secondary
heated oxygen sensor 2 (secondary H02S) connector
(E), and the harness clamps (F), then remove the
harness holder (G).

5. Remove the harness holder mounting bolts (A) and


the engine ground cable bolt (B).

10. Remove the rear cylinder head cover.

E ~

B/

6. Disconnect the three injector connectors (C) and the


t w o harness clips (D).
7. Remove the engine ground cable (E) and disconnect
the breather hose (F).
8. Remove the harness (G) f r o m the upper cover.

6-29

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
Front
1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal is
damaged, replace it.
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove.
3. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the
cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head cover
gasket is seated securely.
A

4. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the rocker


shaft holder and the cylinder head.
5. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces w i t h a shop
towel.

6-30

6. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,


08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker shaft
holder mating surface (A). Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.

7. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes,
and install the front cylinder head cover (B).
NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the cylinder head cover.

11. Connect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)


sensor 1 connector (A), the exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve connector (B), the front secondary heated
oxygen (sensor 2) (secondary H02S) connector (C),
the front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector (D),
the rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 2)
connector (E), the front rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (F) and the harness clamp (G) securing the
harness holder, and install the dipstick (H).

12. Install the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) to the
front cylinder head.
8. Inspect the spark plug seals for damage.
13. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
9. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
10. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step
torque all bolts, in sequence, 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9
Ibfft).

(cont'd)

6-31

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation (cont'd)
Rear
1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal is
damaged, replace it.
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove.
3. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the
cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head cover
gasket is seated securely.

4. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the rocker


shaft holder and the cylinder head.
5. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces w i t h a shop
towel.

6-32

6. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,


08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker shaft
holder mating surface (A). Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.

7. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes,
and install the rear cylinder head cover (B).
NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
w i t h oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the cylinder head cover.

11. Connect the rear rocker arm oil pressure switch


connector (A), the rocker arm oil control solenoid B
(BANK1) connector (B), the rocker arm oil control
solenoid A (BANK 1) connector (C), the rear air fuel
ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector (D), the rear secondary
heated oxygen (sensor 2) (secondary H02S)
connector (E), and the harness clamps (F), then install
the harness holder (G).
A

8. Inspect the spark plug seals for damage.


9. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
10. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step
tighten all bolts, in sequence, 12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9
Ibfft).

(cont'd)

6-33

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
(cont'd)
12. Tighten the harness holder mounting bolt (A).

Cylinder Head Removal


NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.

-C

To avoid damaging the w i r i n g and terminals, unplug


the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.

A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.9 Ibfft)

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.9 Ibfft)

13. Install the engine ground cable (B) and connect the
breather hose (C), then install the harness (D) to the
upper cover.
14. Reconnect the three injector connectors (E) and the
t w o harness clips (F).
15. Install the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S
hose bracket (see step 26 on page 6-60).

Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the


data link connector (DLC), and monitor the engine
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1. To avoid
damaging the cylinder head, wait until the engine
coolant temperature drops below 100 F (38 C) before
loosening the cylinder head bolts.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-340).
2. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page
20-210).
3. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-95).
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
5. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
6. Remove the power steering (P/S) p u m p (A) and the
bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket (C).

16. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).


17. Install the three ignition coils (see page 4-21) to the
rear cylinder head.
18. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-2).

7. Remove the alternator (see page 4-33).


8. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).
9. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
10. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).

6-34

11. Disconnect the following engine wire harness


connectors and wire harness clamps f r o m the
cylinder head:

14. Remove the connector bracket (A) from the front


cylinder head.

Six injector connectors


Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
Front rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Rear rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector
Front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector
Rear air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1 (connector
Front secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2 )
(secondary H02S) connector
Rear secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2 )
(secondary H02S) connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 1)
connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 2)
connector

15. Remove the harness clamp bracket (A) f r o m the rear


cylinder head.

Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (BANK 1)


connector
Knock sensor connector
12. Remove the front w a r m up three w a y catalytic
converter (front WU-TWC) (see page 11-379) and the
rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic converter (rear
WU-TWC) (see page 11-380).
13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then
disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-348).

16. Remove the injector bases (see page 9-6).


17. Remove the water passage (see page 10-11).

(cont'd)

6-35

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
18. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and the back covers
(B).
FRONT

20. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage,


loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat
the sequence until all the bolts are loosened.
FRONT

REAR

19. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-28).

2 1 . Remove the cylinder head.

6-36

Camshaft Replacement
Front

11. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the


camshaft (B).

1. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page


20-210).
2. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-95).
3. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page 5-3).
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
5. Disconnect the radiator hoses (A).

8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibfft)

12. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.


Always use a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil to
the journals and cam lobes.
13. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft
pulley mounting bolt, then install the front camshaft
pulley (see step 13 on page 6-55).

6. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve


(see page 11-394).
7. Remove the EGR valve stud bolts (A).

14. Install the rocker arm assembly (see step 11 on page


6-54), then tighten the mounting bolts.
15. Install the timing belt (see page 6-18).
16. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-10).
17. Install the EGR valve stud bolts.

A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

18. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-394).


19. Connect the radiator hoses.
20. Install the battery base (see step 56 on page 5-19).
21. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).
22. Install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).
23. Fill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see page 10-6)
and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the
heater valve open.
24. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern lean procedure (see page 11-5).

8. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).


9. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-39).
10. Remove the front camshaft pulley (see page 6-36).

(cont'd)

6-37

Cylinder Head
Camshaft Replacement (cont'd)
Rear

10. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the rear
camshaft (B).

1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-340).


2. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
3. Remove the intake air duct (see step 7 on page 5-3).
4. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-372).
5. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then
disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-348).

11. Install the rear camshaft in the reverse order of


removal. Always use a new O-ring (C). Apply new
engine oil to the journals and the cam lobes.
12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft
pulley mounting bolt, then install the rear camshaft
pulley (see step 13 on page 6-56).
13. Install the rocker arm assembly (see step 11 on page
6-54), then tighten the mounting bolts.
14. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-18).
15. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-10).
16. Install the heater hoses and the purge joint bracket.
17. Connect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-350), then
install the quick-connect fitting cover.
18. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-372).
19. Install the intake air duct (see step 58 on page 5-19).
20. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel p u m p runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel
leakage at any point in the fuel line.
2 1 . Fill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see page 10-6),
and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the
heater valve open.
7. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).
8. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-40).
9. Remove the rear camshaft pulley (see page 6-36).

6-38

22. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure


(see page 11-5).

Cylinder Head Inspection for


Warpage

Rocker Arm Assembly Removal

1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-34).

Front

2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-44).

1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-28).

3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure along


the edges, and three ways across the center.

2. Loosen the locknuts and adjusting screws (A).


A

If warpage is less than 0.05 m m (0.002 in), cylinder


head resurfacing is not required.
If warpage is between 0.05 m m (0.002 in) and 0.2
m m (0.008 in), resurface the cylinder head.
M a x i m u m resurface limit is 0.2 m m (0.008 in) based
on a height of 121 m m (4.76 in).
Cylinder Head Height
Standard (New):
120.95-121.05 m m
( 4 . 7 6 2 - 4 . 7 6 6 in)

3. Remove the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts, the


rocker shaft holder mounting bolts, and the rocker
arm assembly.
- 1 . Loosen the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts in sequence
t w o turns at a t i m e , to prevent damaging the valves
or the rocker arm assembly.
-2. When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not
remove the rocker shaft bridge m o u n t i n g bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts. The bolts
will keep the rocker arms on the shafts.

(cont'd)

6-39

Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal (cont'd)
Rear
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-29).
2. Loosen the locknuts and the adjusting screws (A).
A

3. Remove the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts, the


rocker shaft holder mounting bolts, and the rocker
arm assembly.
- 1 . Loosen the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts in sequence
t w o turns at a time, to prevent damaging the valves
or the rocker arm assembly.
-2. W h e n removing the rocker arm assembly, do not
remove the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts and
the rocker shaft holder mounting bolts. The bolts
will keep the rocker arms on the shafts.

6-40

Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly


Front
NOTE:
Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-43).
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the
rocker arms, the rocker shaft bridge, and the rocker shaft holder on the shaft.
If the rocker shaft cannot be removed or installed by hand, remove or install the rocker shaft by heating the rocker
shaft bridge.
Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set, and remove the bands after the rocker arms
have been installed.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply new engine oil to all contact points and
bearing surfaces.
When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware f r o m the new rocker arm assembly.
Never remove any of the circlips that retain the lost motion assemblies in the rocker shaft bridge. The circlips are not
available separately, and are factory installed in the rocker shaft bridge. To remove the lost motion assemblies, first
remove the rocker shafts and the rocker arms.

(cont'd)

6-41

Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
Rear
NOTE:
Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-43).
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the
rocker arms, the rocker shaft bridge, and the rocker shaft holder on the shaft.
If the rocker shaft cannot be removed or installed by hand, remove or install the rocker shaft by heating the rocker
shaft bridge.
Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set, and remove the bands after the rocker arms
have been installed.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply new engine oil to all contact points and
bearing surfaces.
When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware f r o m the new rocker arm assembly.
Never remove any of the circlips that retain the lost motion assemblies in the rocker shaft bridge. The circlips are not
available separately, and are factory installed in the rocker shaft bridge. To remove the lost motion assemblies, first
remove the rocker shafts and the rocker arms.

6-42

Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection


1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-39).
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-41).
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.

5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and


check it for an out-of-round condition.
IMo.1, IMo.2, No.3, and No.4 CYLINDERS
Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.0150.046 mm
(0.0006-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.046 mm (0.0018 in)
No.5, and No.6 CYLINDERS
Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.0180.056 mm
(0.0007-0.0022 in)
Service Limit:
0.056 mm (0.0022 in)
No.1, No.2, No.3 and No.4 CYLINDERS
Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New):
0.0150.046 mm
(0.0006-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.046 mm (0.0018 in)

4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.

No.5 and No.6 CYLINDERS


Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New):
0.018-0.047 mm
(0.0007-0.0019 in)
Service Limit:
0.047 mm (0.0019 in)

Inspect rocker arm


face for wear.

6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance


is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft and all
over-tolerance rocker arms. If any variable cylinder
management rocker arm needs replacement, replace
all rocker arms in that set (primary and secondary).

(cont'd)

6-43

Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
(cont'd)

Camshaft Inspection

Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arms

1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-34).

7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Slide t h e m into the


rocker arms. If they do not move smoothly, replace
the rocker a r m set.

2. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-39).

NOTE:
Apply new engine oil t o the rocker arm pistons
w h e n reassembling.

3. Front: Put the rocker shaft bridge and the rocker shaft
holder on the front cylinder head, then tighten the
bolts to the specified torque.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

When removing the rocker arm pistons f r o m the


intake primary rocker a r m (B) and the exhaust
primary rocker arms (C), carefully apply air
pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm.
INTAKE

4. Rear: Put the rocker shaft bridge and the rocker shaft
holder on the rear cylinder head, then tighten the
bolts to the specified torque.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

EXHAUST

5. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the


cylinder head.

8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-41).


9. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-54).

6-44

6. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the


camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and read
the end play. If the end play is beyond the service
limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck. If it is still
beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft.

9. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.

Camshaft End Play


Standard (New):
0.050.20 mm
(0.002-0.008 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)

10. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.

7. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out


the camshaft (B).

8. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift ramps.


Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored,
or excessively w o r n .

(cont'd)

6-45

Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
11. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces In the cylinder
head. Measure the inside diameter of each camshaft
bearing surface, and check for an out-of-round
condition.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within the
service limit, go t o step 13.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 12.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance
Standard (New):
0.0500.089 mm
(0.0020-0.0035 in)
Service Limit:
0.15 mm (0.006 in)

6-46

12. Check the total runout w i t h the camshaft supported


on V-blocks.
If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil clearance.
If the oil clearance is still out of tolerance, replace
the cylinder head.
Camshaft Total Runout
Standard (New):
0.03 mm (0.001 in) max.
Service Limit:
0.04 mm (0.002 in)

Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal


Removal
13. Measure the cam lobe height.

Special Tools Required

NOTE:

Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ1010A

When measuring the No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4


cylinders intake cam lobe height of the camshaft,
measure the secondary cam lobes.

Identify the valves and the valve springs as they are


removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.

When measuring the No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4


cylinders exhaust cam lobe height of the camshaft,
measure the primary cam lobes.

1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-34).

Cam Lobe Height Standard (New)


No.1, No.2, No.3, and No.4 CYLINDERS:
Intake:
35.162 mm (1.3843 in)
Exhaust:
36.537 mm (1.4385 in)

2. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-39).


3. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and a plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the spring retainer to loosen the
valve cotters.

No.5, and No.6 CYLINDERS:


Intake:
35.155 mm (1.3841 in)
Exhaust:
36.512 mm (1.4375 in)
No. 1, No. 2, and No.3 CYLINDERS
EXHAUST
PRIMARY

T/B

INTAKE
SECONDARY

EXHAUST
PRIMARY

4"

EXHAUSTSECONDARY /
EXHAUSTSECONDARY
{for C Y L I N D E R
/
(for C Y L I N D E R
P A U S E ; Z E R O LIFT)
/
P A U S E ; Z E R O LIFT)
INTAKE P R I M A R Y
(for C Y U N D E R
P A U S E ; Z E R O LIFT)

No. 4 CYLINDER
EXHAUST
PRIMARY

T/B

INTAKE
SECONDARY

EXHAUST
PRIMARY

4. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and


the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring
and remove the valve cotters.
07757-PJ1010A

4"

EXHAUST SECONDARY /
EXHAUST SECONDARY
(for C Y L I N D E R
/
(for C Y L I N D E R
P A U S E ; Z E R O LIFT)
/
P A U S E ; Z E R O LIFT)
INTAKE P R I M A R Y
(for C Y U N D E R
P A U S E ; Z E R O LIFT)

No. 5 and No. 6 CYLINDERS


INTAKE

5. Remove the valve spring compressor and the valve


spring compressor attachment, then remove the
spring retainer, the valve spring, and the valve.

EXHAUST

EXHAUST

(cont'd)

6-47

Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal
Removal (cont'd)

Valve Inspection

6. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).

1. Remove the valves (see page 6-47).


2. Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 35.90-36.10 mm
(1.413-1.421 in)
B Standard (New): 116.55-117.15 mm
(4.589-4.612 in)
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in)
C Service Limit:
5.455 mm (0.2148 in)
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 29.90-30.10 mm
(1.177-1.185 in)
B Standard (New): 113.90-114.50 mm
(4.484-4.508 in)
C Standard (New): 5.450-5.460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in)
C Service Limit:
5.420 mm (0.2134 in)

7. Remove the valve seal.

8. Remove the valve spring seat.

6-48

Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance


Inspection

Valve Guide Replacement

1. Remove the valves (see page 6-47).

Special Tools Required


Valve Guide Driver, 5.35 x 9.7 m m 07742-0010100
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m 07HAH-PJ7A100

2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a


micrometer, f r o m the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured w i t h an inside micrometer or a ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0200.045 m m
(0.0008-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.08 m m (0.003 in)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide
Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0550.080 m m
(0.0022-0.0031 in)
Service Limit:
0.11 m m (0.004 in)

1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page


6-49).
2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air-impact
valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the diameter of
the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure
can be done using the valve guide driver, 5.5 m m and
a conventional hammer.

5.3 mm
(0.21 in)

4*
87 mm
(3.43 in)

_57 mm _
(2.24 in)

10.8 mm
(0.42 in)

3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill t h e m


in the freezer section of a refrigerator for at least an
hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300 F (150 C). Monitor the temperature with
a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter
than 300 F (150 C); excessive heat may loosen the
valve seats.

5. Working f r o m the camshaft side, use the driver and an


air hammer to drive the guide about 2 m m (0.1 in)
towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off
some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold
the air hammer directly in line w i t h the valve guide to
prevent damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or
a face shield.
(cont'd)

6-49

Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out t o w a r d
the camshaft side of the head.

9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of


the new valve guide. Install the guide f r o m the
camshaft side of the head; use the valve guide driver,
5.5 m m to drive the guide to the specified installed
height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to
do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height
Intake:
21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in)
Exhaust: 20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0.850 in)

7. If a valve guide still w o n ' t move, drill it out with a 8


m m (0.3 in) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you could
damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.

10. Coat both the valve guide reamer, 5.5 m m and the
valve guide with cutting oil.
11. Rotate the valve guide reamer clockwise the full
length of the valve guide bore.

8. Remove the new guide(s) f r o m the freezer, one at a


time, as you need t h e m .

12. Continue to rotate the valve guide reamer clockwise


while removing it f r o m the bore.

6-50

Valve Seat Reconditioning


13. Thoroughly wash the guide w i t h detergent and water
to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-49).
Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without sticking.

1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page


6-49). If the valve guides are w o r n , replace t h e m (see
page 6-49) before cutting the valve seats.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
valve seat cutter.

15. Inspect the valve seating. If necessary renew the valve


seat using a valve seat cutter (see page 6-51).

3. Carefully cut a 45 seat, removing only enough


material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat w i t h the 30 cutter
and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5 cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 cutter (exhaust seat). Check
the width of the seat and adjust accordingly.

.5 (intake seat)
60 (exhaust seat)

5. Make one more very light pass w i t h the 45 cutter to


remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Valve Seat Width
Standard (New): 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in)
Service Limit:
2.00 mm (0.079 in)

(cont'd)

6-51

Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve
seating. Apply Prussian Blue c o m p o u n d (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat
several times.

8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head, and


measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve S t e m Installed Height
Standard (New): 46.7547.55 m m
(1.841-1.872 in)
Service Limit:
47.80 m m (1.882 in)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height
Standard (New): 46.6847.48 m m
(1.838-1.869 in)
Service Limit:
47.73 m m (1.879 in)

7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the


blue c o m p o u n d , should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must
make a second cut w i t h the 67.5 cutter (intake seat)
or the 60 cutter (exhaust seat) to move it d o w n ,
then one more cut with the 45 cutter to restore seat
width.
If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30 cutter to move it up,
then one more cut with the 45 cutter to restore seat
width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made w i t h the
45 cutter.

6-52

9. If the valve stem installed height is beyond the service


limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the
service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat
in the head is too deep.

Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation


Special Tools Required
. Stem Seal Driver 07PAD-0010000
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ101 OA

6. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and


the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring
and install the valve cotters.

1. Coat the valve stems w i t h new engine oil. Install the


valves in the valve guides.

07757-PJ1010A

2. Check that the valves move up and d o w n smoothly.


3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the 5.5 m m side
of the stem seal driver (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring (D)
and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring (F). They
are not interchangeable.
F

7. Remove the valve spring compressor and the valve


spring compressor attachment.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem t w o or three
times w i t h a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve
stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.
A

5. Install the valve spring and the spring retainer. Place


the end of the valve spring w i t h the closely w o u n d
coils t o w a r d the cylinder head.

6-53

Cylinder Head
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
Front
1. Loosen the locknuts and the adjusting screws.
2. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.
3. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the
camshaft oil seal.
4. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
- 1 . Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
-2. Install the oil seal about 0 . 5 - 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 6 in)
below the surface of the cylinder head.

9. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,


08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker shaft
holder mating surface of the cylinder head. Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.
A p p l y liquid gasket
along the broken line.

10. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely


install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
NOTE:
5. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head then
install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D). Apply new engine oil to the journals
and the cam lobes.
r

6. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.


7. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-41).
8. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the rocker
shaft holder and the cylinder head.

6-54

Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine


with oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the rocker arm assembly.
11. Tighten each bolt t w o turns at a time in the sequence
as shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the
valves.
Specified Torque
8 x 1 . 2 5 m m : 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )

12. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket
(B).

Rear
1. Loosen the locknuts and the adjusting screws.
2. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.
3. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the
camshaft oil seal.
4. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
- 1 . Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
-2. Install the oil seal about 0.5-1.5 m m (0.02-0.06 in)
below the surface of the cylinder head.

13. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft


pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B),
then install the camshaft pulley (C).

(9.2 k g f m , 67 Ibfft)

(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

14. Set the camshaft pulleys to t o p dead center (TDC)


before bolting them onto the engine block (see step 6
on page 6-57).

5. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then


install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D). Apply new engine oil to the journals
and the cam lobes.
6. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
7. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-42).
8. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the rocker
shaft holder and the cylinder head.

(cont'd)

6-55

Cylinder Head
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
(cont'd)
9. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker shaft
holder mating surface of the cylinder head. Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.

12. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket
(B).

NOTE:
If y o u apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.
Apply liquid gasket
along the broken line.

8x1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

13. Apply new engine oil t o the threads of the camshaft


pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B),
then install the camshaft pulley (C).
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm

10. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely


install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
w i t h oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the rocker a r m assembly.
11. Tighten each bolt t w o turns at a time in the sequence
shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind o n the
valves.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

6-56

12x1.25 mm
90 N m
(9.2 k g f m , 67 Ibfft)

14. Set the camshaft pulleys t o TDC before bolting t h e m


onto the engine block (see step 6 on page 6-57).

Cylinder Head Installation


1. Clean the cylinder head and the engine block surface.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A). Always
use new O-rings (B).

6. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC


marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys w i t h the pointers
(B) on the back covers.
FRONT

3. Install the dowel pins (C) and the new cylinder head
gaskets (D).

REAR

4. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, the timing belt guide


plate, and the upper and lower covers.
5. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to top dead center
(TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the
t i m i n g belt drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil
pump.

7. Install the cylinder heads on the engine block.

(cont'd)

6-57

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
8. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
point A and point B.
50 mm (2.0 in)
45 mm (1.8 in)

11. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 29 N-m


(3.0 k g f m , 22 Ibfft) using a beam-type torque wrench.
When using a preset click-type torque wrench, be
sure to torque slowly and do not overtighten. If a bolt
makes any noise while y o u are torquing it, loosen the
bolt and retighten it f r o m the first step.
Front

9. If either diameter is less than 10.6 m m (0.42 in),


replace the cylinder head bolt.
10. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the bolt
heads of ail cylinder head bolts.
Rear

6-58

12. After t o r q u i n g , tighten all cylinder head bolts in two


steps (90 per step) using the sequence shown in step
11. If you are using a new cylinder head bolt, tighten

18. Install the connector bracket (A) to the front cylinder


head.

cylinder head.
13. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-18).
14. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-10).
15. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-30).
16. Install the water passage (see page 10-11).
17. Install the injector bases (see page 9-6).

22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

(cont'd)

6-59

Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
20. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11 -350), then
install the quick-connect fitting cover (B).

26. Install the power steering (P/S) p u m p (A) and tighten


the bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket.

2 1 . Install the front w a r m up three w a y catalytic converter


(front WU-TWC) (see page 11-379) and the rear w a r m
up three w a y catalytic converter (rear WU-TWC) (see
page 11-380).

28. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).

22. Connect the following engine wire harness


connectors, and install the wire harness clamps t o the
cylinder head:

30. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and


connectors are installed correctly.

Six injector connectors


Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
Front rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Rear rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector
Front air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector
Rear air fuel ratio (A/F) (sensor 1) connector
Front secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2)
(secondary H02S) connector
Rear secondary heated oxygen (sensor 2)
(secondary H02S) connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 1)
connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (BANK 2)
connector
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (BANK 1)
connector
Knock sensor connector
23. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
24. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
25. Install the alternator (see page 4-33).

6-60

27. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).

29. install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).

3 1 . Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON


(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel p u m p runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel
leakage at any point in the fuel line.
32. Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see step 11 on
page 10-7), and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system
w i t h the heater valve open.
33. Check for fluid leaks.
34. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) idle learn
procedure (see page 11-326).
35. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
36. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-325).
37. Inspect the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-20).

Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In


Car

Sealing Bolt Installation

Special Tools Required

NOTE: W h e n installing the sealing bolt (A), always use a


new washer (B).

Ball Joint Remover/Installer 07GAF-SD40330


1. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.

FRONT

2. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the


camshaft oil seal.
3. Using the ball joint remover/installer (A), a washer (B),
and a 12 x 75 x 1.25mm bolt (C), press in a new
camshaft oil seal (D) about 0.5-1.5 m m (0.02-0.06 in)
below the surface of the cylinder head.

2 8 x 1 . 5 mm
78 N m
(8.0 k g f m , 58 Ibfft)

REAR

6-61

Cylinder Head
Front Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve
Replacement

Rear Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve


Replacement

1. Remove the front rocker arm assembly (see page


6-39).

1. Remove the rear rocker arm assembly (see page


6-40).

2. Remove the front rocker arm oil control valve (A).

2. Remove the rear rocker arm oil control valve (A).

3. Install the rocker arm oil control valve in the reverse


order of removal.

3. Install the rocker arm oil control valve in the reverse


order of removal.

6-62

Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools
7-2
Component Location Index
7-3
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection. 7-6
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
7-7
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
7-9
Oil Pan Removal
7-10
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
7-11
Crankshaft Inspection
7-14
Block and Piston Inspection
7-15
Cylinder Bore Honing
7-17
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
7-17
Piston Ring Replacement
7-20
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
7-22
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement
7-28
Oil Pan Installation
7-29
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In C a r . . . 7-31
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In
Car
7-31
Sealing Bolt Installation
7-32

Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref.No.

Tool Number
07749-0010000
07OAD-RCAA100
07OAD-RCAA200

Description
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L
Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m
Driver Attachment, 106 m m

Qty
1
1
1

I
<D

7-2

<D

(D

Component Location Index

CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)


S E N S O R COVER
O-RING
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-10
Installation, page
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) S E N S O R
Replacement, page 11-247

OIL S C R E E N

DRIVE PLATE
O-RING

ENGINE BLOCK
END COVER

OIL PUMP
Overhaul, page 8-14

O-RING

TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation, step 27 on page 7-25
Installation - in car, page 7-31

O-RING

P U L L E Y END
CRANKSHAFT OIL S E A L
Installation, step 3 on page 8-17
Installation - in car, page 7-31
OIL FILTER B A S E /
OIL FILTER A S S E M B L Y

ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E


S E N S O R COVER

(cont'd)

7-3

Engine Block
Component Location Index (cont'd)

SEALING BOLT
Installation, page 7-32

7-4

PISTON PIN
Removal, page 7-17
Inspection, page 7-18
Installation, page 7-19

PISTON RINGS
Replacement, page 7-20

SNAP RINGS
PISTON
Removal, page 7-11
Measurement, page 7-15
Installation, page 7-22
CONNECTING ROD
End Play, page 7-6
Small End Measurement, page 7-18

CONNECTING ROD
BEARING

ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder Bore Inspection, page 7-15
Warpage Inspection, page 7-15
Cylinder Bore Honing, page 7-17
Ridge Removal, step 10 on page 7-12
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING
Oil Clearance, page 7-9
Selection, page 7-9

CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP
CONNECTING ROD B O L T S
Inspection, step 16 on page 7-24

7-5

Engine Block
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil p u m p (see page 8-15).
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 9 on page 7-12).
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and the
crankshaft (C).
Connecting Rod End Play

Standard (New): 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in)


Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in)

4. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service


limit, install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is
still beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft
(see page 7-11).

7-6

5. Push the crankshaft firmly away f r o m the dial


indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play

Standard (New): 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in)


Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in)

6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust washers


and recheck. If it is still beyond the service limit,
replace the crankshaft (see page 7-11).

Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement


Main Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the main bearing caps and the bearing
halves (see step 17 on page 7-13).
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i t h a clean
shop towel.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
NOTE: If the engine is still in the vehicle when you bolt
the main cap d o w n to check the clearance, the weight
of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten the
plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt
and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate
reading, support the crank w i t h a jack under the
counterweights, and check only one bearing at a time.

6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,


remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of
the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not
file, s h i m , or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust
clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect,
try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed
above or below that one), and check clearance again,
if the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using
the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the
crankshaft and start over (see page 7-11).

4. Reinstall the bearings and the caps, then tighten the


bearing cap bolts (see step 23 on page 7-25) to 74 N-m
(7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft), and the bearing cap side bolts to
49 N-m (5.0 k g f m , 36 Ibfft) in the proper sequence.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Remove the caps and the bearing halves, and
measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
Standard (New): 0.019-0.045 mm
(0.0007-0.0018 in)
Service Limit:
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)

(cont'd)

7-7

Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Main Bearing Selection

Larger block bore


Bearing Identification

Crankshaft Bore Code Location


Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the

Aorl

Color code is on the


edge of the bearing

engine block as a code for the size of each of the f o u r


m a i n j o u r n a l bores.

Borll

C o r III

D or llll

Smaller bearing (Thicker)

1orl

Red/
Pink

Pink

Pink/
Yellow

Yellow

2 or II

Pink

Pink/
Yellow

Yellow

Yellow/
Green

3 or III

Pink/
Yellow

Yellow

Yellow/ Green
Green

4 or llll

Yellow

Yellow/ Green
Green

5 or Mill

Yellow/ Green
Green

6 or llllll

Green

Use t h e m , and the numbers stamped o n the crankshaft


(codes for main journal size), t o choose the correct
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m w i t h a
w i r e brush or scraper. Clean t h e m only w i t h solvent or
detergent.

No. 4 J O U R N A L
(Transmission end)

No. 1 J O U R N A L
(Pulley end)

Smaller
main
journal

Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)

Green/
Brown

Green/
Brown

Green/
Brown

Brown

Brown

Brown/
Black

NOTE: When using bearing halves


of different colors, it does not
matter which color is used in
t

e t

p o

b o t t o m >

Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)

No. 4 J O U R N A L
(Transmission end)

No. 1 J O U R N A L
(Pulley end)

No. 3 J O U R N A L
No. 2 J O U R N A L

7-8

Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement


Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection

Connecting Rod Bearing Selection

1. Remove the connecting rod cap and the bearing half


(see page 7-11).

Each connecting rod falls into one of four tolerance


ranges (from 0 to 0.024 m m (0.0009 in), in 0.006 m m
(0.0002 in) increments) depending on the size of its big
end bore.

2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with


a clean shop towel.
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal.
4. Reinstall the bearing half and the cap, and tighten the
connecting rod bolts.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
Tightening Torque:
20 N m (2.0 k g f m , 15 I b f f t ) + 9 0
5. Remove the rod cap and the bearing half and measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil
Clearance

Standard (New): 0.0200.044 m m


(0.0008-0.0017 in)
Service Limit:
0.050 m m (0.0020 in)

It's then stamped with a number or bar ( 1 , 2 , 3 , or 4/i, II,


III, or llll) indicating the range. You may find any
combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4/I, II, III, or llll in any engine.
Normal Bore Size: 58.0 m m (2.28 in)
Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat damage.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations
Numbers or bars have been stamped on the side of each
connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use
t h e m , and the letters or bars stamped on the crank
(codes for rod journal size) to choose the correct
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m with a
wire brush or scraper. Clean t h e m only with solvent or
detergent.

6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,


remove the upper half of the bearing, then install a
new, complete bearing with the same color code, and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, s h i m , or scrape the
bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect,
try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed
above or below that one), and check clearance again.
If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using
the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the
crankshaft and start over (see page 7-11).

(cont'd)

7-9

Engine Block
Oil Pan Removal

Connecting Rod Bearing


Replacement (cont'd)
Larger big end bore

1. If the engine is already o u t of the vehicle, go t o step 6.

Bearing Identification
Color code is on the
edge of the bearing

1orl

2 or II

3 or III

4 or llll

2. Raise the vehicle on the lift.


3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).

Smaller bearing (Thicker)


Yellow/
Green

Aorl

Pink

Pink/
Yellow

Yellow

Bor II

Pink/
Yellow

Yellow

Yellow/ Green
Green

C or III

Yellow

Yellow/ Green
Green

D or llll

Yellow/ Green
Green

E or lllll

Green

For HUH

Green/
Brown

4. Remove the front subframe stiffener (see step 31 on


page 5-6).
5. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 32 on page 5-6).

Smaller
rod
journal

Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)

Green/
Brown

Green/
Brown

Brown

Green/
Brown

Brown

Brown/
Black

Brown

B r o w n / Black
Black

6. Remove the rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic


converter (rear WU-TWC) bracket.

NOTE: When using bearing halves


of different colors, it does not
matter which color is used in
the top or bottom.

Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or Bars)

No. 4 J O U R N A L

No. 3 J O U R N A L

7. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor cover


(A) and the bolt (B), then disconnect the CKP sensor
connector (C).

No. 1 J O U R N A L
(Pulley end)
No. 2 J O U R N A L

7-10

No. 6 J O U R N A L
(Transmission end)
No. 5 J O U R N A L

Crankshaft and Piston Removal


8. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the four
bolts (B) securing the transmission.

1. Remove the engine/transmission (see page 5-3).


2. Remove the transmission (see page 14-218).
3. Remove the drive plate (see page 14-230).
4. Remove the cylinder heads (see page 6-34).
5. Remove the t i m i n g belt drive pulley f r o m the
crankshaft (see page 6-28).
6. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10).
7. Remove the engine block end cover.

8. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover (A),


then remove the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (B).

11. Remove the oil pan.

(cont'd)

7-11

Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont'd)
9. Remove the oil screen (A), the baffle plate (B), and the
oil p u m p (C).

11. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the


crank pin at bottom dead center (BDC) for each
cylinder. Remove the piston/connecting rod assembly
by pushing on the connecting rod. Take care not to
damage the oil jets, the crank pin, or the cylinder with
the connecting rod.
CORRECT

10. If y o u can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around


the top of any cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer
(A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If
the ridge is not removed, it may damage the piston as
it's pushed out.

INCORRECT

12. Remove the bearing f r o m the cap. Keep all


caps/bearings in order.
13. Remove the upper bearing halves f r o m the
connecting rods, and set t h e m aside w i t h their
respective caps.
14. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,
reinstall the cap on the rod.
15. To avoid confusion during reassembly, mark each
piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.

7-12

16. Loosen the bearing cap bolts and the bearing cap side
bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a t i m e ; repeat the
sequence until all bolts are loosened.

17. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and the bearing cap
side bolts (B), then remove the bearing caps (C).

18. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine block, being
careful not to damage the journals and the CKP pulse
plate.

19. Remove the CKP pulse plate f r o m the crankshaft (see


page 7-28).
20. Reinstall the main caps and the bearings on the
engine block in the proper order.

B,

7-13

Engine Block
Crankshaft Inspection
Out-of-Round and Taper

Straightness

1. Remove the crankshaft f r o m the engine block (see


page 7-11).

7. Place the V-blocks on a flat surface.

2. Remove the CKP pulse plate f r o m the crankshaft (see


page 7-28).
3. Clean the crankshaft oil passages w i t h pipe cleaners
or a suitable brush.
4. Check the keyway slot and the threaded holes for
damage.
5. Measure the out-of-round at the middle of each rod
and main journal in t w o places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not be
more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round

Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max.


Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)

6. Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and main


journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Taper

Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) max.


Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)

7-14

8. Check the total runout w i t h the crankshaft supported


on V-blocks.
9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals. Rotate
the crankshaft t w o complete revolutions. The
difference between measurements on each journal
must not be more than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout

Standard (New): 0.025 mm (0.0010 in) max.


Service Limit:
0.03 mm (0.001 in)

Block and Piston Inspection


1. Remove the pistons f r o m the engine block (see page
7-11).
2. Check the pistons for distortion or cracks.
3. Measure the piston skirt diameter at a point 16.0 m m
(0.63 in) f r o m the bottom of the skirt.

4. Measure the wear and taper in direction X and Y at


three levels in each cylinder as s h o w n . If
measurements in any cylinder are beyond the
oversize bore service limit, replace the engine block. If
the engine block has to be rebored, refer to step 7
after reboring.

Piston Skirt Diameter


Standard (New).* 88.975-88.985 m m
(3.5029-3.5033 in)
Service Limit:
88.965 m m (3.5026 in)

Cylinder Bore Size

Oversize P'ston Skirt Diameter


0.25: 89.225-89.235 m m
(3.5128-3.5132 in)

Oversize
0.25: 89.250-89.265 m m
(3.5138-3.5144 in)

16.0 mm
(0.63 in)

Standard (New): 89.000-89.015 m m


(3.5039-3.5045 in)
Service Limit:
89.065 m m (3.5065 in)

Piston Skirt
Diameter

Reboring Limit: 0.25 m m (0.010 in)


Bore Taper
Limit:

(Difference b e t w e e n first and t h i r d


measurement) 0.05 m m (0.002 in)
6 mm (0.2 in)

_t
First Measurement
Second Measurement
Third Measurement

(cont'd)

7-15

Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
5. Hone any scored or scratched cylinder bores (see
page 7-17).
6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Engine Block Warpage
Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in) max.
Service Limit:
0.10 mm (0.004 in)

7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore


diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance is
near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston
and the cylinder bore for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0150.040 mm
(0.0006-0.0016 in)
Service Limit:
0.08 mm (0.003 in)

SERVICE LIMIT
0.08 mm (0.003 in)

PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE

7-16

Cylinder Bore Honing

Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod


Replacement

1. Measure the cylinder bores (see step 4 on page 7-15).


If the engine block is to be reused, hone the cylinders
and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched
cylinder bores must be honed.

Disassembly

2. Remove the oil jets (see page 8-13).

2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A)
and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps
are lined up w i t h the cutouts in the piston pin bores
(B).

3. Hone the cylinder bores w i t h honing oil and a fine


(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree Crosshatch pattern.
NOTE:

1. Remove the pistons (see page 7-11) f r o m the engine


block.

NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.

Use only a rigid hone w i t h 400 grit or finer stone,


such as Sunnen, A m m c o , or equivalent.
Do not use stones that are w o r n or broken.

4. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the


engine block of all metal particles. Wash the cylinder
bores with hot soapy water, then dry and oil them
immediately to prevent rusting.

3. Remove the
piston. Start
Remove the
flying or get

snap rings (A) f r o m both sides of each


at the cutout in the piston pin bore.
snap rings carefully so they do not go
lost. Wear eye protection.

NOTE: Never use solvent, it will only redistribute the


grit on the cylinder walls.
5. If scoring or scratches are still present in the cylinder
bores after honing to the service limit, rebore the
engine block. Some light vertical scoring and
scratching is acceptable if it is not deep enough to
catch your fingernail and does not run the full length
of the bore.
6. Install the oil jets (see page 8-13).

(cont'd)

7-17

Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
4. Separately heat each piston and connecting rod
assembly to about 158 F (70 C), then remove the
piston pin.

Inspection
NOTE: Inspect the piston, the piston pin, and the
connecting rod w h e n they are at room temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter

Standard (New):
Service Limit:

21.962-21.965 mm
(0.8646-0.8648 in)
21.954 mm (0.8643 in)

2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.

7-18

3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter


and the piston pin hole diameter on the piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
S t a n d a r d ( N e w ) : -0.00500.0010 m m

S e r v i c e Limit:

(-0.00020-0.00004 in)
0.004 m m (0.0002 in)

2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in the
connecting rod, and the piston pin w i t h new engine
oil.
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.

3. Heat the piston to about 158 F (70 C).

Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance


Standard (New):
0.0050.014 m m

(0.0002-0.0006 in)
Service Limit:

0.019 m m (0.0007 in)

(cont'd)

7-19

Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod
Replacement (cont'd)

Piston Ring Replacement

4. Assemble the piston (A) and the connecting rod (B)


w i t h the embossed marks (C) on the same side. Install
the piston pin (D).

1. Remove the pistons (see page 7-11) from the engine


block.

NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the piston pin.

2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston


rings (B).

3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly w i t h a


squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner w i t h
a blade to fit the piston grooves. File d o w n the blade,
if necessary. The top ring and second ring grooves are
1.2 m m (0.05 in) wide, and the oil ring groove is 2.8
m m (0.11 in) wide. Do not use a wire brush to clean
the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper w i t h
the cleaning tool.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated f r o m the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.

5. Install the remaining snap ring.


6. Reassemble the other pistons the same way.

7-20

4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder


bore 1 5 - 2 0 m m ( 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 in) f r o m the bottom.

6. Install the rings as s h o w n . The top ring (A) has a 1D


mark and the second ring (B) has a 2X mark. The
manufacturing marks (C) must face upward.

1 5 - 2 0 mm
( 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 in)

5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler


gauge:
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the
proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter against the wear limits (see step 4 on page
7-15). If the bore is over the service limit, the engine
block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap
Piston Ring Dimensions:

Top ring:

Standard (New):
Service Limit:
Second Ring:
Standard (New):
Service Limit:

0.200.35 mm
(0.008-0.014 in)
0.60 mm (0.024 in)
0.400.55 mm
(0.016-0.022 in)
0.70 mm (0.028 in)

Top Ring (Standard)


A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
Second Ring (Standard)
A: 3.6 mm (0.14 in)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)

Oil Ring:
Standard (New):

0.200.70 mm
(0.008-0.028 in)
0.80 mm (0.031 in)

Service Limit:

(cont'd)

7-21

Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)

Crankshaft and Piston Installation

7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the


ring-to-groove clearance:

Special Tools Required


. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
. Driver Attachment, 106 m m 07OAD-RCAA200

Top Ring Clearance


Standard (New):
Service Limit:

0.0550.080 mm
(0.0022-0.0031 in)
0.15 mm (0.006 in)

Second Ring Clearance


Standard (New):
0.0300.055 mm
(0.0012-0.0022 in)
Service Limit:
0.13 mm (0.005 in)

1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h


plastigage (see page 7-9).
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-7).
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and the
connecting rods.
4. Apply new engine oil to the inside of the main
bearings and the connecting rod bearings.
5. Install the CKP pulse plate to the crankshaft (see page
7-28).
6. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine block, being
careful not to damage the jounals and the CKP pulse
plate.

8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do


not bind.
9. Position the ring end gaps as s h o w n :
OIL RING G A P

About 90

S E C O N D RING G A P

About 4 5

7. Apply new engine oil to the side w i t h the thrust


washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the
No. 3 journal.

OIL RING GAP

TOP RING GAP and


SPACER RING GAP
PISTON PIN

7-22

8. Install the bearings (A) and the bearing caps (B) with
the arrow (C) facing the t i m i n g belt end of the engine
block.
0

CM

O CO

10. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for the
cylinder you are installing the piston in.
11. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring
compressor, and the cylinder bore.
12. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/connecting
rod assembly, and check that the bearing is securely
in place.
13. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with the
arrow (A) facing the t i m i n g belt side of the engine
block.

<>

0=

14. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the


cylinder, and tap it in using the w o o d e n handle of a
hammer (A). Maintain d o w n w a r d force on the ring
compressor (B) to prevent the rings f r o m expanding
before entering the cylinder bore.

1 0 x 8 0 mm

1 0 x 6 0 mm

9. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges,


then loosely install the bearing cap bolts (D) and the
bearing cap side bolts (E).

15. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check
the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before
pushing the piston into place.

cont'd)

7-23

Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
16. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at
point A and point B.

19. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and the
cap, then install the bearing (B) and the cap (C).

35 mm (1.38 in)

17. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A


and point B.
Point APoint B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter

Specification:

20. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flanges.
Tighten the bolts (D) to 20 N-m (2.0 k g f m , 15 Ibfft).
2 1 . Mark the connecting rod (A) and the bolt head (B) as
shown.

00.1 mm (00.004 in)

18. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,


replace the connecting rod bolt.

22. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head lines
up w i t h the mark on the connecting rod (turn the bolt
90 ).
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if y o u
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back
to step 16 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to
the specified angle. Repeat steps 10 to 22 for the
remaining cylinders.

7-24

23. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing
cap side bolts to the specified torque in the sequence
as shown. Repeat the torque sequence again to
ensure the bolts are properly torqued.
11 x 1.5 mm
74 N m
(7.5 kgfm, 54 Ibfft)

10x1.25 mm
49 N m
(5.0 kgfm, 36 Ibfft)

24. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the engine


block end cover mating surfaces, the bolts, and the
bolt holes.
25. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating
surfaces.
26. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the crankshaft
and to the lip of the crankshaft oil seal.
27. Using the driver handle and the driver attachment,
106 m m , drive in the new crankshaft oil seal until the
driver attachment bottoms on the engine block end
cover.

(cont'd)

7-25

Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
28. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block
mating surface of the engine block end cover and to
the inside edge of the theaded bolt holes. Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed w i t h i n 4 minutes.

29. Install the dowel pins (A), a new O-ring (B), and the
engine block end cover (C) on the engine block.
NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the engine block end cover.

If too much time has passed after applying the


liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.

30. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check
the seal for distortion.
3 1 . Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil p u m p (see
step 3 on page 8-17).
along the broken line.

32. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the oil p u m p


mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
33. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.

7-26

34. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,


08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block
mating surface of the oil p u m p and to the inside edge
of the theaded bolt holes. Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.

35. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the
crankshaft oil seal, and apply new engine oil to the
n e w O - r i n g (A).
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N m

NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.

36. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil p u m p (C).
37. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check
the seal for distortion.
38. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen (E)
with a new O-ring (F).
NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
w i t h oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the oil p u m p .

(cont'd)

7-27

Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
(cont'd)
39. Install the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (A), with a
new O-ring (B), then install the rocker arm oil pressure
sensor cover (C).

CKP Pulse Plate Replacement


1. Remove the crankshaft f r o m the engine block (see
page 7-11).
2. Remove the CKP pulse plate (A) f r o m the crankshaft.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the journals and the
CKP pulse plate.

40. Install the oil pan (see page 7-29).


4 1 . Install the t i m i n g belt drive pulley (see page 6-28) to
the crankshaft.
42. Install the cylinder heads (see page 6-57).
43. Install the drive plate (see page 14-230).
44. Install the transmission (see page 14-230).
45. Install the engine/transmission (see page 5-11).
NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, run the engine at idle until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then continue
to run it for about 15 minutes.

7-28

3. Install the CKP pulse plate in the reverse order of


removal.

Oil Pan Installation


1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the oil pan
mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan
mating surface of the engine block and to the inside
edge of the theaded bolt holes. Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:

5. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step,


tighten all bolts, in sequence, t o 12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft).
NOTE:
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
w i t h oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the oil pan.

If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the


component must be installed within 4 minutes.
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.

6. Tighten the four bolts (A) securing the transmission,


then install the torque converter cover (B).

Apply liquid gasket


along the broken line.

A
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m (7.5 k g f m , 54 Ibfft)

4. Install the oil pan on the engine block.

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

(cont'd)

7-29

Engine Block
Oil Pan Installation (cont'd)
7. Connect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
connector (A) and the bolt (B), then install the CKP
sensor cover (C).

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

9. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the f o l l o w i n g


steps.
10. Install exhaust pipe A (see step 34 on page 5-16) using
new gaskets and new self-locking nuts.
11. Install the front subframe stiffener (see step 35 o n
page 5-16).
12. Refill the engine w i t h the recommended engine oil
(see page 8-10).

12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

8. Install the rear w a r m up three w a y catalytic converter


(rear WU-TWC) bracket.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

7-30

Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal


Installation - In Car

Transmission End Crankshaft Oil


Seal Installation - In Car

Special Tools Required

Special Tools Required


Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Driver Attachment, 106 m m 07OAD-RCAA200

Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m 07OAD-RCAA100


1. Remove the t i m i n g belt, the t i m i n g belt stopper, and
the t i m i n g belt drive pulley (see page 6-28).
2. Remove the pulley end crankshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. A p p l y a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the
crankshaft oil seal.
5. Using the oil seal driver, 64 m m , drive in the new
crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the
oil p u m p . W h e n the seal is in place, clean any excess
grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal
lip is not distorted.

1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-218) and the


drive plate (see page 14-230).
2. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. Apply a light coat of new engine oil t o the lip of the
crankshaft oil seal.
5. Using the driver handle and the oil seal driver
attachment, drive in the new crankshaft oil seal until
the oil seal driver attachment bottoms against the
engine block end cover. Align the hole in the oil seal
driver attachment w i t h the pin on the crankshaft.

6. Install the t i m i n g belt drive pulley, the t i m i n g belt


stopper, and the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-28).
07OAD-RCAA200

6. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check


that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7. Install the drive plate (see page 14-230), and the
transmission (see page 14-230).

7-31

Engine Block
Sealing Bolt Installation
NOTE: W h e n installing the sealing bolts (A), always use
new washers (B).

A
28 x 1.0 m m
78 N-m
(8.0 k g f m , 58 Ibfft)

7-32

Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Component Location Index
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
L o w Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram
Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S e n s o r Replacement
Oil Pressure Test
Engine Oil Replacement
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
Oil J e t Replacement
Oil Jet Bolt Inspection
Oil Pump Overhaul

8-2
8-3
8-5
8-6
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-14

Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref.No.

(D
(D

Tool Number
07406-0020201
07406-0070301
07AAA-PLCA100
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07NAJ-P07010A
07OAD-RCAA100
07ZAJ-S5AA200

Description
A/T Pressure Hose
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
Oil Filter Wrench
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m
A/T Pressure Adapter
Pressure Gauge Adapter
Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m
Oil Pressure Hose

8-2

Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Component Location Index

OIL PUMP

(cont'd)

8-3

Engine Lubrication
Component Location Index (cont'd)

ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R


Circuit Diagram, page 8-8
Replacement page 8-9
Oil Pressure Test, page 8-9

OIL CONTROL
ORIFICES
O-RING

OIL FILTER
BASE/
OIL FILTER
ASSEMBLY

BAFFLE PLATE

OIL FILTER
FEED PIPE
Replacement, page 8-12

OIL PUMP
Removal, page 8-15
Inspection, page 8-16
Installation, page 8-17

8-4

OIL PAN

Symptom Troubleshooting Index


Symptom
Excessive engine oil
consumption

Low oil pressure indicator does


not come on w i t h the ignition
switch in ON (II)

Low oil pressure indicator stays


on

Diagnostic procedure
1. Verify the engine oil filler cap, the oil drain bolt,
and the oil filter are tight.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for w o r n valve guide(s) (see page 6-49)
or w o r n valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-47).
4. Check for damaged or w o r n piston ring(s) (see
page 7-20).
5. Check for damaged or w o r n engine internal
parts (cylinder w a l l , pistons, etc.) (see page
7-15).
Do the low oil pressure indicator does not come
on with the ignition switch in ON (II) procedure
(see page 8-6).

1. Check the engine oil level.


2. Do the low oil pressure indicator stays on
procedure (see page 8-6).

Also check for


Check the maintenance
records, w o r n out
engine oil will burn off
at a higher rate

Check the engine oil


level
A n open in the wire
between the
powertrain control
module (PCM) and
the rocker arm oil
pressure sensor
A wire shorted to
ground between the
PCM and the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor

8-5

Engine Lubrication
Symptom Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required
. Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
. Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301
. A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
A/T Pressure Hose 07406-0020201

Low oil pressure indicator does not come on


with the ignition switch in ON (II)

Low oil pressure indicator stays on


1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level normal?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Add engine oil to bring the oil level up to normal,
then recheck.
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover (see
step 1 on page 8-9).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-334).
Is the gauge control module OK?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-359).
3. Completely opens the throttle.

3. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see page


8-9).
4. Install the oil pressure hose (A), the pressure gauge
adapter (B), the A/T low pressure gauge w/panel (C),
the A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m (D), the A/T pressure
adapter (E), the A/T pressure hose (F), and the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor (G) to the pressure gauge
adapter as shown.
NOTE: Always use new O-rings.

4. Check the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR in the


DATA LIST with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
MAP S E N S O R - B A R O SENSOR = " A "
2

Is "A" 19.9 kPa (0.20 kgf/cm ,

2.89 psi) or less?

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-Replace the powertrain control module (PCM)
(see page 11-250).B
5. Check the ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it the 19.0 kPa (0.19kgfl

cm , 2.76 psi) or less ?

Y E S - U p d a t e the PCM (see page 11-249) if it does not


have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 5 0 ) . !
NO-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see
page 8 - 9 ) .

O-RING

5. W a r m up the engine.

8-6

07406-0020201

6. At the idling of an engine, check the oil pressure


gauge value.
69 kPa (0.7 kgf I cm , 10 psi) or less ?
2

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check the following i t e m s : !
Blocking of oil filter.
Blocking of oil screen.
Check the oil p u m p .
7. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
2

Is the 19.0 kPa (0.19 kgf/cm ,

2.76 psi) or less?

YES-Go to step 12.


NO-Go to step 8.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
10. Disconnect the PCM connector C (49P).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Does the low oil pressure indicator go off?
YES-Update the PCM (see page 11-249) if it does not
have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).B
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-359).!
12. Check the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
BARO S E N S O R - M A P SENSOR="A"
Is "A" 19.9 kPa (0.20 kgf I cm , 2.89 psi) or less?
2

YES-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see


page 8-2)M
NO-Replace the PCM (see page 11-250).B

Engine Lubrication
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX


HAI ItnY

No. 1(120 A)
- < T \ J > -

No.2(50A)

-CTVJO

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
G20

01

IGNITION SWITCH
'BAT

IGI/
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)

D2

No. 10
(7.5 A)

P10

G A U G E CONTROL MODULE

LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
WHT
I
I

RED
I
I
I
I

CANH

f-AAAr-*

- O -

H
POIL

VCC2
C12

BLU/YEL

YEL/BLU

ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

8-8

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor


Replacement

Oil Pressure Test

1. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover.

Special Tools Required


Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070301
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
A/T Pressure Hose 07406-0020201

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m

If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine


running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
correct:
1. Remove the oil pressure sensor cover (see step 1 on
page 8-9).
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (see page
8-9).

2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor


connector, then remove the rocker arm oil pressure
sensor.

3. Install the oil pressure hose (A), the pressure gauge


adapter (B), the A/T low pressure gauge w/panel (C),
the A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m (D), the A/T pressure
adapter (E), the A/T pressure hose (F), and the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor (G) to the pressure gauge
adapter as shown.
NOTE: Always use new O-rings.

3. Install the rocker arm oil pressure sensor with a new


O-ring.
4. Connect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor
connector.
5. Install the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover.

(cont'd)

8-9

Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Test (cont'd)

Engine Oil Replacement

4. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge


registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before
continuing.

1. W a r m up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
A
39 N m
(4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)
Do not overtighten.

5. A l l o w the engine to reach operating temperature (fan


comes on at least twice). The pressure should be:
Engine Oil Temperature:
176 F (80 C)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle:
69 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,
10.0 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm:
490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm ,
71 psi) min.
2

6. If oil pressure is not w i t h i n specifications, inspect


these items:
Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page 8-14).
Check the oil screen for clogging.
Inspect the oil p u m p (see page 8-16).

3. Reinstall the drain bolt w i t h a new washer (B).


4. Refill w i t h the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
At Oil Change:
4.0 L (4.2 U S qt)
At Oil Change including Filter:
4.3 L (4.5 U S qt)
After Engine Overhaul:
5.0 L (5.3 U S qt)
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
10. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTICAL w i t h the
HDS.
11. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES w i t h the HDS.
12. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
w i t h the HDS.
13. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER w i t h the
HDS.

8-10

Engine Oil Filter Replacement


14. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the
HDS.
NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time with
the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL
LIFE A N D ATF w i t h the HDS instead.

Special Tools Required


Oil Filter Wrench 07AAA-PLCA100
1. Remove the oil filter w i t h the oil filter wrench.
2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.
3. Inspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Clean the seat on the oil filter base, then
apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber
seal. Use only filters w i t h a built-in bypass system.

4. Install the oil filter by hand.


5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise w i t h the oil filter wrench.
Tighten: 3 / 4 Turn Clockwise
Tightening Torque: 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)

07AAA-PLCA100

(cont'd)

8-11

Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
(cont'd)

Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement

6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or to ) are


printed around the outside of the filter, you can use
the following procedure to tighten the filter.

1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-11).


2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.

Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against


the oil filter base, and note which number or mark is
at the bottom.
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three
numbers or marks f r o m the one you noted. For
example, if mark is at the bottom when the seal is
lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark
comes around to the bottom.

Mark w h e n rubber seal


is seated.

Number or
Mark when
rubber seal is
seated
Number or
Mark after
tightening

1
or

Mark after tightening,

2
or

4
or

3
or

4
or

3
or

2
or

7. After installation, fill the engine w i t h oil up to the


specified level, run the engine for more than
3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.

8-12

1
or

4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 49 N-m (5.0 k g f m ,


36 Ibfft), then remove the nuts f r o m the oil filter feed
pipe.

Oil Jet Replacement

Oil Jet Bolt Inspection

1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see


page 7-11).

1. Remove the oil jet bolt (see page 8-13).

2. Remove the oil jet bolt (A), then remove the oil jet (B).
A
16 N-m
(1.6 k g f m , 12 Ibfft)
A p p l y new engine oil.

2. Inspect the oil jet bolt as follows.


Make sure that a 0.6 m m (0.02 in) diameter drill will
go through the oil intake (0.7 m m (0.03 in)
diameter). Make sure the check ball (A) moves
smoothly and has a stroke of about 4.0 m m (0.16
in).
Check the oil jet bolt operation w i t h an air nozzle. It
should take at least 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/cm, 17 psi) to
unseat the check ball.
0.7 m m
(0.03 in)

3. Carefully install the new oil jet and tighten the oil jet
bolt.
4. Install the crankshaft (see page 7-22).

8-13

Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
6 x 1.0 m m
6.0 N m
(0.6 k g f m , 4.0 Ibfft)

SEALING BOLT
39 N m
(4.0 k g f m , 29 Ibfft)

8-14

Special Tools Required


Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m 07OAD-RCAA100
Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857

6. Install the engine support hanger to the vehicle, and


attach the hook (A) to the engine hanger (B). Tighten
the w i n g nut (C) by hand, to lift and support the
engine/transmission.

Removal
1. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).
2. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
3. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump and the P/S
line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-34).
4. Remove the cowl top side cover (A) f r o m both sides.

7. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).


8. Remove the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (see step
8 on page 7-11).
9. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10).
10. Remove the oil screen (A).

5. With the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) on its


side, insert the hanger beam (B) through the opening,
then rotate it over the damper (C).

11. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the oil


p u m p assembly (B).

(cont'd)

8-15

Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection
1. Remove the screws f r o m the p u m p housing, then
separate the p u m p housing and the pump cover.
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and the outer rotor (B). If
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the service
limit, replace the oil p u m p assembly.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial
Clearance
Standard (New): 0.040.14 mm (0.002
- 0 . 0 0 6 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)

4. Check the p u m p housing-to-outer rotor radial


clearance between the outer rotor (A) and the p u m p
housing (B). If the p u m p housing-to-outer rotor radial
clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil
p u m p assembly.
Pump housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial
Clearance
Standard (New): 0.10-0.19 mm (0.004
- 0 . 0 0 7 in)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in)

5. Inspect both rotors and the p u m p housing for scoring


or other damage. Replace the parts, if necessary.

3. Check the p u m p housing-to-rotor axial clearance


between the rotors (A) and the p u m p housing (B). If
the p u m p housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the oil p u m p assembly.
Pump housing-to-Rotor Axial
Clearance
Standard (New): 0.02-0.07 mm (0.001
- 0 . 0 0 3 in)
Service Limit:
0.12 mm (0.005 in)

8-16

6. Apply liquid thread lock to the p u m p housing screws,


then install the oil p u m p cover.
7. Check that the oil p u m p turns freely.

Installation
1. Remove the old oil seal f r o m the oil pump.

7. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the


crankshaft oil seal, and apply new engine oil to the
new O-ring (A).

2. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.


3. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the oil seal driver,
64 m m bottoms on the pump.

4. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the oil p u m p


mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
5. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
6. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block
mating surface of the oil p u m p and to the inside edge
of the threaded bolt holes. Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:

8. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).
9. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check
the seal for distortion.
10. Install the oil screen (D) with a new O-ring (E).
11. Install the oil pan (see page 7-29).

If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the


component must be installed within 4 minutes.

12. Install the oil filter base/oil filter assembly with a new
O-ring (see step 39 on page 7-28).

If too much time has passed after applying the


liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.

13. Install the timing belt (see page 6-18).


14. Remove the engine support hanger f r o m the vehicle.
15. Install the both sides cowl top side lid on the cowl
cover.
16. Install the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S line
bracket (see step 26 on page 6-60).
17. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
18. Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-210).
19. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling
the engine with oil.

8-17

Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Injector Base Removal and Installation
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement

9-2
9-6
9-8

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System


intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) ACTUATOR
10 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
UPPER COVER
Replace if it is cracked or if the
mating surface is damaged.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
EXHAUSTGAS
RECIRCULATION
(EGR) PIPE

6 x 1.0 mm
10 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE V A L V E

THROTTLE
BODY

6 x 1.0 mm
10 N-m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

9-2

8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

Removal
1. Remove the engine cover.

2. Disconnect the breather pipe (A), then remove the


intake air duct (B).

3. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)

hose (A), the brake booster vacuum hose (B), and the
intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator connector (C).

4. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister


hose (A), the EVAP canister purge valve connector (B),
the throttle actuator connector (C), and the manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector (D).

5. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (E).

(cont'd)

9-3

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System


Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Remove the upper cover mounting bolts and the nuts
sequentially in three steps, then remove the upper
cover.

Installation
1. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and the
nuts sequentially in three steps. Always use a new
intake manifold gasket.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

7. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts and the


nuts sequentially in three steps, then remove the
intake manifold.

\ :?\ r~?\ n/

9-4

2. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and the nuts
sequentially in three steps. Always use a new intake
manifold gasket.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0mm: 1 2 N m (1.2kgfm,8.9Ibfft)

3. Connect the water bypass hoses (A).

6. Install the intake air duct (A), then connect the


breather pipe (B).
NOTE: When tightening the screw of the hose band
(C), align the edge of the hose band (D) w i t h the mark
(E) painted on the hose band. If you tighten the screw
over the mark, replace the hose band.

4. Connect the MAP sensor connector (B), the throttle


actuator connector (C), the EVAP canister purge valve
connector (D), and the EVAP canister hoses (E).
5. Connect the IMT actuator connector (A), the brake
booster vacuum hose (B), and the PCV hose (C).

7. Install the engine cover.

8. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.


9. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and
connectors are installed correctly.
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed the
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h heater valve open
(see page 10-6).

9-5

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System


Injector Base Removal and Installation
Removal

Installation

1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-340).

1. Install the front injector base (A) and the rear injector
base (B) w i t h new gaskets (C), and tighten the injector
base mounting bolts/nuts (D) in a crisscross pattern in
three steps, beginning w i t h the inner nuts.

2. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).


3. Remove the power steering (P/S) p u m p and the P/S
line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-34).
4. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).

NOTE: The front injector base gasket is different f r o m


the rear one. Do not mix injector base gasket types.

5. Remove the injectors (see page 11-240).


6. Remove the harness holder mounting bolt (A), then
disconnect the knock sensor connector (B).

7. Remove the injector base mounting bolts/nuts (A),


then remove the front injector base (B) and the rear
injector base (C).

9-6

2. Connect the knock sensor connector (A), then install


the harness holder mounting bolt (B).

3. Install the injectors (see page 11-240).


4. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
5. Install the P/S p u m p and the P/S hose bracket (see
step 26 on page 6-60).
6. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
7. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel p u m p runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel
leakage at any point in the fuel line.

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System


Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts w h e n reassembling.
HEAT SHIELD
HEAT SHIELDS

SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)
Replace.

T H R E E WAY
CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC)

E X H A U S T PIPE A

T W C TIGHTENING S E Q U E N C E
Tighten the nuts in steps.
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibfft)
Replace.

9-8

SELF-LOCKING N U T S
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N m (3.4 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)
Replace.

Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Component Location Index
Radiator Cap Test
Radiator Test
Fan Motor Test
Thermostat Test
Water Pump Inspection
Water Pump Replacement
Coolant Check
Coolant Replacement
Thermostat Replacement
Water Passage Replacement
Radiator and Fan Replacement

10-2
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-10
10-11
10-13

Fan Controls
Component Location Index
10-16
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
10-17
Circuit Diagram
10-18
Radiator Fan High S p e e d Circuit Troubleshooting. ...10-19

Cooling System
Component Location Index

10-2

Radiator Cap Test

Radiator Test

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove


the radiator cap (A). Wet the radiator cap seal w i t h
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially
available pressure tester (B).

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove


the radiator cap, and fill the radiator w i t h engine
coolant to the base of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to
the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93123 kPa
( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
2

2. Apply a pressure of 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 kgf/cm ,


1 4 - 1 8 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.

3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in


pressure.
4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.

10-3

Cooling System
Fan Motor Test

Thermostat Test

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors f r o m the radiator fan


motor (A) and the A/C condenser fan motor (B).

Replace the thermostat (see page 10-10) if it is stuck in


the open position at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermostat and the thermometer (B)
touch the bottom of the hot container.

2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to


terminal No. 2 and ground to terminal No. 1.
3. If either motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,
replace it (see page 10-13).
2. Heat the water, and check the temperature w i t h a
thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat w h e n it is
fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height:
Above 10.0 mm (0.39 in)
Starts Opening: 1 6 9 - 1 7 6 F ( 7 6 - 8 0 C )
Fully Open:
194F(90C)

10-4

Water Pump Inspection

Water Pump Replacement

1. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).

1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).

2. Turn the water p u m p pulley counterclockwise, and


check that it turns freely. If it does not turn freely,
replace the water p u m p (see page 10-5).

2. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-16).

NOTE: W h e n y o u check the water p u m p , you may see


a small amount of " w e e p i n g " f r o m the bleed holes
(A). This is normal.

3. Remove the t i m i n g belt adjuster (see page 6-27).


4. Remove the five bolts securing the water p u m p (A),
then remove the water p u m p .

12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)
A

3. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-18).

5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating


surface of the engine block.
6. Install the water p u m p w i t h a new O-ring (B).
7. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
8. Install the t i m i n g belt adjuster (see page 6-27).
9. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-18).
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed the
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve
open (see page 10-6).

10-5

Cooling System
Coolant Check

Coolant Replacement

1. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir.

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove


the radiator cap.

Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and the


MIN mark(B).

2. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the


touch.
3. Open the splash shield cover (A).

2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or


below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between
the MIN and M A X marks, then inspect the cooling
system for leaks.

10-6

4. Loosen the drain plug (B) and drain the coolant.


5. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor cover (see
step 8 on page 7-11).

6. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B) located at


the rear of the engine block, then loosen the drain
bolt.

12. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into


the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not
add water.
Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the coolant
reservoir capacity of 0.75 L (0.198 U S gal)):
At Coolant Change:
7.5 L (1.98 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul:
9.4 L (2.48 US gal)

(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

7. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain


bolt. Remove the rubber hose, then install the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor cover (see step 39 on page
7-28).
8. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
9. Close the splash shield cover.
10. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir.
11. Fill the coolant reservoir to the M A X mark (A) with
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N
OL999-9001).

(cont'd)

10-7

Cooling System
Coolant Replacement (cont'd)
13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 1,500 r p m
until it w a r m s up (the radiator fan comes on at least
twice). Make sure the thermostat is open.
14. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if
needed.
15. Set the climate control or HVAC control unit to
m a x i m u m cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the
engine.

25. Set the climate control or HVAC control unit t o


m a x i m u m heat, and select high speed heat mode on
the rear control panel. Measure the temperature of
the air f r o m the rear floor vent for 3 minutes. Make
sure the temperature is above the standard line of the
graph as s h o w n . If the temperature is below the
standard line, repeat steps 19 through 22 several
more times. Then loosely install the radiator cap and
recheck.
AIR FLOW
T E M P E R A T U R E F(C)

16. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed.

176 (80)

17. Set the climate control or HVAC control unit to


m a x i m u m heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the
engine.

140 (60)

18. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed.
19. Set the climate control or HVAC control unit to
m a x i m u m cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 1,500 rpm for 3 minutes, then turn off the
engine.
20. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed.
2 1 . Set the climate control or HVAC control unit to
m a x i m u m heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 1,500 rpm for 3 minutes, then turn off the
engine.
22. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed.
23. Repeat steps 19 through 22 until the coolant level
does not change in the radiator, then install the
radiator cap loosely.
24. Set the climate control or HVAC control unit to
m a x i m u m cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 2,500 rpm for 1 minute.

10-8

158 (70)

122 (50)

i\

i IAII

104 (40)
86 (30)
68 (20)
50 (10)
0
59
(15)

63
(17)

66
(19)

70
(21)

73
(23)

77
(25)

81
(27)

84
(29)

INTERIOR
T E M P E R A T U R E S (C)

26. With the engine idling, make sure you do not hear the
sound of water flowing near the rear heater unit. If
you hear water f l o w i n g , repeat steps 19 through 22
several more times.
27. Install the radiator cap securely.
28. Fill the coolant reservoir w i t h Honda Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 up to the M A X mark on the
coolant reservoir, then add an extra 0.4 L (0.11 US gal)
of coolant.

29. If the maintenance minder required engine coolant


replacement, reset the maintenance minder (see page
3-12). If the maintenance minder did not require
engine coolant replacement go to step 30.
30. Turn the ignition switch to LOOK (0).
3 1 . Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
32. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
33. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see
page 11-226).
34. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL w i t h the
HDS.
35. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES w i t h the HDS.
36. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
w i t h the HDS.
37. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the
HDS.
38. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET w i t h the
HDS.
39. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
40. Inspect for engine coolant leaks.

10-9

Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page 20-210).
3. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-95).
4. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page 5-3).
5. Remove the thermostat cover, then remove the thermostat.

6. Install the new thermostat (with the pin up) w i t h a new rubber seal, then install the thermostat cover.
7. Install the battery base (see step 56 on page 5-19).
8. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).
9. Install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve open (see page
10-6).
11. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
12. Inspect for engine coolant leaks.

10-10

Water Passage Replacement


1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Remove the air intake duct (see step 1 on page
20-210).

7. Disconnect the water bypass hoses (A) and the heater


hose (B).

3. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-95).


4. Remove the battery base (see step 9 on page 5-3).
5. Remove the intake air duct (see step 7 on page 5-3).
6. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the lower
radiator hose (B), the engine coolant temperature
(ECT) sensor 1 connector (C), and the exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) valve connector (D).

8. Remove the EGR pipe (see page 11-394).

(cont'd)

10-11

Cooling System
Water Passage Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove the water passage and the related parts.
EXHAUST G A S
RECIRCULATION
(EGR) V A L V E

8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
ENGINE COOLANT
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT)
SENSOR 1

GASKETS
Replace.

12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.9 Ibfft)


O-RING
Replace.

^ 8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

WATER P A S S A G E

8 x 1.25 m m
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

O-RING
Replace.

O-RING
Replace.

10. Install the water passage and the related parts.


11. Install the Intake air duct (see step 58 on page 5-19).
12. Install the battery base (see step 56 on page 5-19).
13. Do the battery installation procedure (see page 22-95).
14. Install the air intake duct (see page 20-210).
15. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air f r o m the cooling system with the heater valve open (see page
10-6).
16. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
17. Inspect for engine coolant leaks.

10-12

Radiator and Fan Replacement


NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.

6. Unclamp the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)


cooler hose clamps (A) and loosen the A/C condenser
fan shroud mounting bolts (B).

To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug


the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact any other wiring
or hoses, or interfere with any other parts.
1. Remove the front grille (see page 20-210).
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
4. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-225).
5. Remove the harness clamp (A) f r o m the radiator fan
shroud.
7 N-m
(0.7 k g f m , 5 Ibfft)

7. Lower the vehicle on the lift.


8. Disconnect the radiator fan motor connector (A) and
the radiator upper hose (B), then remove the harness
clamps (C).

(cont'd)

10-13

Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont'd)
9. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan motor connector
(A) and the coolant reservoir hose (B), then remove
the harness clamps (C).

11. Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly (A),


then remove the radiator fan shroud assembly (B).
NOTE: Move the radiator fan shroud assembly toward
the A/C compressor side of the vehicle to allow for
enough space to lift it up and away f r o m the A/C
condenser fan shroud assembly.

10. Remove the bulkhead bracket mounting bolt/nut (A)


and the upper brackets/cushions (B), then disconnect
the coolant reservoir hose (C).

12. Disassemble the fan shrouds.


4Nm
(0.4 k g f m ,
^3 Ibfft)

6 x 1.0 m m
10 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

10-14

A
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

13. Raise the vehicle on the lift.

17. Remove the related parts f r o m the radiator.

14. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)


sensor 2 connector (A), the ATF cooler hoses (B), the
lower radiator hose (C) and remove the ATF cooler
hose brackets (D).

18. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.


Make sure the upper and lower mounting cushions
are set securely.
19. Fill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air
f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve open
(see page 10-6).

6 x 1.0 mm
7 N m (0.7 k g f m ,
5 Ibfft)

20. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.


21. Inspect for engine coolant leaks.

15. Lower the vehicle on the lift.


16. Pull up the radiator assembly (A), then remove the
lower mounting cushions (B).

10-15

Fan Controls
Component Location Index

ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 1
Replacement page 11 -243

10-16

ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2
Replacement page 11 -243

Symptom Troubleshooting Index


Symptom

Engine overheats

The radiator fan does not run at


high speed.
Both the radiator fan and the A/C
condenser fan do not run at low
speed.
The A/C condenser fan does not
run at high speed.

Diagnostic Procedure
1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-6).
2. Check for engine coolant leaks (from gaskets,
hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the
radiator and A/C condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan
shroud.
6. Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan
relays (see page 22-96).
7. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
8. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect the water p u m p (see page 10-5).
10. Check for clogged or deteriorated radiator
hoses.
11. Check for a clogged heater core or hoses.
12. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting
(see page 10-19).
Radiator and A/C condenser fans low speed
circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-65).
A/C condenser fan high speed circuit
troubleshooting (see page 21-69).

Also check for


Proper radiator and
condenser fan
control and operation

Cleanliness
tightness of
connectors
Cleanliness
tightness of
connectors
Cleanliness
tightness of
connectors

and
all
and
all
and
all

10-17

Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX


B A I IfcnY

No. 1(120 A)

No. 2 (50 A)

-CTXJO

G20

cr\_>-

D1

PGM-FI
SUB RELAY
No. 11 (15 A)

crvo
PCM A3
(STRLY)

No. 15(7.5 A)

No. 7 (30 A)

A/C CONDENSER
F A N DIODE
RADIATOR
FAN DIODE

FAN
CONTROL
RELAY

A/C
CONDENSER
FAN R E L A Y

RADIATOR
FAN R E L A Y
UNDERDASH
FUSE/
RELAY
BOX

BLK

PUR

GRY

BLU

RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR

A/C
/ FAN MOTOR
CONDENSER
F

BLK

G202

ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E N S O R 1

10-18

ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E N S O R 2

STARTER
CUT RELAY

Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting


1. Check the No. 7 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuse(s)

OK?

4. Connect fan control relay 5P socket terminals No. 1


and No. 2 with a jumper wire.

FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T

YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse continues to blow,
locate and repair the short in the circuit between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan motor,
and the under-dash fuse/relay box and the under
hood fuse/relay b o x . B
2. Remove the radiator fan relay and the fan control
relay f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test
them (see page 22-96).

JUMPER WIRE

Terminal side of female terminals

Are the relays OK?


YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the radiator fan relay and/or fan control
relay.!
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.

5. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals No. 1


and No. 2 with a j u m p e r wire.

RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P S O C K E T

RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P S O C K E T

JUMPER WIRE

2
4

Terminal side of female terminals

Does the radiator fan run at high


Terminal side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

speed?

YES-Go to step 10.


NO-Go to step 6.

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.I

(cont'd)

10-19

Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Remove the jumper wires, then check for continuity
between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 2
and body ground.

8. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P


socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 2.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P S O C K E T

FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T

Terminal side of female terminals

1
2
1
2
5 4 3

4 3

I
ii

1 2

BLU

Terminal side of female terminals


RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

Is there continuity?

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between fan control relay
5P socket terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d . H
7. Test the radiator fan motor (see page 10-4).
Is the motor OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page 10-13).

10-20

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor
2P connector terminal No. 2.M

9. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P


socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 1.

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


11. Measure the voltage between fan control relay 5P
socket terminal No. 5 and body ground.

FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T


FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T
Terminal side of female terminals

1
1
2
5

GRY

<|

_L
Terminal side of female terminals

RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

Is there battery

voltage?

Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 12.

Is there continuity?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan
motor, the under-hood fuse/relay box and body
ground (G202).B
NO-Repair open in the wire between fan control relay
5P socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 1.M

NO-Repair oren in the wire between the under dash


fuse/relay box and the under hood fuse/relay b o x . B
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
13. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC).
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
16. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
f r o m damage.
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

(cont'd)

10-21

Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P
socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal A5.
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P S O C K E T
Terminal side of female terminals
1

2
5

PUR

i r Hi
3

11 /
22

I4 I >II7

|S

9 110

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24

>< ><
25

26 27 28

29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39
40 41

/ \ 44

48I 49

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)


Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Update the PCM (see page 11-249) if it does not
have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m
goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250).B
NO-Repair open in the wire between fan control relay
5P socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal

A5.B

10-22

Fuel and Emissions


Fuel Supply System

Fuel and Emissions Systems


Special Tools
General Troubleshooting Information.
DTC Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
System Description
How to Set Readiness Codes

11-2
11-3
11-9
11-16
11-18
11-78

PGM-FI System
Component Location Index
DTC Troubleshooting
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
Injector Replacement
MAP Sensor Replacement
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement.
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
A/F Sensor Replacement
Secondary H02S Replacement
....
CMP Sensor Replacement
CKP Sensor Replacement
Knock Sensor Replacement
ELD Replacement
PCM Update
PCM Replacement

11-81
11-83
11-215
11-225
11-226
11-240
11-242
11-242
11-243
11-243
11-244
11-245
11-246
11-247
11-247
11-248
11-249
11-250

Electronic Throttle Control System


Component Location Index
DTC Troubleshooting
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
Accelerator Pedal Module
Removal/Installation

11-252
11-253
11-289
11-289

Variable Cylinder Management


(VCM) System
Component Location Index
DTC Troubleshooting
Front Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Removal/Installation
Rear Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Removal/Installation

11-290
11-291
11-314
11-315

11-327
11-329
11-335
11-340
11-343
11-343
11-344
11-346
11-348
11-350
11-353
11-355
11-356
11-356
11-357
11-358
11-359
11-360

Intake Air System


C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
T h r o t t l e B o d y Test
T h r o t t l e B o d y Cleaning
A i r Cleaner Removal/Installation
A i r Cleaner E l e m e n t
Inspection/Replacement
Intake A i r Resonator
Removal/Installation
I M T A c t u a t o r Replacement
T h r o t t l e B o d y Removal/Installation

11-361
11-362
11-371
11-372
11-372
11-373
11-373
11-374
11-375

Catalytic Converter System


C o m p o n e n t Location Index
11-376
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
11-377
W a r m U p T W C Removal/Installation . . . 11-379
U n d e r - f l o o r T W C Removal/Installation . 1 1 - 3 8 1

EGR System

Idle Control System


Component Location Index
DTC Troubleshooting
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting....
Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting
PSP Switch Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal
Circuit Troubleshooting
Idle Speed Inspection
PCM Idle Learn Procedure

C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Fuel P u m p Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel Tank D r a i n i n g
Fuel Line Inspection
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Precautions
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Removal
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Installation
Fuel Tank U n i t R e m o v a l a n d
Installation
Fuel Pressure Regulator R e p l a c e m e n t .
Fuel Filter Replacement
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge S e n d i n g U n i t
Replacement
Fuel Tank R e p l a c e m e n t
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation
Fuel Gauge S e n d i n g Unit Test
L o w Fuel Indicator Test

11-316
11-317
11-320
11-321
11-322
11-324
11-325
11-326

C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
EGR Valve R e p l a c e m e n t
EGR Pipe R e p l a c e m e n t

11-382
11-383
11-394
11-394

PCV System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
PCV Valve Inspection
PCV Valve Replacement

11-395
11-396
11-397
11-397

EVAP System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

11-398
11-399

Fuel Cap Warning M e s s a g e S y s t e m


Troubleshooting
E V A P Canister Replacement
FTP S e n s o r Replacement
E V A P Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement
E V A P Canister Purge Valve
Replacement.......

11-426
11-428
11-429
11-430
11-430

Fuel and Emissions Systems


Special Tools
Ref.No.

Tool Number
07406-004000B
07406-0070301
07AAA-S0XA100
07AAJ-S6MA150
07JAZ-001000B
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07NAJ-P07010A
07ZAJ-S5AA200

11-2

Description
Fuel Pressure Gauge
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
Fuel Sender Wrench
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 04 In.Hg,
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m
A/T Pressure Adapter
Pressure Gauge Adapter
Oil Pressure Hose

Oty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

General Troubleshooting Information


Intermittent Failures
The term intermittent failure means a system may have
had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not come on,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out, the
original problem may have been intermittent.

2. If the MIL stays o n , connect the HDS to the data link


connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of
the dashboard.

Service Information
Periodically, new PCM software or new service
procedures may become available. Always check online
for the latest software or service information related to
the DTCs or s y m p t o m s you are troubleshooting.

Opens and Shorts


Open and short are c o m m o n electrical terms. A n open is
a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another
wire. In simple terms, this usually means something
w o n ' t work at all. With complex electronics (such as
PCMs) this can sometimes mean something works, but
not the w a y it's supposed to.

How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic


System)
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A).
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for 1520
seconds (see page 11-78).

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM and
all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the DLC
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-226).
5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot
data, and download any data found. Then refer to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
the first system malfunction, misfire, or fuel t r i m
malfunction that activated the MIL was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
snapshot, current data, and other powertrain
control module (PCM) data.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
that came w i t h the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are f o u n d , go to MIL troubleshooting (see
page 11-225).

(cont'd)

11-3

Fuel and Emissions Systems


General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
If the MIL did not stay on

DTC Clear

If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability


problem, do the s y m p t o m troubleshooting.

1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is


stopped.

If you can't duplicate the DTC

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Some of the troubleshooting requires y o u to reset the


PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not
continue through the procedure. To do so will only result
in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced PCM.

3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait


30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect
the HDS f r o m the DLC.

HDS Clear Command

PCM Reset

The PCM stores various specific data to correct the


system even if there is no electrical power such as w h e n
the battery negative terminal or No. 19 MAIN (15 A) fuse
are disconnected. Stored data based on failed parts
should be cleared by using the CLEAR COMMAND of the
HDS, if parts are replaced.

1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is


stopped.

The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this


purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and CKP
pattern clear. DTC clear c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC
codes, freeze data, the on-board snapshot, and
readiness codes. This must be done w i t h the HDS after
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The PCM reset c o m m a n d erases all stored DTCs, freeze
data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and all
specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If
the CKP pattern data in the PCM was cleared, you must
do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern
clear c o m m a n d erases only CKP pattern data. This
c o m m a n d is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor.

Scan Tool Clear Command


If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,
be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the
PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP
pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
commands, you then need to do these procedures, in
this order: PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326);
CKP pattern learn procedure; test-drive to set readiness
codes to complete (see page 11-78).

11-4

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect
the HDS f r o m the DLC.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

CKP Pattern Clear/CKP Pattern Learn

Learn Procedure (without the HDS)

Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS)

1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on.

1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)


located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with


the throttle fully closed) f r o m an engine speed of
2,500 rpm d o w n to 1,000 rpm with the transmission in
2.
3. Repeat step 2 several times.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.

How to End a Troubleshooting Session


(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
A

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and
all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the DLC
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-226).

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


4. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If
you replace the PCM, it will have a different
immobilizer code. For the engine to start, you must
rewrite the immobilizer code w i t h the HDS.

4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU


w i t h the HDS.
5. Select CRANK (CKP) PATTERN CLEAR, and clear the
CKP pattern.
6. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS,
and f o l l o w the screen prompts.

(cont'd)

11-5

Fuel and Emissions Systems


General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Connectors

4. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the PCM


connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the
terminal you need to check.

NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP


system for up to 30 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0). J u m p i n g the SCS line
after turning the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)
cancels this function. Disconnecting the PCM during this
function, without j u m p i n g the SCS line first, can damage
the PCM.
1. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
2. Remove the cover (D).

5. Connect one side of the patch cord terminals (A) to a


commercially available digital multimeter (B), and
connect the other side of the patch cord terminals to a
commercially available banana jack (Pomona
Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (C).

3. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.


NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
( A = D , B = A , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for
identification.

6. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at the terminal


test port f r o m the terminal side. Do not force the tips
into the terminals.

I NOTICE I
For accurate results, always use the pin probe
(male).
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do
not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or
other substitutes. Damaged terminals cause a poor
connection and an incorrect measurement.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures
can cause poor or intermittent electrical
connections.

11-6

Substituting the PCM

1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)


located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

Special T o o l s Required
Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester
Honda Interface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation
w i t h the latest HDS software version
HDS pocket tester
GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
software version
Any one of the above updating tools can be used.
NOTE:
Use this procedure w h e n you have to substitute a
known-good PCM during the troubleshooting
procedure.
Make sure the HDS/iN workstation has the latest HDS
software version.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and
all other vehicle systems. If it d o e s n ' t go to the DLC
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-226). If you are
returning f r o m DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step
4 and 5, then clean the throttle body (see page 11 -372)
after substituting the PCM.
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue this procedure.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

(cont'd)

11-7

Fuel and Emissions Systems


General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
8. Remove the cover (D).

OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of each
DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to
see if the repair was successfully completed. The results
of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully
finished.
FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of the
enable conditions for the DTC.

9. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.


NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
(A=n, B = ^ , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for
identification.
10. Remove the bolts (E) and the PCM (F).
11. Install a known-good PCM in the reverse order of
removal.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: DTC P0630 (VIN Not Programmed or
Mismatch) may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
13. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
14. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
15. Enter the immobilizer PCM code that you got f r o m the
iN, and use the PCM replacement procedure in the
IMMOBI MENU of the HDS; it allows you to start the
engine.
16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
17. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the
throttle body (see page 11-372).
18. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249).
19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
20. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure.

11-8

DTC Troubleshooting Index


MIL

Note

Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem

ON

P0102 (50)

Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P0103(50)

Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON

P0107 (3)

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P0108 (3)

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON
ON
ON

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-83)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-84)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-86)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-88)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-90)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-92)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-93)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-95)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-97)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-98)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-100)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-253)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-255)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-102)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-103)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-106)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-108)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-112)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-114)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-117)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-118)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-105)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-106)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-108)

DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0101 (50)

Two Drive Cycle


Detection

Detection Item

P0111 (10)

P0112 (10)

Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance


Problem
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

P0113(10)

Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON
ON

P0117(6)

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/


Performance Problem
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage

P0118(6)

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage

ON

P0122 (7)

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P0123 (7)

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage

ON

P0125 (86)

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow


Response
Cooling System Malfunction

ON

P0116(86)

P0128 (87)

P0133(157)

P0134(151)

P0135(151)

P0137(161)
P0138(161)

P0139(161)
P0141 (163)

P0153(158)
P0154(152)

P0155(152)

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1)


Malfunction/Slow Response
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater System
Malfunction
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction
Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage
Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage
Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2)) Slow Response
Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1)
Malfunction/Slow Response
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater System
Malfunction
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction

ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MILto come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.

(cont'd)

11-9

Fuel and Emissions Systems


DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC
(MIL indication")
P0157(162)
P0158(162)
P0159 062)
P0161 (164)
P0171 (153)
P0172(153)

Two Drive Cycle


Detection

O
O
o
o
o
o
o
o

Detection Item
Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary
Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage
Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary
Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage
Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary
Sensor 2)) Slow Response
Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary
Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction
Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Lean

MIL

Note

H02S (Bank 2,

ON

H02S (Bank 2,

ON

H02S (Bank 2,

ON

H02S (Bank 2,

ON

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-112)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-114)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-117)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-118)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-123)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-257)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-259)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-124)

ON

Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Rich

ON

Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Lean

ON

Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Rich

ON

P0222 (07)

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P0223(07)

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit High Voltage

ON

Random Misfire Detected

ON

o
o
o
o
o
o
o

No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ON

Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction

ON

P0335(4)

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No Signal

ON

P0339 (4)

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption

ON

P0174 054)
P0175(154)

P0300 (77)
and any
combination of
the following:
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
P0325 (23)

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-133)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-136)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-138)

NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.

11-10

MIL

NOTE

No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

P0352 (72)

No. 2 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

P0353 (73)

No. 3 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

P0354 (74)

No. 4 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

P0355 (75)

No. 5 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

P0356 (76)

No. 6 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction

ON

P0365 (8)

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit No Signal

ON

P0369 (8)

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption

ON

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-139)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-143)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-146)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-383)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-384)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-385)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-388)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-377)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-377)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-399)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-403)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-404)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-407)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-410)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-410)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-414)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-329)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-329)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-332)

DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0351 (71)

Two Drive Cycle


Detection

Detection Item

P0400 (80)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Leak Detected

ON

P0401 (80)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow

ON

P0404 0 2 )

ON

P0406 0 2 )

P0420 065)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Circuit Range/Performance


Problem
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
Rear Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)

P0430(166)

Front Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2)

ON

P0443 (92)

ON

P0451 (91)

P0452 (91)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit


Malfunction
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

P0453 (91)

Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON

P0455 (90)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected

ON

P0456(90)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected

ON
OFF

P0462

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Fill Cap


Loose or Missing
Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit
Range/Performance Problem
Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage

P0463

Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage

OFF

P0457
P0461

ON
ON

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.

(cont'd)

11-11

Fuel and Emissions Systems


DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0496(92)

MIL

NOTE

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System High Purge Flow Detected

ON

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Low Purge Flow Detected

ON

P0498 017)

ON

P0499 017)

P0506 0 4 )

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit Low


Voltage
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit High
Voltage
Idle Control System RPM Lower than Excepted

P0507(14)

Idle Control System RPM Higher than Excepted

ON

P050A067)

Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem

ON

P050B067)

Cold Start Ignition Timing Control System Performance Problem

ON

P0522 (22)

Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P0523(22)

Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON

Charging System Low Voltage

OFF

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Source Circuit


Unexpected Voltage
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Programming Error

OFF

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Control Module


Malfunction
Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit Malfunction

ON

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-415)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-416)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-419)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-422)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-317)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-318)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-147)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-149)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-291)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-293)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-151)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-152)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-155)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-155)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-156)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-159)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-159)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-160)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-362)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-367)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-161)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-162)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-163)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-164)

Two Drive Cycle


Detection
O

P0497(90)

P0562
P0563

P0602 096)
P060A(131)
P0615*

P062F031)
P0630(139)

Detection Item

ON
ON

ON

OFF

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Control Module Keep


Alive Memory (KAM) Error
VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch

ON

ON

ON

P0685(135)

P1077 (106)

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Control Circuit/Internal


Circuit Malfunction
Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve Stuck in High RPM Position

P1078 (106)

Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve Stuck in Low RPM Position

ON

P1109 0 3 )

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High

ON

P1116(86)

ON

P1128 (5)

P1129(5)

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit


Range/Performance Problem
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than
Expected
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected

ON

ON
ON

NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
* 1 : The starter system warning message or starter system indicator may come on.

11-12

DTC
(MIL indication*)
P1172 (157)

Two Drive Cycle


Detection

Detection Item

MIL

NOTE

ON

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-166)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-166)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-167)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-168)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-423)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-426)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-170)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-261)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-263)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-267)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-268)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-171)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-172)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-174)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-176)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-178)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-269)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-272)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-275)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-278)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-279)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-282)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-284)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-285)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-287)

P1174 (158)

PI 297

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of
Range High
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of
Range High
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low Voltage

PI 298

Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High Voltage

OFF

P1454 (91)

ON

P145C (90)

Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance


Problem
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge Flow Malfunction

ON

P1549

Charging System High Voltage

OFF

P1658 (40)

ON
ON

P1683(40)

Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay ON


Malfunction
Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF
Malfunction
Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem

P1684(40)

Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem

ON

P16BB

Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage

OFF

Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage

OFF

Starter Cut Relay 2 Malfunction

OFF

Starter Cut Relay 1 Malfunction

OFF

Starter Cut Relay STRLY Circuit Malfunction

OFF

P2101(40)

Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction

ON

P2118(40)

Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem

ON

P2122 (37)

Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)


Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation

ON

P1659 (40)

P16BC
P16BD*
P16BE*
P16BF*

P2123(37)
P2127 (37)
P2128 (37)
P2135 (7)
P2138 (37)
P2176 (40)

Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A/B (Throttle Position (TP)


Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage Correlation
Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned

ON
OFF

ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
* 1 : The starter system warning message or starter system indicator may come on.

(cont'd)

11-13

Fuel and Emissions Systems


DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P2183 092)

Two Drive Cycle


Detection

Detection Item

MIL

NOTE

ON

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-181)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-182)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-184)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-186)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-186)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-188)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-189)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-189)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-190)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-192)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-190)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-192)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-195)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-197)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-195)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-197)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-200)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-202)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-200)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-202)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-396)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-389)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-423)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-205)

P2184 0 92)

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit


Range/Performance Problem
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage

P2185 092)

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage

ON

P2195 055)

ON

P2197 056)

P2227(13)

P2228(13)

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Signal Stuck
Lean
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Signal Stuck
Lean
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

P2229(13)

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High Voltage

ON

P2237(155)

ON

P2238(155)

P2240(156)

P2241 (156)

P2243(155)

P2245 055)

P2247(156)

P2249(156)

P2251 (155)

P2252 055)

P2254(156)

P2255(156)

P2279(109)

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High
Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low
Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
High Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
Low Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
High Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit
Low Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High
Voltage
Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High
Voltage
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low
Voltage
Intake Air System Leak

P2413(12)

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Malfunction

ON

P2422 017)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck


Closed Malfunction
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Ignition Off Internal Timer
Malfunction

ON

P2610(132)

ON

ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON

NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.

11-14

MIL

NOTE

Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 1) Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P2649 (21)

Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 1) Circuit High Voltage

ON

P2653 (38)

Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid B (Bank 1) Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P2654 (38)

Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid B (Bank 1) Circuit High Voltage

ON

P2658 030)

Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 2) Circuit Low Voltage

ON

P2659(130)

Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid A (Bank 2) Circuit High Voltage

ON

Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit


Range/Performance Problem
Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit
Range/Performance Problem
Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck Off Bank 1

ON

ON

Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck Off Bank 2

ON

F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)))

ON

F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-VTM-4


Control Unit)
F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - VSA
Modulator-Control Unit)
F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Gauge
Control Module)
PGM-FI System and A/T System Program Version Mismatch

OFF

DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-296)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-298)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-300)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-302)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-304)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-306)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-205)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-205)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-308)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-311)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-206)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-207)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-209)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-211)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-213)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-213)

DTC
(MIL indication*)
P2648 (21)

P2A00(157)
P2A03(158)
P3400(114)
P3497(114)
U0029(126)
U0114*

U0122
1)0155(126)
110300(131)
U1101

Two Drive Cycle


Detection

O
O
,.*2

O*

*2

Detection Item

F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Active


Control Engine Mount(ACM))

ON

OFF
ON
ON
OFF

NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when the
SCS line is jumped. The last four characters of these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
*2: One drive cycle detection in ail cylinder activation modes.
*3: Two drive cycle detection when in cylinder pause driving mode.
*4: With VTM-4

11-15

Fuel and Emissions Systems


Symptom Troubleshooting Index
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no DTC,
do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom
Engine will not start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure
1. Test the battery (see page 22-93).
2. Test the starter (see page 4-10).
3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-343).
4. Troubleshoot the fuel p u m p circuit (see page 11-335).

Engine will not start


(MIL comes on and stays o n ,
no DTCs set)
MIL comes on and stays o n ,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set
Engine will not start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls
immediately
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine is hard to start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-226).

Cold fast idle too low


(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Cold fast idle too high
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Idle speed fluctuates
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

After w a r m i n g up, idle speed


is below specification
w i t h o u t load
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After w a r m i n g up, idle speed
is above specification
without load
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After w a r m i n g up, idle speed
drops w h e n steering wheel
is turned
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

11-16

Also check for


Low compression
No ignition spark
Intake air leaks
Locked up engine
Broken t i m i n g belt
Fuel contamination
No power to PCM
No ground to PCM

Low compression
Intake air leaks
Fuel contamination
Weak spark

Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-225).

Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-449).

Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-449).

1. Test the battery (see page 22-93).


2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-343).
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-372).
1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-325).
3. Clean the throttle body, (see page 11-372)
1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -325).
3. Do the throttle position learning check (see page 11 -371).
1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-325).
3. Do the carbon accumulation check, (see page 11-371)
4. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11 -320).
1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit (see page
11-321).
2. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-371).

Incorrect valve
adjustment
Incorrect valve t i m i n g
or clearance
adjustment
Intake air leaks
Incorrect valve
adjustment

1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit (see page


11-321).
2. Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-289).

Intake air leaks

1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


2. Troubleshoot the PSP switch signal circuit (see page
11-322).
3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11 -371).

Power steering system


problems

Symptom
Low power
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -343).

Engine stalls
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-343).
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -325).
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
circuit (see page 11-324).
1. Check the fuel tank vapor control valve hose between
the EVAP canister and fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between the
fuel filler pipe and the fuel tank.
3. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions.
4. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-357).
1. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions.
2. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-357).

Difficult to refuel
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Fuel overflows during


refueling
(No DTCs set)
Fuel cap warning message
stays on
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
HDS does not communicate
w i t h the PCM or the vehicle

Engine will not crank

Also check for


Low compression
Incorrect camshaft
timing
Incorrect engine oil
level
Exhaust restriction
Intake air leaks
Faulty harness and
sensor connections

Malfunctioning gas
station filling nozzle

Malfunctioning gas
station filling nozzle

Troubleshoot the fuel cap warning message system (see


page 11-426).
Troubleshoot the DLC circuit, (see page 11-226)

1. Test the battery, (see page 22-93)


2. Check the starting system (see page 4-5).

Correct HDS soft


ware
Shorted reference
voltage
Shorted reference
voltage

11-17

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description
Fuel and Emissions Systems Diagram

CD FRONT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (BANK 2, SENSOR 1)


REAR AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (BANK 1, SENSOR 1)
FRONT SECONDARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
REAR SECONDARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 1, SENSOR 2)
MANIFOLD A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) S E N S O R 1
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) S E N S O R /
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) S E N S O R
KNOCK SENSOR
THROTTLE BODY
<& INJECTOR
FUEL P R E S S U R E REGULATOR
FUEL FILTER
@ FUEL PUMP
FUEL TANK

11-18

D AIR CLEANER
> INTAKE AIR RESONATOR
5 EXHAUST G A S RECIRCULATION (EGR) V A L V E and
POSITION S E N S O R
D POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) V A L V E
D FRONT WARM UP THREE WAY
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 2)
>i REAR WARM UP THREE WAY
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 1)
) UNDER-FLOOR THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE V A L V E
D EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
P EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE
F U E L TANK P R E S S U R E (FTP) SENSOR
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL V A L V E
) INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING (IMT) V A L V E

11-19

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control Systems
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM).
Self-diagnosis
The PCM detects the failure of a signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit and stores a Pending DTC or a
Confirmed DTC. Depending on the failure, a Confirmed DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle. When a
Confirmed DTC is stored, the PCM turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal sent to the gauge via F-CAN.
One Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit, the PCM stores a Confirmed
DTC and turns on the MIL immediately.
Two Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit in the first drive cycle, the PCM
stores a Pending DTC. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the second drive cycle, the
PCM stores a Confirmed DTC and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit, the PCM ignores that signal and
substitute a pre-programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a Confirmed DTC
to be stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition
W h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the PCM turns on the MIL via the F-CAN circuit for about 15 to 20 seconds to
check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all readiness codes
are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode
After the ignition switch is turned to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0), the PCM stays on (up to 30 minutes). If the PCM connector is
disconnected during this t i m e , the PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery or j u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS after the ignition switch is turned to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0).

11-20

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number

Wire color

WHT

PNK

LT GRN

WHT

Terminal name

Description

Signal

(POWER
SOURCE FOR
SOLENOID VALVES)
SLS (SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID)

Power source for


solenoid valve

With ignition switch ON (II): battery


voltage

Drives shift lock


solenoid

STRLY (STARTER
RELAY)
FANL (RADIATOR
FAN CONTROL)

Drives starter cut relay

With ignition switch ON (II), in P, brake


pedal pressed, and accelerator released:
about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V

Drives A/C condenser


fan relay

PUR

FANH (RADIATOR
FAN CONTROL)

Drives radiator fan


relay

GRN

MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN


RELAY 1)

Drives PGM-FI main


relay 1

BRN

BKSWNC (BRAKE
PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH)

Detects brake pedal


position switch signal

LT BLU

YEL

BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL


POSITION SWITCH)
V G - (MASS AIR
FLOW
(MAF) SENSOR SIDE)

Detect brake pedal


position switch signal
Ground for MAF
sensor signal

VBS0L2

With condenser fan running: about 0 V


With condenser fan stopped: battery
voltage
With radiator fan running: about 0 V
With radiator fan stopped or running at
low speed: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
With ignition switch in LOCK (0): battery
voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake
pedal released: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake
pedal pressed: about 0 V
With brake pedal released: about 0 V
With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage

(cont'd)

11-21

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( ) (49P)

1
2
VB
S0L2
SLS
11
I MO
FPR
22
VSV
29
ETCS
RLY
40
SUB
RLY

30
VSS
OUT
41

10
6
7
8
9
4
3
5
BKSW
NC
BKSW V G ELD
STRLY FANL FANH MRLY
21
14
19
20
17
18
15
13
CSS CSS
ACC AMA AMC ATF>P D3SW APSA APSB VG+ EC)T2
24
25
26
27
28
VCC3
31

STS

SCS

LG3

32

VCC4
SG3
37
34
36
35
33
CKP CMP
NEP OUT OUT VCC7 SG7
44
46
S-NET
W EN
5V

SG4 STRLD
39
38
PSP
SW
FTP
48
419

CANH CA NL

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
10

Wire color

11

GRN

13

YEL

14

PUR

15

ORN

LT BLU

16

PNK

17

BLU

18

PUR

11-22

Terminal name

Description

ELD (ELECTRICAL
LOAD DETECTOR
(ELD))
IMOFPR
(IMMOBILIZER FUEL
PUMP RELAY)
ACC (A/C
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY)
CSSAMA (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID A
SIGNAL)

Drives A/C
compressor clutch
relay
Outputs rocker arm oil
control solenoid B
(Bank 1) drive signal

CSSAMC (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID C
SIGNAL)

Outputs rocker arm oil


control solenoid A
(Bank 2) drive signal

ATPP
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH P
POSITION)
D3SW (D3 SWITCH)

Detects transmission
range switch P
position signal input

APSA
(ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR A)

Detects ELD signal

Drives PGM-FI main


relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)

Detects D3 switch
signal
Detects APP sensor A
signal

Signal
With ignition switch ON (II):
about 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V
(depending on electrical load)
About 0 V for 2 seconds after turning
ignition switch ON (II), then battery
voltage
With compressor ON: about 0 V
With compressor OFF: battery voltage
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank
ON: battery voltage
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank
OFF: about 0 V
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank
ON: battery voltage
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank
OFF: about 0 V
In P: about 0 V
In any position other than P:
battery voltage
D3 switch released: battery voltage
D3 switch pressed: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and
accelerator pedal pressed: about 4.7 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and
accelerator pedal released: about 1.0 V

1)
1)
2)
2)

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A () (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
19

Wire color

Terminal name

Description

GRY

APSB (ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR B)

Detects APP sensor B


signal

20

LT BLU

Detects MAF sensor


signal

21

PUR

22

LT GRN

24

RED

25

ORN

26

WHT

27

BRN

28

GRN

V G + (MASS AIR
FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
+ SIDE)
ECT2 (ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2)
VSV (EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE)
VCC3 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
VCC4 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
SG3 (SENSOR
GROUND)
SG4 (SENSOR
GROUND)
STRLD

29

RED

ETCSRLY
(ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE CONTROL
SYSTEM (ETCS)
CONTROL RELAY)

Detects ECT sensor 2


signal

Drives EVAP canister


vent shut valve

Signal
With ignition switch ON (II) and
accelerator pedal pressed: about 2.3 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and
accelerator pedal released: about 0.5 V
At idle: 1 . 1 - 1 . 6 V
(between VG + t e r m i n a l and
VGterminal)
With ignition switch ON (II):
about 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V
(depending on engine coolant
temperature)
With ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage

With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V

Provides sensor
reference voltage
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Sensor ground

With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V

Sensor ground

Less than 0.2 V at all times

Detects starter cut


relay 2
Drives electronic
throttle control system
(ETCS) control relay

With starter ON: battery voltage

Less than 0.2 V at all times

With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V

(cont'd)

11-23

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
30

Wire color

31

LT BLU

32

Terminal name

Description

Signal

VSSOUT (VEHICLE
SPEED SIGNAL
OUTPUT)
STS (STARTER
SWITCH SIGNAL)

Sends vehicle speed


signal

Depending on vehicle speed: pulses

Detects starter switch


signal

BRN

SCS (SERVICE CHECK


SIGNAL)

Detects service check


signal

33

YEL

34

GRN

Outputs engine speed


pulse
Sends CKP signal to
engine mount control
unit

35

RED

36

LT BLU

37

BLK

38

BLU

NEP (ENGINE SPEED


PULSE)
CKPOUT
(CRANKSHAFT
POSITION (CKP)
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
CMPOUT (CAMSHAFT
POSITION (CMP)
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
VCC7 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
SG7 (SENSOR
GROUND)
PSPSW (POWER
STEERING PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)

With ignition switch in START (III)


position: battery voltage
With ignition switch in any position other
than START (III): about 0 V
With service check signal shorted w i t h
the HDS: about 0 V
With service check signal opened: about
5.0 V
With engine running: pulses

11-24

BLU

With engine running: pulses

Sends CMP signal to


engine m o u n t control
unit
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Sensor ground

With engine running: pulses

Detects PSP switch


signal

At idle w i t h steering wheel in straight


ahead position: about 0 V
At idle with steering wheel at full lock:
battery voltage

With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V


Less than 0.2 V at all times

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( ) (49P)

1
2
VB
S0L2
SLS
11
I MO
FPR
22
VSV
29
ETCS
RLY
40
SUB
RLY

/
/

30
VSS
OUT
41

7
9
3
4
5
6
8
10
BKSW
BKSW V G STRLY FANL FANH MRLY
NC
ELD
17
14
ie
20
21
18
19
15
13
C S S CSS
ACC AMA AMC ATF P D3SW APSA APSB VG+ ECT2
24
25
26
27
28
5

VCC3
31

STS

SCS

32

LG3

VCC4
SG3
37
34
36
35
CKP CMP
NEP OUT OUT VCC7 SG7
44
46
S-NET
5V
W EN
33

SG4 STRLD
39
38
PSP
SW FTP
48
i
CANH CA NL

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
39

Wire color

Terminal name

LT GRN

40

PNK

41

BRN

FTP (FUEL TANK


PRESSURE (FTP)
SENSOR)
SUBRLY (PGM-FI
SUBRELAY)
LG3 (LOGIC GROUND)

44

GRY

46

LT BLU

48

WHT

49

RED

WEN (WRITE ENABLE


SIGNAL)
S-NET5V (SERIAL
COMMUNICATION
FOR IMMOBILIZER)
CANH (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL HIGH)
CANL (CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL LOW)

Description

Signal

Detects FTP sensor


signal

With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill


cap removed: about 2.5 V

Drives PGM-FI
subrelay
Ground circuit for
PCM
Detects write enable
signal
Sends serial
communication signal

With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V

Sends and receives


communication signal
Sends and receives
communication signal

Less than 0.2 V at all times


With ignition switch ON: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
With key removed f r o m ignition switch:
about 5.0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): pulses

With ignition switch ON (II): pulses

(cont'd)

11-25

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (A) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
1

Wire color

BLK/YEL

YEL/BLK

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

BRN
BLK/RED
YEL
BLU
RED
WHT/BLU
BRN/WHT

11-26

BLK

Terminal name
PG2 (POWER GROUND)
VBSOL(POWER SOURCE
FOR SOLENOID VALVES)
IGP (POWER SOURCE)
INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR)
INJ5 (No. 5 INJECTOR)
INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR)
INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR)
INJ2 (No. 2 INJECTOR)
INJ6 (No. 6 INJECTOR)
LSB (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B)

Description
Ground circuit for
PCM
Power source for
solenoid valves
Power source for PCM
circuit
Drives No. 1 injector
Drives No. 5 injector
Drives No. 4 injector
Drives No. 3 injector
Drives No. 2 injector
Drives No. 6 injector
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve B

Signal
Less than 0.2 V at all times
W i t h ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage
At idle: duty controlled
With ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage

With ignition switch ON (II):


current controlled

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (A) (49P)

1
PG2

2
VB
SOL

IGP

INJ1

INJ5

INJ4

INJ3

EL

10

!NJ2

INJ6

LSB

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
11

Wire color

12

BRN/WHT

13

BLU

14

RED/BLU

15

RED

VCENTB1 (VIRTUAL
GROUND BANK 1)

16

WHT

17

RED/BLK

18

BLU

19

WHT/BLK

SH02SB2 (FRONT
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(FRONT SECONDARY
H02S) BANK 2,
SENSOR 2)
TPSA (THROTTLE
POSITION (TP)
SENSOR A)
VCC5 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
IMTM (INTAKE
MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) VALVE
MONITOR)

BLK/RED

Terminal name
IGPLS5 (No. 5
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
IGPLS6 (No. 6
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
VSB1 (VS
C E L L + B A N K 1)
VSB2 (VS
C E L L + B A N K 2)

Description
Drives No. 5 ignition coil

Signal
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
With engine running: pulses

Drives No. 6 ignition coil

Detects rear A/F sensor


(Bank 1, sensor 1)VS
CELL signal
Detects front A/F sensor
(Bank 2, sensor 1)VS
CELL signal
Reference voltage for
rear A/F sensor
(Bank 1,sensor 1)
Detects front secondary
H02S (Bank 2, sensor 2)
signal

With w a r m e d up engine running: about


3.4-4.8 V
With w a r m e d up engine running: about
3.4-4.8 V
With w a r m e d up engine at idle: about
3.4-4.8 V
With throttle fully opened f r o m idle and
w a r m e d up engine: about 0.6 V
With throttle quickly closed:
below 0.4 V

Detects TP sensor A
signal

With throttle fully open: about 3.9 V


With throttle fully closed: about 0.9 V

Provides sensor
reference voltage
Detects IMT valve
position

With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V


W i t h ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
W i t h engine speed above 4,300 r p m :
about 0 V

(cont'd)

11-27

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (A) (49P)

XL

PG2
11
IG
PLS5
"22"
IG
PLS3
29
IG
PLS1
40

10
7
6
3
9
4
5
2
VB
INJ4 INJ3
INJ6
LSB
INJ2
SOL
IGP
INJ1
INJ5
17
16
20
21
12
14
19
13
15
18
VCM
VCE SH02
IG
PLS6 VSB1 VSB2 NTB1 SB2 TPSA VCC5 IMTM SWC LSC
"~2T~ 24
26
28
25
IG VCEN
SH02
PLS4 TB2
SB1
esse
TPSB
34
35 I 36
3T 38
39
30
32
33
31
IG
NC CSSA
PLS2 IPB1 IPB2 SG5 SG1 MAP VCC1 NM
42
45

PG1

LG2 | IG1

CKP [ CMP

CSSB

LJ
Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
20

Wire color

Terminal name

BLU/WHT

21

GRN/RED

22

WHT/BLU

23

BRN

24

RED/WHT

VCMSWC (ROCKER
A R M OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH C)
LSC (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C)
IGPLS3 (No. 3
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
IGPLS4 (No. 4
IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
VCENTB2 (VIRTUAL
GROUND BANK 2)

25

GRN

11-28

SH02SB1 (REAR
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(REAR SECONDARY
H02S) BANK 1,
SENSOR 2)

Description
Detects front rocker
arm oil pressure
switch signal
Drives A/T clutch
pressure control
solenoid valve C
Drives No. 3 ignition
coil

Signal
With ignition switch ON (II) or at idle:
battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II):
current controlled
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
With engine running: pulses

Drives No. 4 ignition


coil
Reference voltage
supply for front A/F
sensor
(Bank 2, sensor 1)
Detects rear
secondary H02S
(Bank 1,sensor 2)
signal

With w a r m e d up engine at idle: about


3.4-4.8 V

With throttle fully opened f r o m idle and


w a r m e d up engine: about 0.6 V
With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (A) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
26

Wire
color
RED/BLU

28

GRN/WHT

29

YEL7GRN

30

BLU/RED

31

GRN

IGPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION


COIL PULSE)
IGPLS2 (No. 2 IGNITION
COIL PULSE)
IPB1 (IP C E L L + B A N K 1)

32

GRN/RED

IPB2 (IP C E L L + B A N K 2 )

33

GRN

34

GRN/WHT

35

GRN/RED

36

YEL/RED

37

RED

SG5 (SENSOR
GROUND)
SG1 (SENSOR
GROUND)
MAP (MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR)
VCC1 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
N M (INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED
SENSOR)

Terminal name
TPSB (THROTTLE
POSITION (TP) SENSOR
B)
CSSC (CYLINDER STOP
SOLENOID C)

Description

Signal

Detects TP sensor B
signal

With throttle fully open: about 4.1 V


With throttle fully closed: about 1.7 V

Drives rocker arm oil


control solenoid
A (Bank 2)
Drives No. 1 ignition
coil
Drives No. 2 ignition
coil
Detects rear A/F
sensor (Bank 1,
sensor 1) p u m p cell
Detects front A/F
sensor (Bank 2,
sensor 1) p u m p cell
Sensor ground

With ignition switch ON (II) or at idle:


about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
With engine running: pulses

With engine running: about 2.05.6 V

With engine running: about 2.05.6 V

Less than 0.2 V at all times

Sensor ground

Less than 0.2 V at all times

Detects MAP sensor


signal

With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V


At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine
speed)
With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V

Provides sensor
reference voltage
Detects input shaft
(mainshaft) speed
sensor signal

With ignition switch ON (II):


about 0 V or about 5.0 V
With engine idling in N: about 2.5 V

(cont'd)

11-29

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (A) (49P)

PG2
11
IG
PLS5
22
IG
PU33
29
IG
PLS1
40

2
VB
SOL
12
IG
PLS6
23
IG
PUS4
30
IG
PLS2
41

PG1

LG2

10

INJ6
INJ1
INJ2
LSB
INJ5
INJ4 INJ3
14
17
20
21
15
18
19
ie>
VCM
VCE SHC)2
VSB1 VSB2 NTB1 SB 2 TPSA VCC5 IMTM SWC LSC
24
25
26
28
VCEN
SH02
TB2
SB1
esse
TPSB
37
39
32
34
35
36
38
33
31
IGP
13

IPB1 IPB2 SG5


42
IG1

SG1

MAP VCC1
45
46
CKP

NM

CMP

NC

CSSA
A9

c s SB

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
38

Wire color

39

GRN/YEL

40

BLK

41

BRN/YEL

42

BLK/YEL

45

BLU

46

GRN

49

GRN/RED

11-30

BLU

Terminal name
NC (OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR)
CSSA (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID A)
PG1 (POWER
GROUND)
LG2 (LOGIC GROUND)
IG1 (IGNITION
SIGNAL)
CKP (CRANKSHAFT
POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR)
CMP (CAMSHAFT
POSITION (CMP)
SENSOR)
CSSB (CYLINDER
STOP SOLENOID B)

Description
Detects output shaft
(countershaft) speed
sensor signal
Drives rocker arm oil
control solenoid
B(Bank1)
Ground circuit for
PCM
Ground circuit for
PCM
Detects ignition signal
Detects CKP sensor
signal

Signal
With ignition switch ON (II) and front
wheels turned by hand: pulses
With ignition switch ON (II) or at idle:
about 0 V
Less than 0.2 V at all times
Less than 0.2 V at all times
With ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage
With engine running: pulses

Detects CMP sensor


signal

With engine running: pulses

Drives rocker arm oil


control solenoid
A ( B a n k 1)

With ignition switch ON (II) or at idle:


about 0 V

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C ( O ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
1

Wire color

Terminal name

BLK

BLU

GRN

YEL/GRN

BLK/WHT

PGM ETCS (POWER


GROUND ETCS)
ETCSM + (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR + SIDE)
ETCSM (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR - SIDE)
IG1ETCS (IGNITION
SIGNAL ETCS)
S02SHTCB1 (REAR
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(REAR SECONDARY
H02S)(BANK1
SENSOR 2) HEATER
CONTROL)
AFSHTCB1 (REAR AIR
FUEL RATIO (REAR
A/F) SENSOR ( BANK
1, SENSOR 1) HEATER
CONTROL)

Description

Signal

Ground circuit for PCM

Less than 0.2 V at all times

Drives throttle actuator

With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V

Ground for throttle


actuator
Detects ignition signal

With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V

Drives rear secondary


H02S (Bank 1, sensor 2)
heater

With ignition switch ON (II):


battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage
With w a r m e d up engine running: duty
controlled

BLK/WHT

Drives rear A/F sensor


(Bank 1,sensor 1)heater

With ignition switch ON (II):


battery voltage
With w a r m e d up engine running: about
0 V or duty controlled

(cont'd)

11-31

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C ( O ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Signal

Terminal
number
7

Wire color

Terminal name

Description

GRN/RED

Drives front secondary


H02S (Bank 2, sensor 2)
heater

With ignition switch ON (II):


battery voltage
With w a r m e d up engine running: duty
controlled

GRN/WHT

Drives front A/F sensor


(Bank 2, sensor 1) heater

With ignition switch ON (II):


battery voltage
With w a r m e d up engine running: about
0V or duty controlled

GRN/RED

S02SHTCB2 (FRONT
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
HEATER CONTROL)
AFSHTCB2 (FRONT
AIR FUEL RATIO
(FRONT A/F) SENSOR
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1)
HEATER CONTROL)
SHD (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE D)

Drives shift solenoid


valve D

10

BLU/RED

With engine running in N, and in D and


2 during no lock-up condition: about 0 V
With engine running in P and R, and in
D during lock-up condition:
battery voltage
With EGR operating: duty controlled
With EGR not operating: about 0V

11

YEL/BLU

12

YEL/BLU

15

GRN/RED

16

GRN/YEL

11-32

EGR (EXHAUST GAS


RECIRCULATION
(EGR) VALVE)
VCC6 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
VCC2 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
SG6 (SENSOR
GROUND)
SG2 (SENSOR
GROUND)

Drives EGR valve

With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V

Provides sensor
reference voltage
Provides sensor
reference voltage
Sensor ground

With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V

Sensor ground

Less than 0.2 V at ail times

Less than 0.2 V at all times

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C ( O ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
17

Wire color

Terminal name

YEL/GRN

18

BLU/YEL

19

RED/WHT

20

BLU/YEL

ATPD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH D
POSITION)
ATPFWD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH FWD
POSITION)
ATPRVS
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH RVS
POSITION)
SHA (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE A)

21

RED

22

BLU/YEL

24

RED/YEL

25

WHT

LSA (A/T CLUTCH


PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A)
POIL (ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE SENSOR)
IAT (INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR)
ATPR
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH R
POSITION)

Description

Signal

Detects transmission
range switch D
position signal input

In D: about OV
In any position other than D:
battery voltage

Detects transmission
range switch FWD
position signal

In D, 2 and 1: about 0V
In any position other than D, 2 and 1:
battery voltage

Detects transmission
range switch RVS
position signal input

In P, R and N: about OV
In any position other than P, R and N:
battery voltage

Drives shift solenoid


valve A

With engine running in R, D (in 2nd and


3rd gears), and 2: battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D (in 1st, 4th
and 5th gears), and 1: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II):
current controlled

Drives A/T clutch


pressure control
solenoid valve A
Detects rocker arm oil
pressure sensor signal
Detects IAT sensor
signal
Detects transmission
range switch R
position signal input

With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.8 V


(depending on engine oil pressure)
With ignition switch ON (II):
about 0.1 4.8 V (depending on intake air
temperature)
In R: about OV
In any position other than R:
battery voltage

(cont'd)

11-33

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C ( O ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
26

Wire color

Terminal name

RED/BLK

27

BLU/BLK

28

GRN/WHT

ATPN
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH N
POSITION)
OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
SHB (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE B)

30

BLU/YEL

32

RED/WHT

33

BLU/YEL

11-34

VCMSWB (ROCKER
ARM OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH B)
ECT1 (ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECT)
SENSOR 1)
TATF (ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR)

Description

Signal

Detects transmission
range switch N
position signal input

In N: about 0 V
In any position other than N:
battery voltage

Detects 2nd clutch


transmission fluid
pressure switch signal

With ignition switch ON (II):


Without 2nd clutch pressure:
about 5.0 V
With 2nd clutch pressure: about 0 V
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 1st,
2nd and 5th gears), 2, and 1: battery
voltage
With engine running in D (in 3rd and 4th
gears): about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) or at idle:
battery voltage

Drives shift solenoid


valve B

Detects rear rocker


arm oil pressure
switch signal
Detects ECT sensor 1
signal

Detects ATF
temperature senser
signal

With ignition switch ON (II):


about 0.1 4.8 V (depending on engine
coolant temperature)

With ignition switch ON (II):


about 0.24.0 V (about 1.8 V a t operating
temperature, depending on ATF
temperature)

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C ( O ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
34

Wire color

Terminal name

Description

WHT/BLK

Detects EGR valve


position sensor signal

With engine running: about 1.23.0 V


(depending on EGR valve lift)

35

BRN

Detects transmission
range switch 1
position signal input

In 1: about OV
In any position other than 1 :
battery voltage

37

BLU/YEL

Detects 4th clutch


transmission fluid
pressure switch signal

38

BLU/WHT

39

GRN

EGRP (EXHAUST GAS


RECIRCULATION
(EGR) VALVE
POSITION SENSOR)
ATP1
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 1
POSITION)
OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH)
SHC (SHIFT
SOLENOID VALVE C)

40

RED/YEL

41

BRN/YEL

With ignition switch ON (II):


Without 4th clutch pressure:
about 5.0 V
With 4th clutch pressure: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II):
Without 3rd clutch pressure:
about 5.0 V
With 3rd clutch pressure: about 0 V
With engine running in D (in 1st, 3rd and
5th gears), and 1: battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 2nd
and 4th gears), D3 (in 2nd gear),and 2:
about 0 V
With engine running, engine coolant
below 140 F (60C): battery voltage
With engine running, engine coolant
above 140 F (60C): duty controlled
Less than 0.2 V at all times

PCS (EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE)
LG1 (LOGIC GROUND)

Detects 3rd clutch


transmission fluid
pressure switch signal
Drives shift solenoid
valve C

Drives EVAP canister


purge valve

Ground circuit for


PCM

Signal

(cont'd)

11-35

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C ( O ) (49P)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal
number
42

Wire color

Terminal name

WHT/BLU

43

WHT/GRN

44

WHT/RED

46

BLU

47

RED/BLU

ALTL (ALTERNATOR L
SIGNAL)
ALTC (ALTERNATOR
CONTROL)
ALTF (ALTERNATOR
FR SIGNAL)
ATP2
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 2
POSITION)
KS (KNOCK SENSOR)

48

WHT/BLU

49

WHT/RED

11-36

I M T + (INTAKE
MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) ACTUATOR +
SIDE)
I M T - (INTAKE
MANIFOLD TUNING
(IMT) ACTUATOR SIDE)

Description

Signal

Detects alternator L
signal
Sends alternator
control signal
Detects alternator FR
signal
Detects transmission
range switch 2
position signal input

With ignition switch ON (II): about OV


With engine running: battery voltage
W i t h w a r m e d up engine running: about
7.5 V (depending on electrical load)
With engine running: about 05.0 V
(depending on electrical load)
In 2: about 0 V
In any position other than 2:
battery voltage

Detects knock sensor


signal
Drives IMT actuator

With engine knocking: pulses

Drives IMT actuator

W i t h ignition switch ON (II):


battery voltage

With ignition switch ON (II):


battery voltage

PCM Electrical Connections


IGNITION COIL
RELAY

FUEL PUMP

To
FAN CONTROL
RELAY

AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
CD STOP/HORN (20 A)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
(2) No. 1 MAIN FUSE (120 A)
No. 12 ACM (10 A)
No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A)
No. 23 BACK UP (10 A)
No. 21 DBW (THROTTLE
ACUTUATOR CONTROL)
(15A)
(7) No. 150IL LEVEL (7.5 A)
(J) No. 11 SUB (15 A)
J) No. 18IGCOIL05A)
i l No. 19 MAIN (15 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A)
No. 3 ACG (10 A)
# N o . 10 METER (7.5 A)
No. 22 VB SOL (7.5 A)
No. 36 HAC (10 A)
@ No. 23 ST CUT RLY (7.5 A)

ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
(ETCS) CONTROL
RELAY

AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
@STS (7.5 A)

(cont'd)

11-37

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

MAP SENSOR
No. 1 INJECTOR

VCC1 B36
B4 INJ1

MAP B35
SG1 B34

No. 2 INJECTOR
B8 INJ2
No. 3 INJECTOR

E2

B7 INJ3

MAF SENSOR

No. 4 INJECTOR
B6 INJ4

VG + A20
VG-A9

No. 5 INJECTOR
IAT C24
<> B5 INJ5

SG2C16

IAT SENSOR

No. 6 INJECTOR

ECT SENS0R1
B9 INJ6

ECT1 C32

CMP SENSOR
KNOCK SENSOR
KS C47

P
VCC2C12

EGR VALVE
POSITION SENSOR

1
5

EGRP C34

B45 CKP
EGRC10

EGR VALVE

VCC6C11

IMTMB19
IMT+C48
IMT-C49
IMT
ACTUATOR

l l l l
U

11-38

LU

EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE

EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE

ALTERNATOR

LU
TO H - 9 ? > > r
SPARK
PLUG

ICM
No. 1 IGNITION COIL

To ^ - ( - - { W ^ f
SPARK
PLUG

FRONT SECONDARY H02S


(BANK 2, SENSOR 2)

5:
ICM

No. 2 IGNITION COIL


To
SPARK

3:

No. 3 IGNITION COIL


To < n n r ^ j
SPARK
PLUG

ICM

No. 4 IGNITION COIL


T O <nnr^wSPARK
PLUG
No. 5 IGNITION COIL
To
<nnr^f
SPARK
PLUG

ICM

No. 6 IGNITION COIL

(cont'd)

11-39

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B
(BANK 1)

ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SENSOR
B39 CSSA
POIL C22

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A
(BANK 1)
B49 CSSB
REAR
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
C30VCMSWB
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A
(BANK 2)

ECT SENSOR 2
ECT2 A21
B28 CSSC

FRONT
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH

SG7 A37

A.

B20VCMSWC

FTP SENSOR
VCC7 A36

STARTER CUT
RELAY 1 (STR)

FTP A39

A3 STRLY

11-40

BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH

BKSWA8
BKSWNC A7

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

L_

A48 CANH

O A49 CANL

VSSOUTA30

_ ^ To AUDIO,
^ NAVIGATION UNIT

AA

To IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT

S-NET5V A46 6
NEP A33 <>

DATA LINK
CONNECTOR

A44WEN

LG3 A41 <>

A32 SCS

PSPSW A38 <>

TP SENSOR

Bth-1

AQ

To AUDIO UNIT,
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT *1

To IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT

PSP SWITCH

9B18VCC5
B17TPSA

VCC3 A24

B26 TPSB

APSAA18

<?B33 SG5
? C 2 ETCSM +
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR

C3 ETCSM-

SG3 A26
VCC4 A25
APSB A 1 9 ?
SG4A27?

APP SENSOR A/B

THROTTLE
BODY

*1: With V T M - 4

(cont'd)

11-41

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

TATF C33 <>


A16ATPP

ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR

C25ATPR
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
C17ATPD

SHB C28 ?
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
SHC C39
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C

C19ATPRVS
C18ATPFWD

TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH

rff

SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D

LSAC21 <>

LSBB10

3RD CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
C38 0P3SW

LSC B21
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH

A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE C

C27 0P2SW

NM B37 <>
SG6C15 <>

D3 SWITCH
A17D3SW

A2 SLS

INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR

NC B38
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR

11-42

SHD C9

4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH

To
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT

A34 CKPOUT

CKP 15 6

CSSAMAA14
To AUDIO UNIT
CSSAMC A15

CMP 7

A35 CMPOUT
F

SCPA 6
SCPC 4 <>
IG1 5 <>
IGSOL 10 <>
SOLRLY 11 t>

CANL12

SOLRM 9
SOLRP8
REAR ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR

SOLFM 16 6
SOLFP2 ?
FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT
ACTUATOR
PG 1
LG3

PCM A ( ) (49P)
J 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|

11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22
24
25
26 27 28
i

29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 / I / ! 44 | / l 4 6 | / 48|49|

/
/

>< ><

PCM B (A) (49P)


3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101
J1|2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
26
28
25
29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 42 l / l / l 45146 | X / \ 49

>< ><

PCM C (O) (49P)


3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
Jl|2
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21 i
& l
22
24
25
26 27 28

1
30
3233 34 35L> 37 38 39
|40|41 421431441/| 46147 48|49|
-*i

><

TERMINAL LOCATIONS

(cont'd)

11-43

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PCM Circuit Diagram
PCM

YEL/RED
VCC1

B35
MAP
B34
SG1

- GRN/RED

_r

- GRN/WHT
i

C32
ECT1

- RED/WHT -

YEL/RED

:*!

f"B'"
c

- RED/WHT - ^ l ^ f c f e ~
-GRN/YEL
=-| |
I
ECT SENSOR 1

T.

C19

7 ~
VCC2

YEL/BLU

-YEL/BLU

YEL/BLU

15
C113

p YEL/BLU
Z~i
EGRP
n

WHT/BLK

00

EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR
-YEL/BLU
-WHT/BLK
-GRN/YEL
-BLU/RED
- BLK

12V
-2EGR

BLU/RED

\
I"
\
EGR VALVE

. GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
C16
SG2

GRN/YEL

GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
I - GRN/YEL

0000U0

11-44

C114

C152
C20
SHA

BLU/YEL

<1RP

-YEL

S H IIFT
FT SOLENOID
VALVE
LVE A
C28
SHB

GRN/WHT SHIFT SOLENOID


VALVE B

C39
SHC

- GRN -

W>

- GRN -

S H IIFT
FT SOLENOID
V A LLVVEE CC
C9
SHD

-HHP

-ORN-

GRN/RED

SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D

C21
LSA

RED

B10
LSB

-RED
-BLK
A/T C L U T C H
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A

- BRN/WHT-BLK
A/T C L U T C H
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B

B21
LSC

GRN/RED

- GRN/RED2

-BLK

A/T C L U T C H
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C

[N]

C27
OP2SW

BLU/BLK

- BLU/BLK

-HE

2 N D C L U T C H T R A N S MVI ISI SSISOINO NJl


F L U I D P R E S S U R E S W'ITCH
ITCH
C37
OP4SW

BLU/YEL

- BLU/YEL

-HE

4TH C L U T C H T R A N S M/IIS
I SSSI IOONN
F L U I D P R E S S U R E S W ITCH
ITCH
C38
OP3SW

BLU/WHT

- BLU/WHT

- H E Zt-i

3 R D C L U T C H T R A N S M^I ISI SSISOINO NJI


F L U I D P R E S S U R E S WI ITTCCHH

C33
TATF

BLU/YEL

- BLU/YEL
- GRN/YEL
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

(cont'd)

11-45

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

- YEL/BLK

H5T

B4
INJ1

-BRN
No. 1 INJECTOR
1

- YEL/BLK
B8

r-

RED-

ri

RED
No. 2 INJECTOR
YEL/BLK

H T

INJ3

BLU

-BLU
No. 3 INJECTOR
1

- YEL/BLK
B6

Ha

YEL

r-i

YEL
No. 4 INJECTOR
- YEL/BLK
BLK/RED

INJ5

No. 5 INJECTOR
- YEL/BLK

B9

- WHT/BLU -

WHT/BLU
No. 6 INJECTOR
-YEL/BLK -YEL/BLK -YEL/BLK YEL/BLK -YEL/BLK -

cm

-YEL/BLK B3
IGP

-YEL/BLK YEL/BLK

-YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK

-YEL/BLU
B37

RED

itKFf

GRN/RED INPUT SHAFT(MAINSHAFT)


SPEED SENSOR

B38
NC

~JC15
J " " JSG6~

11-46

RED-

-BLU

-YEL/RED

BLU

GRN/YEL OUTPUT SHAFT(COUNTERSHAFT)


SPEED SENSOR

BLK/WHT
B29
YEL/GRN
IGPLS1

To
SPARK
PLUG

YEL/GRN
BLK

if
B30
BLU/RED
IGPLS2

"No. 1 IGNITION COIL

BLK/WHT

To
SPARK
PLUG

BLU/RED BLK

if
B22
WHT/BLU
IGPLS3

" No. 2 IGNITION COIL


BLK/WHT

To
SPARK
PLUG

WHT/BLU ^ I C M ^

BLK

if
B23
BRN
IGPLS4

No. 3 IGNITION COIL


BLK/WHT -

To
SPARK
PLUG

BRN
BLK

rf~

"No. 4 IGNITION COIL

BLK/WHT

To
SPARK
PLUG

BLK/RED

IGPLS5

BLK
No. 5 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT B12
BRN/WHT IGPLS6

BRN/WHT -

BLK

BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT

C47
KS

: RED/BLU T-^Z

To
SPARK
PLUG

" No. 6 IGNITION COIL

if

if

,cm

18
19_
20
21
22
23
24

C102
RED/BLU

KNOCK SENSOR

(cont'd)

11-47

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

B40
PG1

[ x ] [w] [V]

[D]

[N]

[M]

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK BLK

BLK

BLK

I
PG2

fT]
- BLK - BLK -

- BLK -

" BLK -

- BLK - BLK - BLK-

LG2

- BLK -

BRN/YEL n

C112

- BLK BLK- BLK -

BLKPGM ETCS

- BLK- BLK -

BRN/
YEL

-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL

C41
LG1

-BRN/YEL

BRN/YEL

-BRN/YEL 12.
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL

C112

-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
-BRN/YEL
BRN/ BRN/ BRN/
YEL YEL YEL

BRN/ BRN/
YEL YEL

l4
[p L|]
BLKBLK

BLK BLK

BLKBLKBLKBLK BLK BLKBRN/ BRN/


BLK YEL YEL

G101

11-48

BLK

AH

Al

C113

AF

- YEL/BLK
B46
CMP

GRN

-GRN

BRN/YEL
CMP SENSOR

- YEL/BLK
B45
CKP

-BLU

BLU

BRN/YEL
CKP SENSOR

A20
VG +

IAT SENSOR
LT BLU

GRN/YEL
C102

RED/YEL

RED/GRN
VG-

YEL

BLK/RED
YEL/BLK
MAF SENSOR

C24

- RED/YEL

(cont'd)

11-49

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

A24
VCC3
A18
APSA
A26
SG3
A25
VCC4
A19
APSB
A27
SG4

- RED -

-RED

-PUR -

-PUR

-WHT

WHT

-ORN

ORN

-GRY -

GRY

-BRN

BRN

1
3
2

JL
A

4
6
5

JL
B

T
APP SENSOR A/B

B18
VCC5
B17
TPSA
B26
TPSB
B33
SG5

C2
ETCSM +
C3
ETCSM-

TP SENSOR
-BLU -

BLU

RED/BLK -

RED/BLK

RED/BLU -

RED/BLU

GRN

GRN

BLU

BLU

GRN

GRN

THROTTLE ACTUATOR
THROTTLE BODY

YEL/BLU -

VCC6

WHT/BLK GRN/YEL IMT+


C49
IMT-

WHT/BLU

WHT/BLU -

WHT/RED

WHT/RED -

1
IMT ACTUATOR

B19

11-50

WHT/BLK

LD
- YEL/BLU -

C22
POIL

BLU/YEL

- BLU/YEL - GRN/YEL ROCKER ARM


OIL PRESSURE
SENSOR

C30
BLU/YEL
VCMSWB

BLU/YEL
REAR ROCKER ARM OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH

B39
CSSA

GRN/YEL

- GRN/YEL
BLK
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
B (BANK 1)

0
B49
CSSB

GRN/RED

GRN/RED- BLK
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
A (BANK 1)

AA

GRN/WHT
BLK
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
A (BANK 2)

VCMSWC

BLU/WHT

FRONT ROCKER ARM OIL


PRESSURE SWITCH

(cont'd)

11-51

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

AB

JZL

C102
A16

BLU/WHT - PNK -

-PNK-

- BLU/BLK WHT

ATPR
ATPN
C17

WHT -

-RED/BLK -YEL/GRN -BLU

RED/BLK -

BRN
- RED/WHT -

YEL/GRN -

-BLU/YEL -

C46
ATP2

-BLU

C35
ATP1

BRN

-BLK
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH
BLU

C19
RED/WHT ATPRVS
C18
BLU/YEL
ATPFWD

C305
D3SW

BLU

BLU
BLK
D3 SWITCH

G403

A30

r BLU

YEL

A46

11-52

To AUDIO,
NAVIGATION UNIT

To VTM-4
CONTROL UNIT *1

NEP

YEL

* 1 : With V T M - 4

r LT BLU

To AUDIO UNIT
To MICU,
- IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT

C301
ECT2

PUR
ECT SENSOR 2

A37
SG7

BLK

A36
VCC7

LT BLU

FTP

A22
VSV

LT GRN
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE

LT GRN

-O

LT BLU
LT GRN
BKSWNC
AL

AM

pedal pressed: closed


pedal released: open
pedal pressed: open
pedal released: released

BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH

AN

PSPSW

Brake
Brake
Brake
Brake

BLU
- BLK
PSP SWITCH

G202

To IMMOBILIZERKEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT

LG3

C305
SLS

PNK

PNK
YEL
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID

(cont'd)

11-53

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

AC

B13

BLU -

VSB~1"

RED -

B15
RED
VCENTB1

GRN- BLK/WHT -

B31
IPB1

GRN -

- WHT/BLK -

mI
REAR A/F SENSOR
(BANK 1, SENSOR 1)

B14

"RED/BLU :

' RED/BLU

VSB2

RED/WHT -

B24
VCENTB2

-GRN/RED
GRN/WHT

B32
IPB2

GRN/RED -

WHT/BLK -

VWI
FRONT A/F SENSOR
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1)

WHT/BLK
C6
AFSHTCB1

BLK/WHT -

- WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK

C8
AFSHTCB2

WHT/BLK
C102

111
PNK

AQ

11-54

AR

AS

cm

@ 0 LH H
B25
:GRN
SH02SB1
B16
SH02SB2

C5
S02SHTCB1

C7
S02SHTCB2

: WHT

4
REAR SECONDARY H 0 2 S
( B A N K 1, S E N S O R 2)

BLK/WHT

GRN/RED

FRONT SECONDARY H02S


( B A N K 2, S E N S O R 2)

ALTL
C44
ALTF
C43

WHT/GRN

WHT/GRN

ALTERNATOR

RED/YEL

RED/YEL

PCS

BLK/YEL
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE

B2
VBSOL

BLK/YEL

BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
C102
LT GRN

C113
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL

(cont'd)

11-55

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX

AQ

PNK

YEL/BLK
3
1 C102
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY

ETCSRLY

IT
IT

A4
FANL
A6
MRLY

F6

ORN
WHT

F7

A5
FANH

GRN

F9

A40
SUBRLY

PNK

F16

PUR

A13
ACC

FAN
CONTROL
RELAY

F14

PNK

F18

YEL

F20

YEL

F15
F8

BRN

F5

RED

A/C
CONDENSER
FAN RELAY

IGNITION
COIL
RELAY

AU AV

C102

IG1ETCS

-c~o-

YEL/GRN
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY 1
-PNK
- WHT-

PGM-FI
SUBRELAY
ORN

J ELD

BLU
YEL
YEL

UNDER-HOOD
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX:
(DNo.21 DBW (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 A)
d)No. 12 ACM (10 A)
d)No. 18 IG COIL (15 A)
@No. 19 MAIN (15 A)
N o . 11 S U B (15 A)
N o . 15 OIL L E V E L (7.5 A)
N o . 2 IG MAIN (50 A)
d)No. 23 BACK UP (10 A)
()No. 1 MAIN F U S E (120 A)
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX:
Mo. 11 S T O P / H O R N (20 A)

11-56

PNK
ORN

m
D7
D1_

A/C COMPRESSOR

LT GRN
-ORN
-BLK

BLU YEL YEL PNK ORN ^

MJBT
rLE^vHr

.A.
AW AX

^ 3 CLUTCH RELAY

L-L_

D4
D6

AY

AZ

BA

BB

G202

BATTERY ^

BRN-

AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

-,2
FUELPUMP

]7-

C307
T U

YEL

AJ

~h

AIM

dp

A'

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY B O X

AX

TTTT^^"^

BLK ^

'

LTGRN

-c~o

"IT

3*.

IT

PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 2
(FUELPUMP)

LT GRN
JSTRLY

M22 L i

ii 1

LoT5-

-LJ

i ^ W -

C4
LT GRN
GRN

STARTER CUT
RELAY 1 (STR)

WHT-

BRN
C304
LT GRN

l-^J

BLU/WHT -

D l l l r t A / U T

H - P N K ^ L

20

P7jBLU/WHT H

STARTER
CUT RELAY 2

WHT"- 4 _
A28
"STRTD"

GRN

A31

_srT"

Q15

YEL

l t b l u

LT BLU

Q9

MICU

Q8
Q7
Q5

L T

BLU

IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)

>

IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT

LTBLU

UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX:
No. 3ACG(10A)
N o . 22 VB S O L 2 (7.5A)
@ N o . 2 F U E L PUMP (15 A)
@ N o . 10 METER (7.5 A)
@ N o . 36 HAC (10 A)
N o . 23 S T C U T RLY 1 (7.5 A)
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH F U S E HOLDER:
S T S (7.5 A)

[BH

(cont'd)

11-57

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)

H N S

TTT_

YEL

IG1

YEL

IGSOL
11
SOLRLY
14
WHTCANH
12
RED
CANL
6
PUR
SCPA
4
LT BLU <
SCPC
15
GRN
CKP
7
RED
CMP
8
WHTSOLRP
9
GRN
SOLRM
2
BLU
SOLFP
16
RED
SOLFM
1
BLK
BRN

Bj]

h1

CSSAMA

[BK|

PUR -

A15
LTBLUCSSAMC
A34
GRN
CKPOUT
A35
RED
CMPOUT

BLK

ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
UNIT

LG

G202

REAR
ENGINE MOUNT
ACTUATOR

C302
RED-

PNK-

BLU-

BLU-

FRONT
ENGINE MOUNT
ACTUATOR

PUR-To AUDIO UNIT


LT BLU

11-58

M: With VTM

C402

VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT

11-59

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
PGM-FI System

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor

The p r o g r a m m e d fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a


sequential multiport fuel injection system.

The CMP sensor input is used by the PCM to determine


ignition t i m i n g at start up (cranking) and w h e n crank
angle is abnormal.

Alternator Control
The alternator signals the PCM during charging.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the PCM receives a demand for cooling f r o m the
A/C system, it delays the compressor f r o m being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth
transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor
The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
A/F sensor is installed upstream of the WU-TWC, and it
sends signals to the PCM which varies the duration of
fuel injection accordingly.

MAGNET

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor


The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
the PCM to determine ignition t i m i n g , timing for the fuel
injection of each cylinder, and engine misfire detection.

ZIRCONIA
ELEMENT

,XETL

MAGNET

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor


The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that is used
by the PCM to modify the basic duration of the fuel
injection discharge.

TERMINAL
O-RING

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2


ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the
engine coolant temperature increases.

THERMISTOR

O-RING

11-60

Ignition Timing Control

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic ignition timing


at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
pressures. It also adjusts the t i m i n g according to engine
coolant temperature.

The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure


into electrical signals to the PCM.

Injector Timing and Duration


The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out f r o m the m e m o r y , is further modified by signals
sent f r o m various sensors to obtain the final discharge
duration.
By monitoring long term fuel t r i m , the PCM detect long
t e r m malfunctions in the fuel system and sets
(diagnostic trouble codes) if needed.
Knock Sensor
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to
minimize knock.

TERMINAL

PIEZO
ELEMENT

O-RING

Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature


(IAT) Sensor
The mass a i r f l o w (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature
(IAT) sensor contains a hot wire, a cold f i l m and a
thermistor. The sensor is in the intake air passage. The
resistance of the hot wire, cold f i l m , and the thermistor
change due to intake air temperature and air flow. The
control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to
keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The current is
converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to
the PCM.

DIAPHRAGM

GASKET

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation


to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of
the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If
the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has been
reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to
complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the
vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be finished.

HOTWIRE
IAT S E N S O R
(THERMISTOR)

f] 6

COLD FILM

To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn


the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine.
The MIL will come on for 15 20 seconds. If it then goes
off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashes five
times, one or more readiness codes are not set to
complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the
engine as described in the procedures (see page 11-78).
(cont'd)

11-61

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor
This sensor detects countershaft speed.
TERMINAL
MAGNET

O-RING

Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S)


The secondary H 0 2 S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the w a r m up three way
catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the
PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal
heater. The PCM compares the H02S output w i t h the A/F
sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The
secondary H02S is on the WU-TWC.
ZIRCONIA

SENSOR

HEATER
TERMINALS

11-62

Starter Control System Diagram


The starter control system controls the starter motor.
When the ignition switch is turned to START (III), the PCM applies current to starter cut relay 1 (STR) and starter cut
relay 2, then battery voltage is applied to the starter motor to run it.
Once the ignition switch is released, the PCM keeps the starter motor running until the engine starts. If the PCM
detects that the engine starts, the PCM stops appling current to the relays, and the starter motor stops.
If you turn the ignition switch t o START (III) position while the engine is running, the starter motor does not operate.
In the following cases, the PCM stops the starter motor;
- After the starter motor operates for 10 seconds (to prevent the starter motor f r o m overheating).
- If the engine rpm is too high during starter motor operation.
If there is a problem with the starter control system, a message appears on the gauge display. When the warning
message is turned o n , the vehicle can only be started by turning and holding the ignition switch in the start position
until the engine.

IG MAIN
(50 A) F U S E
O ^ O

STRLY
(CONTROL)

-<j From BATTERY

STS
(7.5 A) F U S E
From IGNITION SWITCH
(START (III) SIGNAL)

STARTER
CUT RELAY 1
(STR)

STRLD
_/s
(SIGNAL) ^
ST CUT
RELAY 1
(7.5 A) F U S E

STARTER
C U T RELAY 2

STARTER(
MOTOR

M
v

/ T 5 N TRANSMISSION
I J ) RANGE SWITCH
V O y (Closed: P or N)

77T

CHECK

STARTER
SYSTEM STARTER

SYSTEM

Multi-information
display model

Odometor/
outside temperature
display model

11-63

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Throttle Control System

Throttle Body

The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic


throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
see a functional layout of the system.

The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The


lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant f r o m the cylinder head to prevent icing of the
throttle plate.

Idle control: When the engine is idling, the PCM controls


the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle speed
according to engine loads.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is
pressed, the PCM opens the throttle valve depending on
the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal.
Cruise control: The PCM controls the throttle actuator to
maintain the set speed w h e n cruise control is operating.
The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control
actuator.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
varies the signal voltage to the PCM whitch then controls
the throttle position.

11-64

Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram


The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, the electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the PCM.

11-65

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Variable Cylinder Management (VCM) System
The VCM system activates the cylinders based o n the driving condition. The system has three modes: 6 cylinder mode
(all cylinder operation), 4 cylinder mode (pauses the No. 3 and No. 4 cylinders), and 3 cylinder mode (pauses the rear
bank of cylinders No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3). Cylinders No. 5 and No. 6 are not controlled by the VCM system and operate in
all modes. On paused cylinders, the intake and exhaust valves are kept closed. Since the valves are closed, the frictional
losses f r o m the valve spring compression and pumping are reduced because no air is compressed in the cylinder. This
reduces engine drag.

S3*

VEHICLE
SPEED

IDLING

ACCELERATION

CRUISE

DECELERATION

CRUISE

11-66

| IDLING

ACCELERATION

CRUISE;

ACCELERATION

CRUISE

k
FUEL
CUT

6 CYLINDER DRIVE

DECELERATION

3 CYLINDER DRIVE

FUEL
CUT
6 CYLINDER
DRIVE

3
CYLINDER 4 CYLINDER DRIVE
DRIVE

VCM System-Operation
During 6 Cylinder M o d e
With rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1), B (Bank 1), and A (Bank 2) OFF, the rocker arm oil control valves direct oil
pressure. Oil pressure enters the secondary rocker arm f r o m the oil passage in the rocker shaft, and it moves the VTEC
switching piston, sliding it into the primary rocker arm and locking primary rocker arms and secondary rocker arms
together. The rocker arms are lifted by the camshaft, and all cylinders are active.
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM A
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM A

SECONDARY
ROQKER ARM B
PRIMARY

REAR ROCKER ARM


OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B (BANK 1)
REAR ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL V A L V E

REAR BANK
(BANK 1)

SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 1)

From
OIL PUMP

ROCKER ARM
OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R

FRONT BANK
(BANK 2)

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK

ROCKER
SHAFT

FRONT ROCKER ARM


OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH
FRONT ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL V A L V E

(cont'd)

11-67

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
During 4 Cylinder Mode
When rocker arm oil control solenoid B (Bank 1) and A (Bank 2) are turned on by the PCM, the front and rear rocker arm
oil control valves switch the oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters the No. 3 and No. 4 cylinder's primary rocker arm f r o m
the oil passage in the rocker shaft, causing the VTEC switching piston to slide into the secondary rocker arm and against
the return spring. This disengages the primary rocker arm f r o m the secondary rocker arm to stop valve activation. The
No. 3 and No. 4 cylinder's rocker arms do not move, and the No. 3 and No. 4 cylinders are paused. In the No. 1 and No. 2
cylinders, oil pressure f r o m the rear rocker arm oil control valve locks the primary rocker arms and secondary rocker
arms together. The rocker arms are moved by the camshaft, and t w o cylinders (No. 1 and No. 2) are active to operate
with cylinders No. 5 and No. 6 to create the four cylinder mode.
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM A
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM A

SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM B
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM B >

RETURN SPRING

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B (BANK 1)
REAR ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL V A L V E

REAR BANK
(BANK 1)

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 1)
ROCKER ARM
OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R
FRONT BANK
(BANK 2)

ROCKER
SHAFT

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 2)

FRONT ROCKER ARM


OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH
FRONT ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL V A L V E

11-68

RETURN SPRING

During 3 Cylinder M o d e
W h e n rocker arm oil control solenoid A (Bank 1) is turned on by the PCM, the rear rocker arm oil control valve switches
the oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters the rear bank cylinder's primary rocker arms f r o m the oil passage in the rocker
shaft, causing the VTEC switching piston to slide into the secondary rocker arms and against the return spring. This
disengages the primary rocker arms f r o m the secondary rocker arms to stop valve activation. The rear bank cylinder's
(No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3) rocker arms do not move, and rear bank cylinders are paused. At the front bank, oil pressure
f r o m the front rocker arm oil control valve locks the No. 4 cylinder's primary and secondary rocker arms together. The
No. 4 cylinder's rocker arms are moved by the camshaft, and the No. 4 cylinder is active to operate w i t h cylinders No. 5
and No. 6 to create the three cylinder mode.
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM A
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM A

SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM B
'PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM B

RETURN SPRING

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID B (BANK 1)
REAR ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL V A L V E

REAR BANK
(BANK 1)

t
1 I
From \ To
OIL
\ FRONT
PUMP \ B A N K

SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 1)

ROCKER ARM
OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R

From
OIL PUMP

FRONTBANK
(BANK 2)

ROCKER
SHAFT

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A (BANK 2)

FRONT ROCKER ARM


OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH

WW

FRONT ROCKER ARM


OIL CONTROL V A L V E

11-69

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Idle Control System

Fuel Supply System

W h e n the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is o n , the


transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the
power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging,
the PCM controls current to the throttle actuator to
maintain the correct idle speed.

Fuel Cutoff Control

Brake Pedal Position Switch


The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM w h e n
the brake pedal is pressed.
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch signals the PCM w h e n the power
steering load is high.

During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,


current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at engine speeds over 850 r p m . Fuel cutoff
control also occurs w h e n the engine speed exceeds
6,400 r p m , regardless of the position of the throttle
valve, to protect the engine f r o m over-revving. W h e n the
vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine
speeds over 5,000 r p m . On a cold engine, fuel cut occurs
at a lower engine speed.
Fuel Pump Control
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the PCM
grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which feeds
current to the fuel p u m p for 2 seconds to pressurize the
fuel system. With the engine starts, the PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and feeds current to
the fuel p u m p . When the engine is not running and the
ignition is turned to ON (II), the PCM cuts ground to
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which cuts current to
the fuel p u m p .
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2
PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II), to supply battery voltage to
the PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI
main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel p u m p for
2 seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II),
and w h e n the engine is cranking or running.

11-70

Intake Air System


Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Value
Engine power is adjusted by opening and closing the intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve. When the valve is closed, there
is high torque at low engine speed. When the valve is open, there is high torque at high engine speed.
The intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator contains a sensor that detects the IMT valve position and sends it to the PCM.

IMT V A L V E

11-71

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Catalytic Converter System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC)


and Under-floor Three Way Catalytic Converter
(Under-floorTWC)

Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of


the system.

The WU-TWC/Under-floor TWC converts hydrocarbons


( H Q , carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C0 ),
nitrogen (N ), and water vapor.
2

WU-TWC

WARM UP THREE WAY


C A T A L Y S T FRONT
(BANK 2)

FRONT OF
VEHICLE

UNDER-FLOOR TWC

HOUSING

FRONT O F
VEHICLE

11-72

UNDER-FLOOR
T H R E E WAY
CATALYST

EGR Valve
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures
and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold
and into the combustion chambers.

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram


The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas t h r o u g h the EGR pipe and the
intake manifold, and into the combustion chambers. Routing the exhaust gas through the EGR pipe helps to prevent
carbon deposits f r o m f o r m i n g in the intake manifold and the throttle body. The PCM m e m o r y includes the ideal EGR
valve position for varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares it
w i t h the ideal lift in its m e m o r y (based on signals sent f r o m other sensors). If there is any difference between the t w o , the
PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.

EGR V A L V E
POSITION
SENSOR

VARIOUS
SENSORS

EGR PIPE

FRONT W U - T W C

11-73

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System

The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses f r o m escaping


into the atmosphere by venting t h e m into the intake
manifold.

Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of


the system.

PCV V A L V E

EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor f r o m
the fuel tank until it can be purged f r o m the EVAP
canister into the engine and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is below 140F
(60C) the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
OUT

t
MOVING
CORE

11-74

Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into


an electrical input to the PCM.

The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP


canister.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting
of the EVAP canister.

S E N S O R UNIT
/

TERMINAL
VALVE

O-RING

O-RING

(cont'd)

11-75

Fuel and Emissions Systems


System Description (cont'd)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping into the atmosphere. Vapor f r o m the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged f r o m the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging
vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever the engine coolant temperature is
above 140 F (60 C).
During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens f r o m pressure in the fuel tank and feeds the fuel vapor to the
EVAP canister.
FTP S E N S O R

11-76

Fuel Cap Warning Message

Odometer/outside temperature display model

The PCM will detects a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an


evaporative system leak and alerts the driver by
showing a w a r n i n g message in the gauge display.
The first t i m e a leak is detected, a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
(multi-information display model) (CHECK FUEL CAP
(odometer/outside temperature display model))
message appears on the gauge display (A). To scroll to
another message, press the select/reset button. The
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP/CHECK FUEL CAP message
appears each time y o u restart the engine until the
system turns the message off. Turn the engine off, then
replace or tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least
once.

S h o w s CHECK F U E L CAP
in the gauge display.

Multi-information display model

To make message go off (with the HDS)


Procedure
S h o w s TIGHTEN F U E L CAP
in the gauge display.

1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.


2. Clear the Pending DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Verify there is no leak by doing an EVAP FUNCTION
TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.

To make the message go off (without the


HDS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. Start the engine, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0).
3. Repeat step 2 t w o more times.

11-77

Fuel and Emissions Systems


How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication
(In relation to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of
the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If
the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has been
reset, these readiness codes are reset to incomplete. In
some states, part of the emissions testing is to make
sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are
not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the emission
test, or the test cannot be finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine.
The MIL will come on for 1520 seconds. If it then goes
off, the readiness codes are set to complete. If it flashes
five times, one or more readiness codes are not set to
complete. To set readiness codes f r o m incomplete to
complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the
OBD status in the DTC MENU w i t h the HDS (see page
11-8). This screen displays the code, the current data list
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness
testing.

Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness


Code
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK(0)
during the procedure.
All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery is
disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset w i t h the HDS.
Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
traffic may increase the drive t i m e needed to switch
the readiness code f r o m incomplete to complete.
The readiness code will not switch to complete until all
the enable criteria are met.
If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
MIL to come o n , the readiness code cannot be set to
complete until you correct the fault.
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 F (70 C) or more.
IAT SENSOR at 20 F ( - 7 C) or more.
Vehicle speed above 25 m p h (40 km/h).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector
(DLC), and bring up the READINESS CODEs screen for
Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
w i t h short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check
for a Pending DTC w i t h the HDS. If there is no DTC,
one or more of the enable criteria were probably not
met; repeat the procedure.

11-78

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System


Monitor and Readiness Code

Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and


Readiness Code

NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery


is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset with the HDS.

Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)


during the procedure.

Enable Criteria
Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
Engine at idle.
ECT SENSOR 1 and SENSOR 2 between 176 F (80 C)
and 212 F (100 C).
MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).

NOTE:

All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery is


disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset with the HDS.
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 F (60 C) or more.
Procedure

Vehicle speed 0 m p h (0 km/h).


IAT SENSOR between 32 F (0 C) and 212 F (100 C).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
2. Start the engine.
3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the EVAP
TEST MENU.
If the result is normal, readiness is complete.
If the result is not normal, go to the next step.
4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, one or
more of the enable criteria were probably not met;
repeat the procedure.

1. Start the engine.


2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive,
decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
readiness code should switch f r o m incomplete to
complete.
3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS.
If the screen shows complete, readiness is
complete.
If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
step.
4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, the
enable criteria was probably not met. Select the DATA
LIST MENU. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the ALL DATA
LIST with the HDS. If ECT SENCOR 1 is less than 140
F (60 C), run the engine until it is more than 140 F
(60 C), then repeat the procedure.

(cont'd)

11-79

Fuel and Emissions Systems


How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor
Readiness Code

EGR Monitor and Readiness Code

NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery


is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset w i t h the HDS.

Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)


or during the procedure.

Procedure
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The
readiness code should switch f r o m incomplete to
complete.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check
for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the
procedure.

Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code


This readiness code is always set to available because
misfiring is continuously monitored.
Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds
at its current value, if the throttle position changes
more than a predetermined value, or if driving
conditions fall outside the range of any related enable
criteria.

Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code


This readiness code is always set to available because
the fuel system is continuously monitored during
closed loop operation.
Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP
control system, and A/F sensor monitors are active.
Monitoring also pauses w h e n any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes w h e n
the enable criteria is again being met.

Comprehensive Component Monitor and


Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because
the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.

11-80

NOTE:

All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery is


disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM
is reset with the HDS.
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 at 176 F (80 C) or more.
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
2. Start the engine.
3. Drive at a steady speed w i t h the transmission in D, at
5062 m p h (80100 km/h) or above for more than 10
seconds.
4. With the transmission in D, decelerate f r o m 62 mph
(100 km/h) or above by completely releasing the
throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped
during this procedure, go to step 3 and do the
procedure again.
5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
If it is passed, readiness is complete.
If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.

PGM-FI System
Component Location Index

, PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y
(RELAY S O C K E T E)
1

ELECTRICAL
LOAD DETECTOR
(ELD)
Replacement, page 11-248

POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-249
Substitution, page 11-7
Replacement, page 11-250

KNOCKSENSOR
Replacement, page 11-247
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) S E N S O R
Replacement, page 11-246

CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) S E N S O R


Replacement page 11-247
MANIFOLD A B S O L U T E PRESSURE(MAP)
SENSOR
Replacement, page 11-242
M A S S AIR FLOW (MAF) S E N S O R /
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR
Replacement, page 11-242

ENGINE COOLANT
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R 2
Replacement, page 11-243
ENGINE COOLANT
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R 1
Replacement, page 11-243

(cont'd)

11-81

PGM-FI System
Component Location Index (cont'd)

S E N S O R (BANK 2, S E N S O R 1)
Replacement page 11 -244

11-82

S E N S O R (SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 2, S E N S O R 2)
Replacement page 11-245

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit
Range/Performance Problem

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NOTE:

6. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the


HDS.

Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored at
the same time as DTC P0101, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0101.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these parts:
PCV hose
Intake air duct
Air cleaner
Purge (PCS) line
Brake booster
Brake booster hose
Are the parts OK?
Y E S - G o to step 2.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged part(s), then go to
step 15.
2. Check for a loose or damaged air cleaner air duct.
Is it OK?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO-Reconnect or replace the air cleaner air duct, then
go to step 15.
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is there about 0.2 gm/s or 0.5 V?


Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Go to step 13.
7. Start the engine.
8. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm
3,000 r p m .
9. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does the reading

change?

Y E S - G o to step 10.
NO-Go to step 13.
10. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in P
or N) until the radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
MAP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.

Is it dirty?

Does the screen indicate

YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page


11 -373), then go to step 15.

Y E S - G o to step 13.

NO-Go to step 4.

FAILED?

NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent


failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 11 and recheck.

(cont'd)

11-83

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

14. Replace the MAF sensor/I AT sensor (see page


11-242).

NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
18. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.


2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 0 gm/s, or 0.1 V or less

indicated?

ENGINE SPEED

Y E S - G o to step 3.

VSS

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . H

MAP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR
19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0101

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


6. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.

NO-Go to step 20.


20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

IGP (YEL/BLK)

NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor


connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
Wire side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI main
relay 1 and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to
step 19.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

11-84

8. Measure the resistance between MAF sensor/IAT


sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

12. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT sensor


5P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector
terminal A20.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4

Wire side of female terminals I V G + (RED/GRN)

V G + (RED/GRN)
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) V G + (LT BLU)
3 4 5 6 7
a 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
25 ^ 2 6 27 28
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
29 30

1 ^

40141^X144 j/] 46 jj/j 481491

Wire side of female terminals

Terminal side of female terminals


Is there 190-210

kD?
Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 13.

YES-Go to step 25.

N O - G o to step 9.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A20)


and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to step 20.

9. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.


10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
A20 and body g r o u n d .

13. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see


page 11-242).
14. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)


16. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
V G + (LT BLU)

I 2133 |144 15| 516| 617| 718j 198 203 21110 [


/ 24 25
22
26 27 28
29 /
30 31 >< 34 X
37 38 39

J1
11

17. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m


without load (in P or N).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

|40|41 / l /32133
| 4 4 t / 35136
| 4 6 l / 48|49|

Is DTC P0102

indicated?

YES-Reinstall the original MAF sensor / IAT sensor,


then go to step 26.
Terminal side of female terminals

NO-Replace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see


page 11 -242), then go to step 19.

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (A20)
and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 12.

(cont'd)

11-85

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage

20. Reconnect all connectors.

NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


22. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0102

indicated?

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
25. Reconnect all connectors.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.


2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 202 gm/s, or 4.89 V or more

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . B
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.

26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

6. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

7. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT sensor


5P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
terminal A9.

Is DTC P0102

indicated?

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
N O - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5
Wire side of female terminals

V G - (BLK/RED)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)


IE

V G - (YEL)

3 |4 | 5 |6 |7 |8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
24
22
26 27 28
29 30
3233 34 35|36 37 38 39
1401411^X1^441X146^48149

1 ^

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A9)
and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to step 15.

11-86

8. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P).

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

9. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector


terminals No. 3 and No. 4 with a j u m p e r wire.

21. Reconnect all connectors.

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0103

1 2

V G + (RED/GRN)

indicated?

5
V G - (BLK/RED)

J U M P E R WIRE

Wire side of female terminals

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.


12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0103

indicated?

YES-Go to step 20.


NO-Go to step 13.
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242).
15. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
17. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0103

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-87

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

9. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.


10. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


B36 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1.

2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the


HDS.

MAP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR

Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less


Indicated?

1 2

VCC1 (YEL/RED)

Y E S - G o to step 3.

Wire side of female terminals

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAP sensor and the PCM.H
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 In.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less
indicated?

7. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P


connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.

MAP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR

SG1 (GRN/WHT)

VCC1 (YEL/RED)

M2H
Wire side of female terminals

NO-Go to step 8.

11-88

11 12
22 23
1
29 30
|40|41

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
13
16 71 19 20 21
24
25
26
28
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
42|XIXl45|4(J^

1 5

>< >< /

VCC1 (YEL/RED)
Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B36)


and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.

NO-Go to step 7.

Y E S - G o to step 16.

I|1|2

Y E S - G o to step 23.

Y E S - G o to step 12.

Is there about 5 V?

PCM CONNECTOR B ( 4 9 P )

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

13. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -242).

14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

18. Reconnect all connectors.

15. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P


connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


20. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
2 1 . Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P0107
MAP (GRN/RED)

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (B35)
and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.

23. Reconnect all connectors.


24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0107

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

11-89

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data


and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

9. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the MAP sensor 3P


connector.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 Vor
more indicated?

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


11. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.

MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAP sensor and the P C M . H

VCC1 (YEL/RED)

SG1 (GRN/WHT)

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.

Wire side of female terminals

5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2


and No. 3 w i t h a jumper wire.
Is there about 5 V?
MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 16.


NO-Go to step 12.

MAP (GRN/RED)

SG1 (GRN/WHT)

JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of female terminals

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


7. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.

11-90

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

17. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

18. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

15. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal


B34 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3.

19. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


B35 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2.

MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

SG1 (GRN/WHT)

3
MAP (GRN/RED)

Wire side of female terminals

Wire side of female terminals

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

Ji|

11 12

I" I / I

1 3 14 1 5 1 6

22 23 24

17 18

>< >< /
25

10

1 9 2 0 21
26

J 1 | 2

28

2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 | 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9

41

42

\/\A

\5\46\X

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8

22 23 24

1101

25

>< /
26

28

2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4

MAP (GRN/RED)

SG1 (GRN/WHT)
Terminal side of female terminals

11 12 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 18 1 9 2 0 21

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 27.

YES-Go to step 27.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B34)


and the MAP sensor, then go to step 22.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B35)


and the MAP sensor, then go to step 22.

(cont'd)

11-91

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2 1 . Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -242).
22. Reconnect all connectors.
23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
24. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0108

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
27. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit


Range/Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and ECT sensor 1 and 2.
Are the connections

and terminals OK?

Y E S - G o to step 2.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 15.
2. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242).
3. A l l o w the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to cool to the
ambient temperature.

28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

4. Note the ambient temperature.

29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is DTC P0108

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o
step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P


connector, but do not install it.

7. Quickly note the value of the IAT SENSOR in the


DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
8. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR to the ambient
temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more from the ambient temperature?
Y E S - G o to step 13.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor f r o m the 5P
connector.
10. Using a heat g u n , blow hot air on the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor for a few seconds. Do not apply the heat
longer than a f e w seconds or you will damage the
sensor.
11. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install it.
12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does the IAT SENSOR

change 58 F (32 C) or more?

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . B
NO-Go to step 13.

11-92

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page


11-242).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the


HDS.

18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P0111

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less


indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . H
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

(cont'd)

11-93

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
5P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

18. Reconnect all connectors.


19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

|l|2|t|4J5|
IAT (RED/YEL)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the MAF
sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM (C24), then go to step
13.
NO-Go to step 18.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242).
13. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0112

Indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-94

Is DTC P0112

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

7. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the


HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about -40
indicated?

F(40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more

Is about 40 F (40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more


indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector.

YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the P C M . H

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


11. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
5P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector


terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

1 2
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)

IAT (RED/YEL)

IAT (RED/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals

J U M P E R WIRE

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.

Wire side of female terminals

N O - G o to step 16.

(cont'd)

11-95

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

17. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

14. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

18. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

15. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C16 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
terminal No. 1.

19. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C24 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
terminal No. 2.
MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

MAF S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5
IAT (RED/YEL)
S G 2 (GRN/YEL)

Wire side of female terminals

I Wire side of female terminals

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

S G 2 (GRN/YEL)

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

IAT (RED/YEL)

ll

ll

.1 1 I 23 I 4 | 51

6 | 7 | 39 | 1 0 |
11 12
16 17 18 19 20 21 |
24
25
26 27 28
22
1
30
3233 34 3 5 L > 37 38 39 1
|40|41
4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 l / | 4 6 | 4 7 48|49|
U
J

/
/ /
~ c
/

Terminal side of female terminals

1|

| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | S 9|10|
J1|2
1
15
11 12 /
16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25
26 27 28
1
1
32|33 34 3 5 ^ 37 38 39
30
|40|41 421431441^| 46147 48|49|

/I

><

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 27.

YES-Go to step 27.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM (C16)


and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to step 22.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C24)


and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to step 22.

11-96

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


2 1 . Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242).
22. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P0116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit


Range/Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
24. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0113

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

Is about 176 F (80 C) or more, or 0.78 V or less


indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA
LIST w i t h the HDS.
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.

27. Reconnect all connectors.


5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0113

Does ECT SENSOR

1 change 18 F (10 C) or more?

Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and the P C M . B

indicated?
NO-Go to step 1 1 .

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11 -7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

6. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA


LIST w i t h the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Did ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 F (10 C) or more from
the value in step 6?
Y E S - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and the P C M . H
NO-Go to step 11.

(cont'd)

11-97

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).

DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage

12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243).

NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


14. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

L T u r n the ignition switch to ON (II).


15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0116

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less


indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and the P C M . B
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

11-98

10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P


connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

ECT S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR

18. Reconnect all connectors.


19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

2
ECT1 (RED/WHT)

Wire side of female terminals

Is DTC P0117

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor 1
and the PCM (C32), then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243).
13. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0117

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-99

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data


and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

7. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.


Is about 40 F (40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicated?

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Go to step 8.

2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.

NO-Go to step 20.

Is about -40
Indicated?

F(-40

C) or less, or 4.92 V or more

8. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).


9. Remove the j u m p e r wire.

YES-Go to step 3.
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and the P C M . B

11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P


connector terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.

E C T S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR

5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1


and No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.

1
ECT1 (RED/WHT)

E C T S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals


ECT1 (RED/WHT)

S G 2 (GRN/YEL)

JUMPER WIRE

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.

Wire side of female terminals

11-100

NO-Go to step 16.

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

17. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

14. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

18. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

15. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C16 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 2.

19. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C32 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 1.

ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR

ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR

1
Wire side of female terminals J S G 2 (GRN/YEL)

I ECT1 (RED/WHT)
Wire side of female terminals

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

ECT1 (RED/WHT)
Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 27.

YES-Go to step 27.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C16)


and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C32)


and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.

(cont'd)

11-101

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). .
2 1 . Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -243).
22. Reconnect all connectors.
23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow


Response
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

24. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or more.

25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC P0118

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

Is about 0F(-18

C) or less

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the
connections and terminals are OK, replace ECT
sensor 1 (see page 11-243), then go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

27. Reconnect all connectors.

4. A l l o w the engine to cool to 104 F (40 C) or less.

28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

5. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1


reads about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT SENSOR

2 also read about 158 F (70 C)?

29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


YES-Go to step 6.
Is DTC P0118

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . B
6. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
Is the thermostat OK?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the
connections and terminals are OK, replace ECT
sensor 1 (see page 11-243), then go to step 7.
NO-Replace the thermostat (see page 10-10), then go
to step 7.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

11-102

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


10. A l l o w the engine to cool to 104 F (40 C) or less.
11. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1
reads about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT SENSOR

2 also show about 158 F (70 C)?

DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction


NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
L T u r n the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Go to step 1 and recheck.

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

NO-Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e .

3. Make sure the blower switch is off.


4. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is it OFF?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 5.
5. Check the radiator fan operation.
Does the radiator fan keep

running?

YES-Check the radiator fan high speed circuit (see


page 10-19) and the radiator fan relay (see page
22-96). If the circuit and the relay are OK, go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
104F (40 C) or less.
7. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle.
9. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up 68 F
(20 C) or more f r o m the recorded temperature.
10. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
11. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
Did the temperature rise 46 F (8 C) or more?
YES-Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go to
step 12.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . H

(cont'd)

11-103

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
14. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
between 21 F ( - 6 C) and 104 F (40 C).
15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
16. Test-drive at a steady speed between 1575 m p h
(24120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0128

19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
20. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
between 21 F ( - 6 C) and 104 F (40 C).
2 1 . Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
22. Test-drive at a steady speed between 1575 m p h
(24120 km/h) for 10 minutes.

Indicated?
23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Y E S - C h e c k the cooling system, then go to step 19.


Is DTC P0128

indicated?

NO-Go to step 18.


18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 17,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check the cooling
system, then go to step 19. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 14.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 20. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 20.

11-104

DTC P0133: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,


Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response
DTC P0153: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response
NOTE:

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


7. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -244).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and


any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC P0139 and/or P0159* is stored at the same time
as DTC P0133 and/or P0153\ troubleshoot DTC P0139
and/or P0159* f i r s t then recheck for DTC P0133 and/or
P0153*.

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
12. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)

Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to the


front bank (Bank 2).

Transmission in D

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Drive the vehicle at 25 m p h (40 km/h) or less for


5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed of 33 m p h
(52 km/h) or more

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.


3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F(70 C)
Transmission in D
Engine speed between 1,2502,350rpm
Drive the vehicle at 25 m p h (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed of 33 m p h
(52 km/h) or more
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or
P0153* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3
and recheck.

Engine speed between 1,2502,350rpm

13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P0133 andlor P0153

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
N O - G o to step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or
P0153* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
N O - l f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 11.

11-105

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0134: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

DTC P0154: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction

7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.

NOTE:

9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P


connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal
B13(B14r.

Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC P2251 and/or P2254* is stored at the same time
as DTC P0134 and/or P0154*, troubleshoot DTC P2251
and/or P2254* first, then recheck for P0134 and/or
P0154*.

8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

VSB1 (BLU)

Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to the


front bank (Bank 2).

3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)


for at least 1 minute.

V S B 2 (RED/BLU)*

Wire side of female terminals


PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

1 2
4 5 6

VSB1
(BLU)

I j I I

4 5 6 7 89
12 13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20
25
26
22 23
29 30
32|33 34 35|36 37 38
40141

hol
21
28
39

VSB2
(RED/BLU)*

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P0134 and/or

P01541ndicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM.I

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B13 (B14)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).
11. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
for at least 1 minute.

11-106

12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


6P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


21. Reconnect all connectors.
22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
23. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
for at least 1 minute.
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

VSB1 (BLU)
VSB2 (RED/BLU)*

Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 0.2 V or less?

Is DTC P0134 and/or

P01541ndicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
N O - G o to step 25.

YES-Go to step 20.

25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 and/or


P0154* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.

N O - G o to step 13.
13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).

Does the screen indicate

14. Reconnect all connectors.

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to
the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0134 and/or P0154'

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM, then go to step 1.

PASSED?

NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor


connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep idling until a result comes o n .

NO-Go to step 19.


19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 and/or
P0154* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.

11-107

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0135: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction

7. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) f r o m the under-hood


fuse/relay box.

DTC P0155: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0135 and/or

P01551ndicated?

8. Test the PGM-FI subrelay (see page 22-96).


Is the relay OK?

YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Go to step 9.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM.I

NO-Replace the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step 26.

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. Check the No. 11 SUB (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.

9. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.


10. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

Is the fuse OK?


YES-Go to step 7.
I

NO-Go to step 20.

1 2
4 5 6

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there 2.54.0 Q at room


YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 25.

11-108

temperature?

11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between each


terminal of at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector
and body ground.

15. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C6 (C8)* and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

12 3 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 7 | 8
11 12
/ I 1 5 16 17 18 19
24
25
26
22

30
32|33 34 3 5 / 37
|40|41 4 2 | 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7
_ h

><

9|10|
1
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|

AFSHTCB2
(GRN/WHT)*

AFSHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there continuity?
Is there continuity to ground at any of the terminals?
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 12.
12. At the sensor side, check for continuity between A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminal No. 1 and
each of the other terminals in the connector
individually.
A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM


(C6 (C8)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
26.
N O - G o to step 16.
16. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector terminal
C6 (C8)\
A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR
AFSHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)

AFSHTCB2
(GRN/WHT)*

Wire side of female terminals


PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
AFSHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there continuity?

3 |4 |5 |6 |7 8
13 14 15 16 17|18 19
25
24
26
37
29 30
3233 34
40141
44 \ / \ 46 y \

AFSHTCB2
(GRN/WHT)*

9|101
20 21
27 28

38jZL

lJ

481491

Terminal side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 25.


N O - G o to step 13.
13. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C6 (C8)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
26.

(cont'd)

11-109

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
connector terminal No. 1 and PGM-FI subrelay 4P
connector terminal No. 2.
A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

18. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).


19. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal
A40.

+ B (WHT/BLK)
PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR

mi

SUBRLY

Wire side of female terminals

3EF

PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR

+B

Terminal side of female terminals

PGM CONNECTOR A (49P)

1
,

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

~ "

J 1 | 2 j 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 I 9 J10|
|11I/13|14|15|16|17|18|19 20|21| '
22
24
25
26 27 28
29 30j 31J32133j34135136137I38 39
401
44 L / 1 4 6 ^ 48149

YES-Go to step 18.


S U B R L Y (PNK)

NO-Repair open in the wire between A/F sensor


(Sensor 1) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step
26.

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI
subrelay and the PCM (A40), then go to step 26.

11-110

20. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) f r o m the under-hood


fuse/relay box.

25. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).


26. Reconnect all connectors.
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

28. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.


29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0135 and/or P0155*

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .

2 1 . Disconnect the front and rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P


connectors.
22. Disconnect the front and rear secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connectors.
23. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
24. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 and/or


P0155* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 30,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes o n .

+ B (WHT/BLK)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI
subrelay and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
26.

NO-Checkthe under-hood fuse/relay box, and replace


it if needed (see page 22-89). Also replace the No. 11
SUB (15 A) fuse, then go to step 26.

(cont'd)

11-111

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
32. Reconnect all connectors.
33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
34. Start the engine, and let it idle.
35. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0135 and/or P0155

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 34.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 36.
36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 and/or
P0155* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 35, go to
the indicated DTC'stroubleshooting.H
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 34. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep idling until a result comes on.

DTC P0137: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,


Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0157: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked with an asterisk O applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
4. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the P C M . B
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
Y E S - G o to step 9.
NO-Go to step 13.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
11. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

11-112

12. Check for continuity between secondary H02S


{Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)
S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)

19. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)


until the radiator fan comes on.
20. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D

Engine speed between 1,5003,000 rpm

Drive 1 minute or more


2 1 . Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0137 and/or

W i r e side of female terminals

P01571ndicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 22.

Is there

continuity?

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM


(B25 (B16)1 and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 15.
N O - G o to step 23.
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. Replace secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).
15. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 and/or


P0157* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 ,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 19.

17. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.


18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

(cont'd)

11-113

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
23. Reconnect all connectors.
24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
25. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
until the radiator fan comes on.
26. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Engine speed between 1,5003,000 r p m

27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


P01571ndicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then go to step 25. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.

NOTE:
Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked w i t h an asterisk O applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.


3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
4. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
YES-Go to step 5.

NO-Go to step 28.


28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 and/or
P0157* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

DTC P0158: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,


Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Drive 1 minute or more

Is DTC P0137 and/or

DTC P0138: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,


Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage

PASSED?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 27, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 25. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 25.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the P C M . H
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)
S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)*

S G 2 (GRN/YEL)

JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals

11-114

8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

9. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

16. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?

17. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

YES-Go to step 10.

18. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


B25 (B16)* and body ground.

NO-Go to step 19.


10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector.
12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)*
1 2
11 12
22 23
29 30
40 41

n
3 4 I 5I6 I7 I 8
13 14|15 16 17|18 19
24
25
26
31 32 33 3< 35|36 37
42
*5|46|/

S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)
S H 0 2 S B 2 (WHT)*

1 2
3 4
J U M P E R WIRE

><
A/\

9 10
20 21 i
28
38 39
/|49|

>^ /

S H 0 2 S B 1 (GRN)

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 29.

Wire side of female terminals

13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


14. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C16)
and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step 2 1 .

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM


(B25 (B16)*) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 2 1 .
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
20. Replace secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).
21. Reconnect all connectors.
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
23. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

(cont'd)

11-115

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
25. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in P or N)
until the radiator fan comes on.
26. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Engine speed between 1,5003,000 rpm
Drive 1 minute or more
27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0138 and/or P0158

indicated?

29. Reconnect all connectors.


30. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
3 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
until the radiator fan comes on.
32. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158F(70C)
Transmission in D
Engine speed between 1,5003,000 rpm

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

33. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P0138 and/or

NO-Go to step 28.


28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 and/or
P0158* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

Drive 1 minute or more

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 27,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 25.

P01581ndicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11 -7), then go to step 3 1 . If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 34.
34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 and/or
P0158* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 33, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 3 1 . If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, g o t o s t e p 3 1 .

11-116

DTC P0139: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,


Sensor 2) Slow Response
DTC P0159: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Slow Response

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


7. Replace secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).

10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


11. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
until the radiator fan comes o n .
12. Test-drive under these conditions:

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above


158F (70 C)

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

Transmission in D

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000rpm


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.

Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph (88


120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate (with the
throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds.

4. Test-drive under these conditions:


Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F(70 C)
Transmission in D
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 m p h (88
120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate (with the
throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 and/or
P0159* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3
and recheck.

13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P0139 and/or P0159*

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 and/or
P0159* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 11.

11-117

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0141: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction

7. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) f r o m the under-hood


fuse/relay box.

DTC P0161: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,


Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0141 and/or P016V

indicated?

8. Test the PGM-FI subrelay (see page 22-96).


Is the relay OK?

YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Go to step 9.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and
the P C M . I

NO-Replace the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step 25.

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. Check the No. 11 SUB (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 19.

11-118

9. Disconnect the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) 4P


connector.

10. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between


H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and
No. 4.

SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

12. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.


13. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
C5 (C7)* and body g r o u n d .
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

1 2
3 4
i

i
4 | e

<?

9 | -101
6 | 19
7 20821
16 17|18
24
22
25
26 27 28
30
3233 34 3 5 L / 37 38 39 1
48|49|
|40|41
3

11 12

& l

/ ><

42143144 Lx^i 46147

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there 5.4 7.3 O at room

temperature?

YES-Go to step 1 1 .

S02SHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)

S02SHTCB2
(GRN/RED)*

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

NO-Go to step 24.


11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between body
ground and secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually.

YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM


(C5 (C7)*) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to
step 25.
NO-Go to step 15.

SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

1 2
3 4

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 12.

(cont'd)

11-119

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM
connector terminal C5 (C7)\
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

(BLK/WHT)

16. Check for continuity between secondary H 0 2 S


(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and PGM-FI
subrelay 4P connector terminal No. 2.
SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

(GRN/RED)*

Wire side of female terminals I + B (WHT/BLK)

Wire side of female terminals


PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
S02SHTCB1
(BLK/WHT)

s
J1|2 s U l e |6|7
11 12
/ h 16 17 18 19
24
25
26
22
1
30
32|33 34 3 5 L / 37
|40|41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | 4 7

><
/
/ / ><

9 i 101
1
20 21
27 28
1
38 39
48|49|

S02SHTCB2
(GRN/RED)*

PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR

+B

Terminal side of female terminals


Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 17.

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C5
(C7)*) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step
25.

11-120

NO-Repair open in the wire between secondary H02S


(Sensor 2) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step
25.

17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).


18. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal
A40.
PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y 4P CONNECTOR
SUBRLY

3~fXT4

Terminal side of female terminals

20. Disconnect the front and rear secondary H02S


(Sensor 2) 4P connectors.
2 1 . Disconnect the front and rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
connectors.
22. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
23. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

PGM CONNECTOR A (49P)


ll
1

ll

+B(WHT/BLK)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24><25
27 28
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40
44
48 49

S U B R L Y (PNK)
Terminal side of female terminals

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 3 1 .
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PGM-FI
subrelay and the PCM (A40), then go to step 25.
19. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box.

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI
subrelay and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to
step 25.
N O - Check the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
replace it if needed (see page 22-89). Also replace the
No. 11 SUB (15 A) fuse, then go t o step 25.

(cont'd)

11-121

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
24. Replace secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).
25. Reconnect all connectors.
26. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
27. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
28. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

3 1 . Reconnect all connectors.


32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
33. Start the engine, and let it idle.
34. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0141 and/or

POWVindicated?

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and
the PCM, then go to step 1.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 33.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

N O - G o to step 30.

NO-Go to step 35.

Is DTC P0141 and/or P016V

indicated?

30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 and/or


P 0 1 6 r in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 29,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep idling until a result comes on.

11-122

35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 and/or


P016V in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 34, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then go to step 33. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

DTC P0171:Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System


Too Lean

2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.

DTC P0172: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System


Too Rich

3. Check for these conditions:


Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
176F(80 C)

DTC P0174: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System


Too Lean
DTC P0175: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System
Too Rich
NOTE:

Transmission in P or N
All electrical loads off
4. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 r p m . Once
the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal
steady for more than 10 seconds.

Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and


any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from 2,500
rpm?

Poor fuel quality can cause DTC P0171.

YES-Repeat step 4.

If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the


same t i m e as DTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175,
troubleshoot those DTCs f i r s t then recheck for P0171,
P0172, P0174, and/or P0175.

NO-Go to step 5.

P0101, P0102, P0103: MAF sensor


P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor
P0133, P0153, P1172, P1174, P2195, P2197, P2237,
P2238, P2240, P2241, P2243,P2245, P2247, P2249,
P2251, P2252, P2254, P2255, P2A00, P2A03: A/F sensor
(Sensor 1)
P0134, P0135, P0154, P0155: A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
heater

5. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m , check


the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is there about 9.513.3

gm/s?

YES-Check the engine valve clearances, and adjust


them if needed (see page 6-10). If the valve clearances
are OK, replace the injectors (see page 11-240), then
go to step 6.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242), then go t o step 6.

P0137, P0138, P0139, P0157, P0158,P0159: Secondary


H02S(Sensor2)
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: EGR system
P0443: EVAP canister purge valve
P2279: Intake air leakage
1. Check the fuel pressure, (see page 11 -343)
Is the fuel pressure

OK?

YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Check these items:
If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure
regulator (see page 11-355), then go to step 2.
If the pressure is too low, check the fuel p u m p , the
fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter, and the fuel
line for restrictions, then go to step 6.

(cont'd)

11-123

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

7. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any


Combination of the Following:

8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected

9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.

DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected

6. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).

10. Test-drive under these conditions:


Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
176 F (80 C)
Transmission in D

DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected


DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected

Drive at a steady speed between 1575 m p h (24


120 km/h) for 15 minutes.

DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected

NOTE: DTC P0171, P1072, P0174 and/or P0175 may


take up t o 80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the
HDS, monitor the long term fuel t r i m (LT FUEL TRIM).
If the LT FUEL TRIM stays within 0 . 8 2 - 1 . 2 3 , there is
no problem at this time.

Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

NOTE:

Indicated?

If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection of


increased emissions during t w o consecutive driving
cycles, the MIL will come o n , and DTC P0300 (and
some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be
stored.

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go t o the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . !

If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the


catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfire
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of
P0301 through P0306) will be stored. W h e n the misfire
stops, the MIL will stay o n .

11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 and/or P0175
YES-Go to step 1.

Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of t h e m


were stored along w i t h the random misfire DTC(s)
(Because parts can sometimes fail w i t h o u t setting
DTCs, y o u should also do a physical inspection of the
systems listed below):
P0101, P0102, P0103: M A F sensor
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor
P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: CKP sensor
P0365, P0369: CMP sensor
P0400, P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: EGR system
P0506, P0507: Idle control system
P2648, P2649, P2653, P2654, P2658, P2659,P3400,
P3497: VCM system

11-124

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P o r N).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Does the screen

indicate

8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3


MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes w i t h the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?
YES-Go to step 9.

FAILED?

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this


time.B

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
result comes o n . If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck.
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


10. Check the fuel quality.
Is the fuel quality OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Drain the tank, fill it w i t h a known-good fuel, then
go to step 19.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-22). If the spark
plugs are fouled or w o r n , replace t h e m .
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.

ENGINE SPEED

6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range


of these recorded freeze data parameters:

VSS
REL TP SENSOR

ENGINE SPEED

CLV (calculated load value)

VSS

ECT SENSOR 1

REL TP SENSOR

APPSENSOR

CLV (calculated load value)


ECT SENSOR 1
APPSENSOR
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Does the screen

indicate

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.

13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3


MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

YES-Go to step 14.


NO-Go to step 19.

(cont'd)

11-125

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-343).
Is the fuel pressure

19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

OK?

Y E S - G o to step 15.

2 1 . Do the CKP pattern clear procedure (see page 11 -5).

NO-

22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure


regulator (see page 11-355), then go to step 15.
If the pressure is too low, check the fuel p u m p , the
fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter, and the fuel
line for restrictions, then go to step 19.

23. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).


24. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS

15. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.

REL TP SENSOR

16. Check for these conditions:

APP SENSOR

Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above


176 F (80 C)
Transmission in P or N
All electrical loads off
17. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the
HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 r p m . Once
the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal
steady for more than 10 seconds.
Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from 2,500
rpm?
YES-Repeat step 17.
NO-Go to step 18.
18. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m , check
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is there about 9.513.3

gm/s?

Y E S - G o to step 19.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242), then go to step 19.

11-126

CLV (calculated load value)


ECT SENSOR 1

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC P0300 and any combination of DTC P0301,
P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM, then go
to the DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
P0306 troubleshooting (see page 11-127).
NO-Go to step 26.
26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connection or loose terminals at the ignitions coils,
the injectors, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 24.

DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected

6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range


of these recorded freeze data parameters:

DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected

ENGINE SPEED

DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected

REL TP SENSOR

DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected

VSS
CLV (calculated load value)
GEAR POSITION

DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected


DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.


3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load for
2 minutes (in P or N).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.
indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
result comes o n . If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck.
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes w i t h the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?

7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,


P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Does the screen

indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 9.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Does the screen

ECT SENSOR 1

NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If the


screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 6.
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check the fuel and ignition system circuit connectors
for loose wires or poor c o n n e c t i o n s - ^

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.

(cont'd)

11-127

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


10. Exchange the ignition coil f r o m the problem cylinder
w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.

15. Exchange the spark plug f r o m the problem cylinder


w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.

11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range

16. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range


of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
GEAR POSITION

of these recorded freeze data parameters:


ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
GEAR POSITION

ECTSENSOR 1

ECT SENSOR 1
12. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes w i t h the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

17. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3


MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes with the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

YES-Go to step 13.

YES-Go to step 18.

NO-lntermittent failure due to poor contact at an


ignition coil contactor (no misfire at this time). Make
sure that the ignition coil connectors are secure.H

NO-lntermittent failure due to spark plug fouling (no


misfire at this t i m e ) . !

13. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.


Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the ignition
coil was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty ignition coils (see page 4-21),
then go to step 44.
NO-Go to step 14.

18. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.


Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the spark
plug was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty spark plug (see page 4-21),
then go to step 44.
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
20. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
2 1 . Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
22. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

11-128

24. Measure the voltage between body ground and the


appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No. 5
No. 6

DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306

PCM
TERMINAL
B4
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9

28. Measure the voltage between injector 2P connector


terminal No. 1 and body ground.

WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU

INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
IGP (YEL/BLK)

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


INJ2 (RED)
INJ1 (BRN)

Wire side of female terminals

INJ6 (WHT/BLU)

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
1 2
11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
1
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J40|41 4 2 4 5 1 4 6 1 ^ A *

>< >< /

Is there battery

voltage?

Y E S - G o to step 29.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the injector and
PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 43.

INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5 (BLK/RED)

29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

INJ3 (BLU)

. h i 2 3 | 4 | I 3 | 7 | 8 9 1101
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i
23 24
26
22
25
28
i

29 30 31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 [ ^ K | 4 5 | 4 6 [ X A"\

>< >< /

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

Y E S - G o to step 32.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
26. Disconnect the injector 2P connector f r o m the
problem cylinder.
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

11-129

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
30. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6

DTC

PCM
TERMINAL
B4
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9

P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306

WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU

3 1 . Check for continuity between appropriate injector 2p


connector terminal No. 2 and the PCM connector
terminal of the problem cylinder (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6

PCM
TERMINAL
B4
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9

DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306

WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR

INJ2 (RED)
INJ6 (WHT/BLU)

INJ1 (BRN)

J 1

INJ

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8

110

Wire side of female terminals


PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
INJ2 (RED)
INJ1 (BRN)
INJ6 (WHT/BLU)

11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
1

22 23 24

>< >< /
25

26

28

2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 1 / 1 / 1 4 5 1 4 6 ^

/ | 4 9

Jl|2

5 | 6 | T T8

hoi

11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21

INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5 (BLK/RED)

-I

>< >^ /
25

26

28

>< >< /
25

26

28

2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9

INJ3 (BLU)

3 | 4 |
5 | 7 | 8
9 1101
. | 1 | 2

11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
22 23 24

22 23 24

149|

|40|41 4 2 | ^ | / | 4 5 | 4 6 J ^

Terminal side of female terminals

2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 1 / | / |

451461/

INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Wire side of female terminals


PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5 (BLK/RED)
| INJ3 (BLU)

Ll 1
1

-I I I i 101

23 | 4 |

89

11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM and


the injector, then go to step 43.

22 23 24

>< >< /
25

26

28

2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41

42|/V145|46^

NO-Go to step 3 1 .
Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the injector and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step
32.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the
injector, then go to step 43.

11-130

32. At the injector side, measure the resistance between


injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR

33. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder w i t h


the one f r o m another cylinder. Also check the injector
fuel inlet screen for debris, and clean it if needed.
34. Reconnect all connectors, and reinstall the intake
manifold (see page 9-2).
35. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

INJ

36. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.


37. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
for 2 minutes.
38. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:

Terminal side of male terminals

ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR

Is there 10-13

Q?

YES-Go to step 33.


NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-240), then go to
step 43.

CLV (calculated load value)


GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
39. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes w i t h the
HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or CYL6
show misfire counts?

MISFIRE,
MISFIRE

YES-Go to step 40.


NO-lntermittent failure due to poor contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the injector.H
40. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the injector
was moved?
YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-240),
then go to step 43.
NO-Go to step 4 1 .
4 1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
42. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
test (see page 6-7).
Did the engine pass both

tests?

YES-Go to step 5 1 .
NO-Repair the engine, then go t o step 43.

(cont'd)

11-131

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
43. Reconnect all connectors.

5 1 . Reconnect all connectors.

44. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

52. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11 -249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

45. Do the CKP pattern clear procedure (see page 11-5).


46. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
47. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
48. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:

53. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range


of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS

ENGINE SPEED

REL TP SENSOR

VSS

CLV (calculated load value)


GEAR POSITION

REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)

ECT SENSOR 1
54. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

GEAR POSITION
ECT SENSOR 1
49. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306
indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306


indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ignition coils, the injectors, and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11 -7), then go t o step 53. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 55.

N O - G o to step 50.
50. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.

55. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,


P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

Does the screen indicate

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 49,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
the injectors, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 48.

11-132

PASSED?

PASSED?
YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 54, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
the injectors, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 53. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes o n . If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 53.

DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C47 and body ground.

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.

J 111| 122

I I

4 |
8
6 7
16 17 18 19
24
26
22
25
30
3233 34 3 5 ^ 37
40 41 42 4 3 | 4 4 | / | 4 6 47
3

>< ><

9 |10|
1
20 21
27 28
1
38 39
48 48

K S (RED/BLU)

4. Hold the engine speed between 3,0004,000 rpm for


at least 10 seconds.
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0325

Terminal side of female terminals

indicated?

YES-Go to step 6.

Is there continuity?

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
knock sensor and the P C M . B

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C47)


and the knock sensor subharness, then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 11.

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
8. Disconnect the knock sensor subharness 1P
connector.
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

(cont'd)

11-133

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Connect the knock sensor subharness 1P connector
terminal to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

KNOCK S E N S O R S U B H A R N E S S 1P CONNECTOR

13. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the knock sensor


subharness.
14. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2), and the
injector base (see page 9-6).
15. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector.
16. Check for continuity between the knock sensor
subharness 1P connector terminal and body g r o u n d .

K S (RED/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE

KNOCK S E N S O R S U B H A R N E S S 1P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals

K S (RED/BLU)

12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


C47 and body g r o u n d .
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
Wire side of female terminals

J i11| 122

e |6|7| 8
16 17 18 19
26
22
24
25
30
32 33 34 3 5 ^ 37
|40|41 42 |43|44|/|46|47
3

/
>< X
/
A*

9 hoi
20 21 i
27 28
1
38 39
48|49|

K S (RED/BLU)

Is there continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the knock sensor subharness,
then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Check f o r an open in the knock sensor subharness.
Is the harness OK?

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C47)
and the knock sensor subharness, then go t o step 20.

11-134

Y E S - G o to step 18.
NO-Repair open in the knock sensor subharness,
then go to step 19.

18. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-247).


19. Install the injector base (see page 9-6), and the intake
manifold (see page 9-2).
20. Reconnect all connectors.
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
28. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
29. Hold the engine speed between 3,0004,000 rpm for
at least 10 seconds.

23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
24. Hold the engine speed between 3,0004,000 rpm for
at least 10 seconds.

Is DTC P0325

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the knock sensor and the PCM, then go to step 27.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the knock sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11 -7), then go to step 28. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.

NO-Go to step 26.

NO-Go to step 3 1 .

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P0325

indicated?

26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 25,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 24.

31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 30, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 28.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 28.

11-135

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

9. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P


connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

CKP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
CKP (BLU)

3. Start the engine.


4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0335

Indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.

Wire side of female terminals

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
CKP sensor and the PCM.H
Is there about 5 V?

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. Disconnect CKP sensor 3P connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

YES-Go to step 10.


NO-Go to step 11.
10. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.

CKP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
CKP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

1
L G (BRN/YEL) |

| IGP (YEL/BLK)

IGP (YEL/BLK)

Wire side of female terminals


Wire side of female terminals

Is there battery
Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CKP sensor
and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19.

voltage?

YES-Go to step 17.


NO-Repair open in the wire between the CKP sensor
and G101, then go to step 19.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
13. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

11-136

14. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


B45 and body g r o u n d .

16. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


B45 and body g r o u n d .
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR B ( 4 9 P )

B E

3 | 4 |5 |6 |7 |8 9
.|1 11 2
12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20
25
26
22 23 24
1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38
|40|41 4 2 | X I X | 4 5 | 4 6 | X

>< >< /

ho
21
28
39

1 I 2 1*3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7*1 8 I 9 1101j


11|l2|l3jl4|l5)l6|iy|l8[l9|20l2l| '
28
2 5 ^ 2 6
22 23 24
29 30 31132|33|34|35|36|37 38 39

40141 J42 \ / \ / \ 45146 \jA/\ 49

CKP (BLU)

Terminal side of female terminals

CKP (BLU)

32

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM (B45)


and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.

Y E S - G o to step 26.

NO-Go to step 15.


15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to
body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM (B45)


and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
18. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-247).
19. Reconnect all connectors.

CKP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR

20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2 1 . Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

1
CKP (BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE

22. Do the CKP pattern clear procedure (see page 11-5).


23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
24. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Wire side of female terminals

Is DTC P0335

indicated?

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

(cont'd)

11-137

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
26. Reconnect all connectors.
27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0335

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P0339: CKP Sensor Circuit Intermittent


Interruption
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
4. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are 0 counts

indicated?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
6. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are 0 counts

indicated?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
CKP sensor and the P C M . B
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
these locations:
CKP sensor
PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections

and terminals OK ?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Ripair the connections or the terminals, then go
to step 11.
8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10), and check for
damage to the CKP sensor pulser plate.
Is the pulser plate

damaged?

YES-Replace the CKP sensor pulser plate, then go to


step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.

11-138

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-247).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
12. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
13. Do the CKP pattern clear procedure, (see page 11-5)
14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
15. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
16. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0339

indicated?

DTC P0351: No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit


Malfunction
DTC P0352: No. 2 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
Malfunction
DTC P0353: No. 3 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
Malfunction
DTC P0354: No. 4 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
Malfunction
DTC P0355: No. 5 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
Malfunction

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

DTC P0356: No. 6 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit


Malfunction

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355, and/or
P0356 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
ignition coil(s) and the P C M . B
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Exchange the ignition coil f r o m the problem cylinder
with one f r o m another cylinder.
7. Start the engine.
8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is an ignition coil DTC indicated at the
cylinder?

exchanged

YES-Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page 4-21),


then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 9.

(cont'd)

11-139

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Check the No. 18 IG COIL (15 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.

13. Remove the ignition coil relay (B) f r o m the


under-hood fuse/relay box.

Is the fuse OK?


Y E S - G o to step 11.
NO-Go to step 13.
11. Remove the ignition coil relay (B) f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box.

14. Disconnect all ignition coil 3P connectors.


15. Check for continuity between No. 1 ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

No. 11GNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

12. Test the ignition coil relay (see page 22-96).

+ B (BLK/WHT)

Is the relay OK?


Y E S - G o to step 16.
NO-Replace the ignition coil relay, then go to step 26.

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the ignition
coils and the ignition coil relay. Also replace the No.
18 IG COIL (15 A) fuse, then go to step 26.
NO-Checkthe under-hood fuse/relay box, and replace
it if needed (see page 22-89), then go to step 26.

11-140

16. Reinstall the ignition coil relay.

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

17. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector f r o m the


problem cylinder.

21. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P


connector terminal No. 2 of the problem cylinder and
body ground (see table).

18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


19. Measure the voltage between ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 3 of the problem cylinder and
body ground (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6

DTC
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356

PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6

DTC
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

1
No. 11GNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

GND (BLK)

+ B (BLK/WHT)
Wire side of female terminals

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 22.

Is there battery

voltage?

NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the ignition coil


and G101, then go t o step 26.

Y E S - G o to step 20.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition coil
and the ignition coil relay, then go to step 26.

(cont'd)

11-141

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
25. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition coil
3P connector terminal No. 1 and the PCM connector
terminal of the problem cylinder (see table).

22. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.


23. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
24. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No. 5
No. 6

DTC
P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356

PCM
TERMINAL
B29
B30
B22
B23
B11
B12

WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT

PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No. 5
No. 6

P0351
P0352
P0353
P0354
P0355
P0356

1
I G P L S T l Wire side of female terminals

IGPLS5 (BLK/RED)
4 5 6 7
m
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
ill
25
>
<
2
6
/
2
8
24
31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
42

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


IGPLS5 (BLK/RED)

IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)

IGPLS3
(WHT/BLU)

WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

12
22 23
29 30
41

PCM
TERMINAL
B29
B30
B22
B23
B11
B12

DTC

IGPLS3
(WHT/BLU)

T5J
3 |4 |5
12 13 14[15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
25
26
28
29 30
32 33 34 3 5 | 3 6 37 38 39
4C 41142 I X I X l 45146 I ^ X I X I 491

IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
Terminal side of female terminals

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

IGPLS6 (BRN/WHT)

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17J18, 19 20 21
26
28
23 24
25
29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39
40 4 l 4 2 | X I X l 4 5 | 4 6 p l 7 T 4 9

IGPLS4
(BRN)

IGPLS

Wire side of female terminals

PCM
CONNECTOR B (49P)
IGPLS6 (BRN/WHT)

IGPLS2 (BLU/RED)

IGPLS4
(BRN)

3 | 4 5 6 7
9 10
12 13 14115 16 17|18 19 20 21
25
26
28
23 24
32 33 34 35|36 37 38 39
29 30
4014 j 4 2 | / l X l 4 5 l 4 6 j ^ l ^ 4 9

IGPLS2 (BLU/RED)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM and
the ignition coil, then go to step 26.

Is there continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 32.

NO-Go to step 25.


NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the
ignition coil, then go to step 26.

11-142

26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P0365: CMP Sensor Circuit No Signal

27. Reconnect all connectors.

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

28. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


29. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


30. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3 1 . Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
3. Start the engine.
Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355,
P0356 indicated?

and/or
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the ignition coil(s) and the PCM, then go to step 1.

Is DTC P0365

indicated?

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
CMP sensor and the P C M . B

YES-Go to step 5.

32. Reconnect all connectors.

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

6. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector.

34. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0355, and/or
P0356 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ignition coil(s) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11 -7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


8. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

CMP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

IGP (YEL/BLK)

Wire side of femal terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP sensor
and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 18.

(cont'd)

11-143

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

11. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).


12. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
13. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

CMP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

14. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


B46 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

CMP (GRN)

Wire side of femal terminals

3 |4 |5 | 6 | 7 | 8
1 2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
22 23 24
25
26
I
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /

9 10|

20 21
28

38 39
/ \ 49

>< >< /

CMP (GRN)

1$ there about 5 V?
Y E S - G o to step 10.

Terminal side of female terminals

NO-Go to step 11.


10. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.

CMP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

1
L G (BRN/YEL) J

[ IGP (YEL/BLK)

Wire side of femal terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

Y E S - G o to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP sensor
and G101,then go to step 18.

11-144

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B46)
and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 15.

15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor 3P


connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal
B46.

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-246).
18. Reconnect all connectors.

CMP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

2 1 . Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

CMP (GRN)
Wire side of female terminals

Is DTC P0365

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


J "I

l 2

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8

22 23 24

>< >< /
25

26

28

2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9
|40|41 4 2 | / l / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

9 |10|

11 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21
1

22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

48

CMP (GRN)

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
23. Reconnect all connectors.

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM (B46)
and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.

24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0365

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7) then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, Troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

11-145

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0369: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent
Interruption
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

8. Check for damage to the front camshaft pulley (CMP


sensor pulser plate) (see page 6-54).
Is the pulser plate

damaged?

YES-Replace the front camshaft pulley (CMP sensor


pulser plate), then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.

10. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11 -246).

4. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the


HDS.

11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


12. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

Are 0 counts

indicated?
13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

YES-Go to step 7.
14. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
NO-Go to step 5.
15. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED

6. Check the CMP B NOISE in the DATA LIST with the


HDS.
indicated?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
CMP sensor and the P C M . H
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
these locations:
CMP sensor
PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections

and terminals OK ?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair the connections or the terminals, then go
to step 11.

11-146

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.

VSS

Are 0 counts

Is DTC P0369

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control System


Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs other than P050A
indicated?
Y E S - G o to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check for poor connections or a blockage at the intake
air duct.
Is it OK?
Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air d u c t then go to
step 19.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Is it OK?
Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
11 -372), then g o t o step 19.
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove the
debris (see page 11-373), then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 6.

6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is


122 F (50 C) or less.
7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

Y E S - G o to step 10.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 6.
10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR
normal?

CONTROL

VALVE

Y E S - G o to step 11.
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-375), then
go to step 19.
11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
12. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m for 30
seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
Is there about 9.513.3

gmls?

Y E S - G o to step 13.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242), then go to step 19.

(cont'd)

11-147

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

14. A l l o w the engine to cool to the ambient temperature.

20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

15. Note the ambient temperature.

21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

22. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is
122F(50 C) or less.

17. Quickly note the value of the IAT SENSOR in the


DATA LIST with the HDS.
18. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR and the
ambient temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242), then go to step 19.
NO-Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body
(see page 11-372), then go to step 19. If there is
damage to the throttle bore, replace the throttle body
(see page 11-375), then go to step 19.

23. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P050A

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 22.

11-148

DTC P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing Control


System Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


P050B

YES-Go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .


N O - G o to step 3.
3. Check for poor connections or a blockage at the intake
air duct.
is it OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Correct the p r o b l e m , then reconnect the intake air
duct, then go to step 24.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
11-372), then go to step 24.
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove the
debris (see page 11 -373), then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 6.

7. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.


8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs other than


indicated?

6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is


122F(50C)orless.

Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 10.


NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the
throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor
1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes o n . If the
screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 6.
10. Inspect the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-20).
Is the ignition timing OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page
11-247) and the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page
7-28).
Is the CKP sensor or the CKP sensor pulser
damaged?

plate

YES-Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-247) and/or


the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page 7-28), then go
to step 24.
NO-Go to step 3 1 .
12. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the
HDS.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR
normal?

CONTROL

VALVE

YES-Go to step 13.


NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-375), then
go to step 24.

(cont'd)

11-149

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
14. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 30
seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
Is there about 9.513.3

gm/s?

Y E S - G o to step 15.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-242), then go to step 24.
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
16. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
17. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-243).
18. A l l o w the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.
19. Note the ambient temperature.
20. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P
connectors, but do not install t h e m .
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
22. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
23. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient
temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature individually.
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4 F (3 C) from the
ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 F
(3 C) f r o m the ambient temperature, then go t o step
24.
NO-Check and repair any problems w i t h the
following items. Repair or replace t h e m if needed,
then go to step 24. If all of the items are OK, go to step
31.
Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
VCM system
Engine oil
A/C system
Power steering

11-150

24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


25. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
26. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
27. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is
122 F (50 C) or less.
28. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P050B

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go t o step 30.
30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 29,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the
throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor
1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 27.

3 1 . Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software


(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
32. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
33. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is
122F(50 C) or less.
34. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
35. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P050B

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11 -7), then go to step 33. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.

DTC P0562: Charging System Low Voltage


NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If any high current load accessories are installed, this
DTC can be set.
If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
first, then recheck for DTC P0562.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine.
4. Check under these conditions:
A/Con
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool

NO-Go to step 36.


36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.

Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed


Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam

Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 35, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the
throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 33. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
idling until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 33.

5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for 1


minute.
6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0562

indicated?

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), then go t o


step 7.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
check the battery performance (see page 22-93).H

(cont'd)

11-151

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
10. Start the engine.
11. Check under these conditions:
A/Con
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool

DTC P0563: PCM Power Source Circuit


Unexpected Voltage
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Rear w i n d o w defogger on

4. Wait 10 seconds.

Headlights on high beam


12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for 1
minute.
13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0562

Indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0563

indicated?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
PGM-FI main relay 1 and the P C M . B
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

11-152

10. Measure the voltage between PCM connector


terminal A6 and body g r o u n d .

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

MRLY (GRN)

MRLY (GRN)

J 1l

2
11
22
29 30
4 0
1 41

8
3 I4 I e
6 | 7 | 9 1101
13 14J15 16 17 18 19 20 21

24
26 27 28
25
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
/ | / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 l / 48 49

A
A >< ><

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there battery

12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


A6 and body g r o u n d .

voltage?

Y E S - G o to step 13.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box.

1| 2
11
22 /
29 30
40 41

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
26 27 28
25
31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|

>< ><

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM (A6)
and PGM-FI main relay 1,then g o t o step 19.
NO-Go to step 18.
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P).
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminal B3 and body g r o u n d .
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

IGP (YEL/BLK)
. | 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 1101
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1
28
23 24
26
22
25

29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
|40|41 4 2 | / | / | 4 5 | 4 6 | /
49

>< >< /

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

Y E S - G o to step 16.
NO-Go to step 26.

(cont'd)

11-153

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box.

18. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-96).


Is the relay OK?
Y E S - G o to step 26.
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19.
19. Reconnect ail connectors.
20. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
2 1 . Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

23. Wait 10 seconds.


24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

17. Measure the voltage between PCM connector


terminal B3 and body ground.

Is DTC P0563

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM, then go t o step 1.

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

IGP (YEL/BLK)
ll ll
. h i 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1
28
25
26
23 24
22

1
29 30 31 3233 34 35 36 37 38 39
/
|
4
9
|
|40|41 4 2 4 5 1 4 6 \ /

>< ><

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
26. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
27. Reconnect all connectors.
28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Terminal side of female terminals

Is DTC P0563
Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Repair short to power in the wire between the


PCM (B3) and PGM-FI main relay 1,then g o t o step 19.
NO-Go to step 18.

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

11-154

NOTE:

DTC P060A: PCM Internal Control Module


Malfunction

Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and


any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data


and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

This DTC is indicated w h e n a PCM update is not


completed.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

DTC P0602: PCM Programming Error

Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)


while updating the PCM. If y o u turn the ignition switch
to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0) before completion, the PCM
can be damaged.

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.


3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P060A

indicated?

1. Do the PCM update procedure (see page 11-249).

YES-Go to step 4.

2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this


time.B

Is DTC P0602

Indicated?

YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).B


NO-The update is c o m p l e t e . !

4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software


(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P060A

indicated?

YES-lf the PCM w a s updated, substitute a


known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO-lf the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-155

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0615: Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit
Malfunction
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

7. Try to start the engine.


Does the engine start?
YES-Go t o step 8.
N O - G o to step 14.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

8. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

9. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (III) for 1 second or


more.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0615

indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM.B
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Check the No. 23 ST CUT RLY 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse, then go to step 20.

11-156

10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).


11. Remove starter cut relay 1 (STR) (A) f r o m the
under-dash fuse/relay box.

12. Connect starter cut relay 1 (STR) 4P connector


terminal No. 1 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

S T A R T E R C U T R E L A Y 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR

14. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.


15. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
16. Remove starter cut relay 1 (STR) (A) f r o m the
under-dash fuse/relay box.

STRLD
J U M P E R WIRE

Terminal side of female terminals

13. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


A28 and body g r o u n d .

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

17. Connect starter cut relay 1 (STR) 4P connector


terminal No. 3 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

IIII
4 | 5 I 6 | 7
14 15 16

[8
19 20 21

STRLD
(GRN)

26 27 28
22
M ^ 2 5 ^
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37 38 39
40

44

48

49

STARTER C U T RELAY 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR

I
m
4
2
STRLY X

_3_

Terminal side of female terminals

J U M P E R WIRE

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A28)
and starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step 20.

Terminal side of female terminals

(cont'd)

11-157

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
A3 and body ground.

20. Reconnect all connectors.


2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).
22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

IJ 1 | 2

ll

24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


i!

3 4 |5 |e |7 | a
13 1415 16 1718 19
26
22
24
25
1
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 35 36 37
4 4
4 6
|40|41
11

/
/

><

A^I

5)

23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

KI

9|10|
20 21
27 28
38 39
48|49|

STRLY
(LT GRN)

Is DTC P0615

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR) and the PCM, then go to step
1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

Terminal side of female terminals

25. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 19.

26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A3)
and starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step 20.
19. Check for continuity between starter cut relay 1 (STR)
4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
STARTER C U T RELAY 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR
GND

4
1

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between starter cut relay
1 (STR) and G101, then go to step 20.

11-158

Is DTC P0615

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR) and the PCM, then go to step
1. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

DTC P062F: PCM Interna! Control Module


Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
5..Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P062F

indicated?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, substitute a


known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P0630: VIN Not Programmed or


Mismatch
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record ail freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
This DTC is stored only w h e n the PCM does not have
the VIN information of the vehicle. Use the HDS to
input the missing VIN information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Check the VIN w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS show the vehicle's

VIN?

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Input the VIN to the PCM w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen show

COMPLETE?

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P062F

indicated?

Y E S - G o to the DTC P062F troubleshooting (see page


11-159).
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 5 seconds.
8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0630

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 9.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

(cont'd)

11-159

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
10. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0630

Indicated?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a


known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

DTC P0685: PCM Power Control


Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If the problem doesn't return after y o u clear the DTC,
or it this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose
terminals at the IGP line connectors before replacing
the PCM.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0685

indicated?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.H

11-160

9. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software


(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of Range


High
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

12. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds.

1. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

2. Start the engine.

14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

15. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC P0685

indicated?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a


known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 10.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

Is DTC P1109

indicated?

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1109

indicated?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a


known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

11-161

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit
Range/Performance Problem

7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).

NOTE:

8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243).

Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC P0111 is stored at the same t i m e as DTC P1116,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P1116.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Are the connections

and terminals OK?

Y E S - G o to step 2.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 27.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same time?

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

9. A l l o w ECT sensor 1 to cool to the ambient


temperature.
10. Note the ambient temperature.
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do not
install it on the engine.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient
temperature.
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243), then go
to step 27.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Reinstall ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . H

Y E S - G o to step 15.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.

15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.


5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 118 F (48 C) or less

indicated?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -243), then go


to step 27.

Is about 118 F (48 C) or less

indicated?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243), then go


to step 27.

NO-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes.
18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 115 F (46 C) or less

indicated?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243), then go


to step 27.
NO-Go to step 19.

11-162

19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11 -243).
22. A l l o w the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.
23. Note the ambient temperature.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P
connectors, but do not install t h e m .
25. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient
temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature individually.
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 F (3 C)
from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 F
(3 C) f r o m the ambient temperature. Refill the cooling
system (see step 11 on page 10-7) then go to step 27.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Reinstall ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11 -243). Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and the P C M . B

DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than


Expected
NOTE:
Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Before starting this troubleshooting, check for poor
connections or a blockage at the intake air duct.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is less than 54.1 kPa (16.0 in.Hg, 406 mmHg) or 1.61 V
held for more than 5 seconds?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
5. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Engine speed between 1,2005,400 r p m

27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Transmission in D

28. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

Vehicle speed accelerating f r o m 1531 m p h (24


50 km/h) under half throttle

29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
is DTC P1116

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the DTCs


MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and
the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 4 and recheck.

(cont'd)

11-163

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-242).
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than


Expected
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
PCV valve

12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.

PCV hose

13. Test-drive under these conditions:

Throttle body

EVAP canister purge valve

Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above


158 F (70 C)

Intake manifold

Engine speed between 1,2005,400 r p m

Brake booster hose

Transmission in D

Brake booster

Are there any vacuum

Vehicle speed accelerating f r o m 1531 mph (24


50 km/h) under half throttle

leaks?

YES-Repair or replace the part(s) w i t h vacuum leaks,


then go to step 9.

14. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


NO-Go to step 2.
Is DTC P1128

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 14,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and
the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 12.

11-164

2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
3. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg, 277 mmHg) or
1.14 V held for more than 5 seconds?
Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.

4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.


5. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Engine speed between 1,2005,500 rpm
Transmission in D
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 m p h (88
120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the
throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds.
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and
the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 5 and recheck.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -242).
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
13. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Engine speed between 1,2005,500 r p m
Transmission in D
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph (88
120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the
throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds.
14. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P1129

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 14,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and
the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 12.

11-165

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P1172: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).

DTC P1174: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NOTE:

9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).

8. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

10. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is DTC P1172 and/or P1174*

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1172 and/or P1174*in
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and
recheck.

11-166

indicated?

NO-Go to step 12.


12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 and/or
P1174* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 1 1 ,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go t o step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 10.

DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


A10 and body ground.

NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is 72 A or more

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 3.

ELD (ORN)
r

n
n

ll

ll

n
n

3
8
. 6 7
13 1415 16 17 18 19
24
25
26
22
29 30 31 3 2 3 3 34 3536 37
401 41 / | / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | /

J 1| 2
11

><

9
20
27
38

|10|
21 i

28
39

48|49|

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
ELD and the P C M . B
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Terminal side of female terminals

4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.


Is there continuity?
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is 72 A or more

indicated?

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (A10)


and the ELD, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 20.

Y E S - G o to step 7.

11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NO-Go to step 11.

12. Replace the ELD (see page 11 -248).

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

13. Reconnect all connectors.

8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.


16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

(cont'd)

11-167

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. Start the engine.

DTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage

18. Turn on the headlights.

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P1297

indicated?
1. Start the engine, and let it idle.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the ELD and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
20. Reconnect all connectors.
2 1 . Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.


Is 0.2 A or less

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
ELD and the P C M . B
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.

22. Start the engine.


5. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
23. Turn on the headlights.
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1297

6. Measure the voltage between ELD 3P connector


terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .

indicated?
ELD 3P CONNECTOR

CM

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

IG1 (LT GRN)

NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

2)
Wire side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the No. 3 ACG
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ELD, then go to step 13.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

11-168

10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


A10 and ELD 3P connector terminal No. 3.

12. Replace the ELD (see page 11-248).


13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
14. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

ELD 3P CONNECTOR

15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


1

16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Wire side of female terminals I ELD (ORN)

Is DTC P1298

indicated?

(ft
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

ELD (ORN)

J 1 I 2133 | 4 | 5 | 617| 718T 8 9 21|1(A

/
/ >< X
/

11
14 15 16
19 20

24
25
26 27 28
22
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 35|36 37 38 39
48|49|
|40|41

Terminal side of female terminals

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the ELD and the PCM, then go to step 17.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
17. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Is there continuity?

Is DTC P1298

YES-Go to step 11.


NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A10)
and the ELD, then go to step 13.
11. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .

ELD 3P CONNECTOR

1 2

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

3
GND (BLK)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the ELD and
G202, then go to step 13.

11-169

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P1549: Charging System High Voltage

10. Start the engine.

NOTE:

11. Check under these conditions:

Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to the
vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine.
4. Check under these conditions:
A/C switch off
Headlights off
Rear w i n d o w defogger off
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1
minute.
6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1549

Indicated?

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), then go to


step 7.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay b o x . B
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

11-170

A/C switch off


Headlights off
Rear w i n d o w defogger off
12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for 1
minute.
13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1549

Indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . !

DTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low


Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


10. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
12. Start the engine.
13. Check under these conditions:
A/Con

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool


Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed

3. Start the engine.


4. Check under these conditions:

Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam

A/Con
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed

14. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for 1


minute.

Rear w i n d o w defogger on

15. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool

Headlights on high beam


5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for 1
minute.
6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P16BB

indicated?

YES-Go to step 7.

Is DTC P16BB

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
check the battery performance (see page 2 2 - 9 3 ) .
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box
( + Bline).
Are the connections

and terminals OK?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 9.
8. Check for an open in the wire between the alternator
and under-hood fuse/relay box at the engine harness.
Is the harness

OK?

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), then go to


step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the alternator
and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 9.

11-171

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P16BC: Alternator FR Terminal
Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

11. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector


terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
IG1 (BLK/YEL)

1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the


alternator 4P connector.
Are the connections

and terminals OK?

YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 18.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Wire side of female terminals

3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.


4. Start the engine.
5. Check under these conditions:
A/Con
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger o n
Headlights on high beam
6. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for
1 minute.

Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Go to step 12.


NO-Repair open in the w i r e between the alternator
(IG1 line) and the No. 3 ACG (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 17.
12. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector
terminal No. 4 and body g r o u n d .
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

7. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P16BC

ALTF (WHT/RED)

indicated?

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
alternator.B
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Wire side of female terminals

9. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.


10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-33), then go to
step 17.
N O - G o to step 13.
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
15. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).

11-172

16. Check for continuity between alternator 4P connector


terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal C44.

17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


18. Reconnect all connectors.

ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR

19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

A T L F (WHT/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


22. Start the engine.
23. Check under these conditions:
A/Con
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger on

ATLF (WHT/RED)
terminal side of female terminals

Headlights on high beam


24. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in P or N) for
1 minute.
25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Is there continuity?
Is DTC P16BC

indicated?

YES-Go to step 26.


NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C44)
and the alternator, then go to step 18.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the alternator and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

(cont'd)

11-173

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
26. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P16BD: Starter Cut Relay 2 Malfunction

27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

28. Start the engine.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

29. Check under these conditions:

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.

A/Con
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed

3. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST


w i t h the HDS.

Rear w i n d o w defogger on

Is 2.2 V or less

Headlights on high beam

YES-Go to step 4.

30. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in P or N) for


1 minute.
3 1 . Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16BC

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the alternator and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 28. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

indicated?

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM.B
4. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
YES-Replace starter cut relay 2, then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 5.

NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-174

5. Remove starter cut relay 1 (STR) (A) f r o m the


under-dash fuse/relay box.

6. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST


w i t h the HDS.
Is 2.2 V or less

indicated?

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


10. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
11. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step
14.
7. Remove starter cut relay 2 (A) f r o m the relay holder.

12. Check for continuity between starter cut relay 1 (STR)


4P connector terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .

STARTER C U T RELAY 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR

_3_
I

STRLD

I J U M P E R WIRE

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the w i r e between starter cut relay
1 (STR) and the body g r o u n d , then go t o step 13.
A

NO-Go to step 18.

8. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST


w i t h the HDS.
Is 2.2 V or less

indicated?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 2, then go to step 14.

(cont'd)

11-175

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC P16BE: Starter Cut Relay 1 Malfunction

14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.


16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16BD

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
18. Reconnect all connectors.
19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
3. Check for STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
Is 3.2 V or more

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM.B
4. Remove starter cut relay 1 (STR) (A) f r o m the
under-dash fuse/relay box.

20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P16BD

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting-^

5. Check the STARTER CUT RELAY in the DATA LIST


with the HDS.
Is 3.2 V or more

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 6.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR), then go to step
7.

11-176

6. Measure the voltage between starter cut relay 1 (STR)


4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

S T A R T E R C U T R E L A Y 1 (STR) 4P CONNECTOR

11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


12. Reconnect all connectors.
13. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
14. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16BE

STRLD

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there 3.2V or more?


YES-Repair short to power in the wire between starter
cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the PCM, then
go to step 7.

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

N O - G o to step 11.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
10. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16BE

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-177

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P16BF: Starter Cut Relay STRLY Circuit
Malfunction

7. Remove starter cut relay 1 (STR) (A) f r o m the


under-dash fuse/relay box.

NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data


and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
3. Check the STARTER CUT CONTROL RETURN in the
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is OFF

indicated?

YES-Go t o step 4.
NO-Go to step 13.
4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III) for 5 seconds or
more.
5. Check the STARTER CUT CONTROL RETURN in the
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS during ignition switch in
START (III).
Is OFF

indicated?

YES-Go t o step 6.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM.B
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

11-178

8. Remove starter cut relay 2 (B) f r o m the relay holder.


9. Test starter cut relay 1 (STR) and starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-96).
Are the relays OK?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut
relay 2, then go to step 2 1 .

10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

11. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

14. Remove starter cut relay 1 (STR) (A) f r o m the


under-dash fuse/relay box.

12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


A3 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)


S T R L Y (LT GRN)
i

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | no |

11
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

24
22
25
26 27 28

29 30 31 32 33 34 3536 37 38 39
48|49|

/
/ >< ><

14014-1 / l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | /

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (A3)
and starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut relay 2, then
go to step 2 1 .
N O - G o to step 27.

15. Remove starter cut relay 2 (B) f r o m the relay holder.


16. Test starter cut relay 1 (STR) and starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-96).
Are the relays OK?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Replace starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut
relay 2, then go to step 2 1 .

(cont'd)

11-179

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

2 1 . Reconnect all connectors.

18. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

23. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

20. Measure the the voltage between PCM connector


terminal A3 and body ground.

24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)


S T R L Y (LT GRN)
II

II

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
13|14115|16|17|18|19 20 21
26 27 28
22

M3I
29 30 31|32|33l34l35|36|37 38 39

40141 y\A

441/] 4 6 ^ 48149

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there 1.0 V or more?


YES-Repair short to power in the wire between the
PCM (A3) and starter cut relay 1 (STR) or starter cut
relay 2, then go to step 2 1 .
NO-Go to step 26.

25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P16BF

Indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
27. Reconnect all connectors.
28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16BF

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


starter cut relay 1 (STR), starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

11-180

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit


Range/Performance Problem

7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).

NOTE:

8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243).

Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

9. A l l o w ECT sensor 2 to cool to the ambient


temperature.

If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P2183,


troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P2183.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Are the connections

and terminals OK?

YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 27.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

10. Note the ambient temperature.


11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not
install it.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the ambient
temperature.
Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or more from the
ambient temperature?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -243), then go
to step 27.

Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same time?


NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Reinstall ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the P C M . H

YES-Go to step 15.


NO-Go to step 4.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.

15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.


5. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 115 F (46 C) or less

indicated?
Is about 118F (48 C) or less

YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -243), then go


to step 27.

indicated?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -243), then go


to step 27.

NO-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes.
18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 115 F (46 C) or less

indicated?

YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243), then go


to step 27.
NO-Go to step 19.

(cont'd)

11-181

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage

20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).


2 1 . Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-243).

NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

22. A l l o w the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

23. Note the ambient temperature.

2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.

24. Connect ECT sensors 1 and 2 to their 2P connectors,


but do not install t h e m .

Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less


indicated?

25. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT


SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.

Y E S - G o t o step 3.

26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient


temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature individually.
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 F (3 C)
from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 F
(3 C) f r o m the ambient temperature. Refill the cooling
system (see step 11 on page 10-7), then go to step 27.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Reinstall ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-243) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-243). Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and the P C M . H
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
28. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2183

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . !

11-182

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 2 and the P C M . H
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

10, Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P


connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

ECT S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

18. Reconnect all connectors.


19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

2
ECT2(BLU)

Wire side of female terminals

Is DTC P2184

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor 2
and the PCM (A21),then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243).
13. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2184

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-183

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage

8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

9. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the ECT sensor 2 2P


connector.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 40 F(40 C) or less, or 4.92 V or more
indicated?

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

ETC S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 2 and the P C M . H

ECT2(BLU)

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 with a jumper wire.

E C T S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.

ECT2 (BLU)

S G 7 (GRN)

JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


7. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about -40
indicated?

F (-40

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.

11-184

C) or less, or 4.92 V or more

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) .

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

13. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

17. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

14. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

18. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

15. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal


A37 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 2.

19. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal


A21 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 1.

E C T S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

E C T S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR

2
S G 7 (GRN)

ECT2 (BLU) JL

Wire side of

Wire side of female terminals

(Q)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)


li

JL
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
48 49
40 41
046
1

ISMS

female terminals
ECT2 (PUR)

il

3 |4 |5 |6 |7 | 8
13 14 15 16 17|18 19 20 21
27 28
22
24
25
32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
29 30

40141 y\A

4 4 I X I 4 6 y\

48149

S G 7 (BLK)
Terminal side of female terminals
Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 27.

YES-Go to step 27.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A37)


and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A21)


and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.

(cont'd)

11-185

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2 1 . Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-243).

DTC P2195: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,


Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean

23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

DTC P2197: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean

24. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

NOTE:

25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

22. Reconnect all connectors.

26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.


Is DTC P2185

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
27. Reconnect all connectors.
28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2185

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting-^

Information marked w i t h an asterisk O applies to the


front bank (Bank 2).
If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel, and clear the DTC
w i t h the HDS.
If DTCP2101,P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, or a
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138 or
P2127 and P2138 are stored at the same time as DTC
P2195 (P2197)*, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then
recheck for DTC P2195 <P2197)\
1. Check for dirt or debris in the MAF sensor/IAT sensor.
Is it dirty?
YES-Remove the debris. If needed, replace the MAF
sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11-242).
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the installation of A/F sensor (Sensor 1).
Is the A/F sensor loose or disconnected
pipe?

from the exhaust

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
5. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2195 and/or P2197'

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 14.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

11-186

7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


8. Reinstall A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.

Is DTC P2195 and/or P2197*

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 15. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 17.

13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 and/or


P2197* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.


16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

Is DTC P2195 and/or P2197'

14. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 12,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 and/or


P2197* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 16, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), g o t o step 15.lf the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

11-187

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Circuit
Range/Performance Problem
NOTE:
Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored at
the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P2227.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (H), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about 2.9 V
at sea level indicated?

NO-Go to step 7.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.
5. Test-drive under these conditions:

Transmission in D
Throttle position between 14 deg and 29 deg for at
least 3 seconds
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lf the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and recheck.
7. Check the intake air system for clogging or
restrictions (foreign material, dirty air cleaner
element, etc).
restricted?

YES-Remove the clog or restriction, then go to step 9.


NO-Go to step 8.

11-188

10. Test-drive under these conditions:


Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Throttle position between 14 deg and 29 deg for at
least 3 seconds
11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2227

indicated?

NO-Go to step 12.


12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above


158F(70 C)

Is the intake air system clogged or

9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the PCM . If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 9. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

YES-Go to step 3.

Does the screen indicate

8. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software


(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

PASSED?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 11, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11 -7), then go to step 9. If the PCM was
substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 9.

DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P2229: BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage

NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data


and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the


HDS.

2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the


HDS.

Is about 43 kPa (12.7 in.Hg, 323 mmHg), or 1.31 V or less


indicated?

Is about 160 kPa (47.2 in.Hg, 1,200 mmHg), or 4.49 Vor


more indicated?

YES-Go to step 3.

YES-Go to step 3.

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this


time.l

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this


time.B

3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software


(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software


(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

Is DTC P2228

indicated?

Is DTC P2229

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11 -250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

11-189

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P2237: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DTC P2240: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage

7. Disconnect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.

NOTE:

9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P


connectorterminal No. 5 and PCM connectorterminal
B31 (B32)\

Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and


any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked with an asterisk O applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).

6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


IPB1 (GRN)

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

Is DTC P2237 and/or

P22401ndicated?

2
5

IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

Wire side of female terminals

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.

1
4

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

3 j 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 110
11 12 13 14 15 16 17|18 19 20 21
22 23 24
28
25
29 30
3233 34 3536 37 38 39
|40|41 42 ^1X1451461^7149

YES-Go to step 5.
IPB1 (GRN)

N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this t i m e .


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the P C M . H

IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B31 (B32)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.

11-190

10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).

13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle 2 minutes.

14. Reconnect all connectors.

12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


6P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.

16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2237 and/or

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

1 2
4 5 6
IPB1 (GRN)
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

X
Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 0.2 Vor


YES-Go to step 20.

less?

P22401ndicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2237 and/or
P2240* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

N O - G o to step 13.

(cont'd)

11-191

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2 1 . Reconnect all connectors.
22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
23. Start the engine, and let it idle.
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2237 and/or

P22401ndicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go t o step 23. If the PCM w a s substituted,
go to step 1.
N O - G o t o step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2237 and/or
P2240* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM w a s updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes o n .

11-192

DTC P2238: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,


Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2241: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2238 and/or

P224Vindicated?

Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the P C M . B

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).

6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle 2 minutes.

7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.


8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
B31 (B32) and body g r o u n d .

12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


6P connector terminal No. 5 and body g r o u n d .

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

Tf=r
1

10

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24
28
25
26
29 30 31|32|33|34|35|36 37 38 39
40 41 4|2lJ^Xl45"[46
49

IPB1 (GRN)

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B31 (B32) ) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.
#

IPB1 (GRN)
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

IPB2 (GRN/RED)*

Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 0.2 V or less?


YES-Go to step 20.
N O - G o to step 13.

N O - G o to step 10.

(cont'd)

11-193

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -244).

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

14. Reconnect all connectors.

2 1 . Reconnect all connectors.

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.


17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2238 and/or P224V

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or
P2241* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

23. Start the engine, and let it idle.


24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2238 and/or P224V

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.

Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or


P224V in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

11-194

DTC P2243: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,


Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

DTC P2247: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage

7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.

NOTE:
Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P


connectorterminal No. 6 and PCM connectorterminal
B15(B24r.

Information marked with an asterisk O applies to the


front bank (Bank 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

VCENTB2
(RED/WHT)*

2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

VCENTB1 (RED)

Wire side of female terminals

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T

1 2
4 5 6

indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the P C M . H

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


VCENTB2
(RED/WHT)*

5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
14|15 16 17|18 19 20 21
12
26
28
22 23 24
29 30 31 32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40 41

VCENTB1
(RED)

1 ^

Terminal side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Go t o step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B15 (B24)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.

(cont'd)

11-195

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).

13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -244).

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle 2 minutes.

14. Reconnect all connectors.

12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


6P connectorterminal No. 6 and body ground.

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2243 and/or P2247*

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

Indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.

VCENTB1 (RED)
VCENTB2 (RED/WHT)*

Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 0.2 V or less?


Y E S - G o to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.

11-196

19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2243 and/or


P2247* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


21. Reconnect all connectors.
22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
23. Start the engine, and let it idle.
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T

indicated?

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2243 and/or
P2247* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

DTC P2245: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,


Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2249: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
front bank (Bank 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2245 and/or P2249'

indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.H

NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor


connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

(cont'd)

11-197

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).

6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.

7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.


8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
B15 (B24)* and body ground.

12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


6P connectorterminal No. 6 and body g r o u n d .

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


VCENTB1 (RED)

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

H i 5 | 6 | 7 I 8 9 110
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 K M
26
28
29 30
32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40141 2 | X M 4 5 | 4 6 | / T 7 T 4 9 '
r

^
Q)

VCENTB1 (RED)
V C E N T B 2 (RED/WHT)*

VCENTB2
(RED/WHT)*

Terminal side of female terminals


Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B15 (B24)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.

YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 13.

11-198

Is there about 0.2 V or less?

13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -244).

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

14. Reconnect all connectors.

21. Reconnect all connectors.

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.


17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2245 and/or

P2249'indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
N O - G o to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2245 and/or
P2249* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.

23. Start the engine, and let it idle.


24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2245 and/or P2249*

indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.

Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2245 and/or


P2249* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the Screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

11-199

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P2251: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.

DTC P2254: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage

7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.

NOTE:

9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P


connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal
B13(B14r.

Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and


any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).

A / F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

If DTC P2251 and/or P2254* is stored at the same time


as DTC P0134 and/or P0154*, troubleshoot DTC P2251
and/or P2254* first, then recheck for P0134 and/or
P0154*.

VSB1 (BLU)

Information marked with an asterisk O applies to the


front bank (Bank 2).

1
4 5 6

V S B 2 (RED/BLU)*

Wire side of female terminals


PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

VSB2
(RED/BLU)*

VSB1 (BLU)

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.

IS

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.


Is DTC P2251 andlor P2254

Terminal side of female terminals

indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.B

is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B13 (B14)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.

11-200

MS|?I, (
12 13 14|15 16 ,17|18 19 20 21
26 28
22 23 24 3 ^ 2 5
29 30
32|33 34 35|36 37 38 39
40 [41 4 2 | y 1 X | 4 5 | 4 6 | ^ X | 4 9 |

10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).

13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m


w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.

14. Reconnect all connectors.

12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


6P connector t e r m i n a l No. 4 and b o d y g r o u n d .

16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

15. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II).

17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).


18. Check for Pending or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2251 and/or P2254*

A / F S E N S O R ( S E N S O R 1) 6P C O N N E C T O R

1 2
4 5 6
VSB1(BLU)
^ VSB2 (RED/BLU)*

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Is there about 0.2 V or


Y E S - G o to step 20.

less?

Indicated?

YES-Check for p o o r connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, t h e n go to step 1.
N O - G o to step 19.
19. M o n i t o r the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or
P2254* in the DTCs M E N U w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen Indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other


Pending or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w e r e indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
N O - l f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, t h e n go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes o n .

N O - G o to step 13.

(cont'd)

11-201

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. T u r n the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
2 1 . Reconnect all connectors.
22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a k n o w n - g o o d PCM
(see page 11-7).
23. Start the engine, and let it idle.
24. Check for Pending or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w i t h the HDS.
If DTC P2251 and/or

P22541ndicated?

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM w a s
updated, substitute a k n o w n - g o o d PCM (see page
11-7), then go t o step 23. If the PCM w a s substituted,
g o to step 1.
N O - G o t o step 25.
25. M o n i t o r the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or
P2254* in the DTCs M E N U w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was u p d a t e d , t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is


c o m p l e t e . If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w e r e indicated in step 24, g o t o
the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose t e r m i n a l s at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM w a s updated, substitute a
k n o w n - g o o d PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM w a s substituted, g o t o step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes o n .

11-202

DTC P2252: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,


Sensor 1) V S Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2255: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) V S Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i n f o r m a t i o n (see page 11-3).
Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies t o t h e
f r o n t bank (Bank 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 r p m
w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator fan c o m e s
o n , then let it idle 2 minutes.
4. Check for Pending or C o n f i r m e d DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2252 and/or P2255*

indicated?

Y E S - G o t o step 5.
N O - l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the P C M . H

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).

6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle 2 minutes.

7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.


8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
B13(B14)*and body ground.

12. Measure the voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)


6P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


VSB1 (BLU)

VSB2(RED/BLU)*
4

A / F S E N S O R (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR

10

1 2 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 17 18 1 9 2 0
22 23 24

40141

25

26

28

3 2 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 37 38 39

29 30

| 4 2 4 5 1 4 6

I^XLXI 4 9

VSB1 (BLU)
VSB2 (RED/BLU)*

Terminal side of female terminals


Wire side of female terminals

Is there

continuity?

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM


(B13 (B14)*) and A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
14.

YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 13.

Is there about 0.2 V or less?

(cont'd)

11-203

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

14. Reconnect all connectors.

2 1 . Reconnect all connectors.

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).

16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.


17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2252 and/or

P2255'indicated?

Y E S - C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
N O - G o to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 and/or
P2255* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.

23. Start the engine, and let it idle.


24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2252 and/or

P2255'indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.

Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 and/or


P2255* in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

Y E S - l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to
the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g - ^
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.

11-204

DTC P2610: PCM Ignition Off Internal Timer


Malfunction

DTC P2A00: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1,


Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance Problem

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

DTC P2A03: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,


Sensor 1) Range/Performance Problem

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).


2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

Is DTC P2610 indicated?

Information marked with an asterisk O applies to the


front bank (Bank 2).

YES-Go to step 4.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software


(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2610 indicated?
YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm


without load (in P or N) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D
Vehicle speed between 2555 mph (4088 km/h)
for 5 minutes
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph (88
120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the
throttle fully closed) for 8 seconds
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 and/or
P2A03* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

FAILED?

YES-Go to step 6.
N O - l f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor (Sensor
1) and the PCM. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and
recheck.

(cont'd)

11-205

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Replace A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-244).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF


(PCM))
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

11. Test-drive under these conditions:

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above


158 F (70 C)
Transmission in D

Is DTC U0029 indicated?

Vehicle speed between 2555 mph (4088 km/h)


for 5 minutes
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph (88
120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the
throttle fully closed) for 8 seconds
12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2A00 and/or P2A03* indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00
and/orP2A03* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate

PASSED?

YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 12,
go to the indicated DTC s troubleshooting.
NO-lf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor
(Sensorl) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 11.

11-206

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-249), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC U0029 indicated?
YES-lf the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-250). If any other Pending
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.

DTC U0114: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VTM-4


Control Unit)
NOTE:

9. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal


A48 (A49)* and VTM-4 control unit connector terminal
A11 (A22K individually.
*: CANL line

Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and


any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC U0029 is stored at the same time as DTC U0114,
troubleshoot DTC U0029 first, then recheck for DTC
U0114.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC U0114

Indicated?

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.


Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
VTM-4 control unit and the P C M . B
4. Check for DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 10.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
8. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P).

6 7 8 9 10
3 MS

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
11
26 27 28
24
25
29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|4<
j 40 J41
I C A N L (RED)
CANH (WHT)
Terminal side of female terminals
2

/ >< ><
/

VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT


CONNECTOR A ( 2 2 P )
n

YES-Go to step 4.

Is VTM-4 system DTC 41

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

C A N H ( W H T )

// /

m
m

8
10 11
4
1
6
22
20
18
12 13 14 15 16
u
u

CANL (RED)
Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit
(see page 15-44), then go to step 19 and recheck. If
DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the original
VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44), then go to step
19.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4
control unit (A11 (A22)*) and the PCM (A48 (A49)*),
then g o t o step 19.
10. Check for a poor connection at VTM-4 control unit
connectors A (22P) and B (12P).
Are the connections

OK?

YES-Go to step 11.


NO-Repair the connections, then go to step 19.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P).
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(cont'd)

11-207

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Measure the voltage between VTM-4 control unit
connector terminal A1 and body ground.

17. Check for continuity between VTM-4 control unit


connector terminals A10, B5, B12, and body ground
individually.

VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)


VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
IG1 (GRN)
JO. n
1
4
6
8
10 11
22
18
20
12 13 14 15 16

/ /

GND (BLK)

?/

-XL
11 n
4
8
6
1
10 11
22
12 13 14 15 16
18
20

Wire side of female terminals


Wire side of female terminals

Is there battery

voltage?

YES-Go to step 15.


NO-Check the No. 1 IG1 VTM-4 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the No. 1 IG1 VTM-4 (7.5 A)
fuse and the VTM-4 control unit, then go to step 18.
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)

GND (BLK)
n

16. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector B (12P).

2 3 4 5 A
11 12

///

GND (BLK)

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit
(see page 15-44), then go to step 19 and recheck. If
DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the original
VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-44), then go to step
19.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4
control unit and body ground (G504), then go to
step 19.

11-208

18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).


19. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA


Modulator-Control Unit)

21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the DTCs


MENU with the HDS.

2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is DTC U0114 indicated?


YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the VTM-4 control unit and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting-^

Are DTC U0029 and U0122 indicated at the same time?


YES-Go to troubleshooting for DTC U0029 (see page
11-206).
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC U0122 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM.H
5. Check for communication to the VSA system with the
HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the VSA
modulator-control unit?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to VSA system symptom troubleshooting for
the ABS indicator, the brake system indicator, and the
VSA indicator (see page 19-140).
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 36P
connector.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

(cont'd)

11-209

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
A48 and VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector
terminal No. 14.

11. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal


A49 and VSA modulator-control unit 36P connector
terminal No. 1.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

Jl|2
11
22
1
29 30
|40|41

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21

24
25
26 27 28
31 3233 34 3536 37 38 39
48|49|

/
/ >< ><

Terminal side of female terminals

CANH (WHT)

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR


|1|/|3|4|/|6|/|8|9|10|11|

12

13

35

36

I CANL (RED)

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR

Il/|3l4l/l6|/|8l9ll0ll1

12 13

H14|/|/|/|18|19|/|21[/|23|/|
CANH
(WHT)

|25|26|27|/|/|30|/|/|/|34|

CANL
(RED)

I25l26l27l/|/l30l/l/|/l34l

35

36

Wire side of female terminals

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 11.

YES-Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does


not have the latest software (see page 19-146), or
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-147), then go to step 12 and recheck. If
DTC U0122 is not indicated after substitution, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-147), then go to step 12.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A48)


and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to
step 12.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A49)


and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to
step 12.

11-210

12. Reconnect ail connectors.


13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge


Control Module)

15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data


and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).

16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

Is DTC U0122 indicated?

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at


the VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.

Is DTC U0155 indicated?


YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
gauge control module and the PCM.B
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS.
Is DTC B1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page
22-355).
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-359).
8. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (32P).
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

(cont'd)

11-211

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
A48 and gauge control module 32P connector
terminal No. 30.

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal


A49 and gauge control module 32P connector
terminal No. 29.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

J 1|11 2

3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21

24
25
26 27 28
1

29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
|40|41 / l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|

3
8 9|10|

13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21

24
25
26 27 28
29 30 31 3233 34 35L>37 38
40 41
l / | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | / 48|49|

/ >^
/

Jl|2
11

/ >< ><

I CANH (WHT)

Terminal side of female terminals

CANL (RED)
Terminal side of female terminals

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR


,

1|2[/L/|5|6 /|8|9|10 11|12|13|14|/|16|


|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/|27|28|29|30|/132

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR


1121/^1/1516 / | 8 | 9 | 1 0 1 l | l 2 | l 3 h 4 | / | l 6 |
|17|18|19|20|21|22|23|24|25|/127|28|29|30|/132
CANL (RED)

Wire side of female terminals

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 11.

YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control module


(see page 22-359), then go to step 12 and recheck. If
DTC U0155 is not indicated, replace the original gauge
control module (see page 22-359), then go to step 12.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A48)


and the gauge control module, then go to step 12.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A49)


and the gauge control module, then go to step 12.
12. Reconnect all connectors.
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC U0155 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the gauge control module and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting^

11-212

DTC U0300: PGM-FI System and A/T System


Program Version Mismatch
NOTE:
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (0)
while updating the PCM. If you do, the PCM will be
damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure for the PGM-FI and A/T
systems (see page 11-249).
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC U0300

indicated?

YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-250).B


NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B

DTC U1101: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-ACM)


NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
lsDTCU1101indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
engine mount control unit and the PCM.B
4. Check for ACM system DTCs in the DTCs MENU with
the HDS.
Is DTC P15AB

indicated?

YES-Go to the ACM system's DTC P15AB


troubleshooting (see page 4-58).
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

(cont'd)

11-213

PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
A48 and engine mount control unit 16P connector
terminal No. 14.

10. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal


A49 and engine mount control unit 16P connector
terminal No. 12.

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

* liol

rn~2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
11
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21 i
24
25
26 27 28
i
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
48|49|
|40|41
/|44
\/\&Y

/
/ / >< ><

. | 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|10|
11 13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
25
26 27 28 i
1
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 ^ 37 38
| X | 4 4 | / | 4 6 | X 48|49|
40 41

/ / >< ><
/

CANH (WHT)

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL


UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL


UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

i
2

1 0

11

5
1

1 5

CANL (RED)

Terminal side of female terminals

Terminal side of female terminals

1 6

2
1 0

11

5
1

7
1 4

1 5

1 6

CANL (RED)

CANH (WHT)
Wire side of female terminals

r
4

Wire side of female terminals

Is there continuity?

Is there continuity?

Y E S - G o to step 10.

YES-Substitute a known-good engine mount control


unit (see page 4-77), then go to step 11 and recheck. If
DTC U1101 is not indicated after substitution, replace
the original engine mount control unit (see page
4-77), then go to step 11.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A48)


and the engine mount control unit, then go to step 11.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A49)


and the engine mount control unit, then go to step 11.
11. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-326).
15. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
lsDTCU1101indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the engine mount control unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ^

11-214

F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting


1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

5. Disconnect these connectors:

2. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

Gauge control module 32P (see page 22-359).

3. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

VSA modulator-control unit 36P (see page 19-147).